Home

Sony 9000 Switch User Manual

Contents

1. When the 2ND button is unlit The cross point buttons and reentry buttons in the auxiliary bus control block have separate upper 1st row and lower 2nd row numbers In the case of a 32 button layout the button numbers are as follows Auxiliary bus control block button numbers 2ND button unlit Button Button Button numbers 1st row From the left end to the 31st button 1 to 31 Reentry buttons 121 to 124 2nd row From the left end to the 31st button 32 to 62 Reentry buttons 125 to 128 When the 2ND button is lit Different buses can be assigned to the Ist row buttons and 2nd row buttons When the 32nd button is set as a shift button the I st row buttons and 2nd row buttons both have the following button numbers Auxiliary bus control block button numbers 2ND button lit Button Number when the shift Number when the shift button is not pressed button is pressed From the left end to the 31st 1 to 31 32 to 62 button Reentry buttons 121 to 124 125 to 128 Signal Selection Signal Name Display You can attach a name source name to each signal assigned to a cross point button with a maximum of 16 characters e The source name displays in the cross point control bloc
2. If the Mix1 setting is 70 and the Mix2 setting is 40 the proportions of the channels in the mixed portions in the illustration above are as shown in the following table Combination Indication in figure Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Chi and Ch2 p 30 70 Ch3 and Ch4 60 40 Digital Multi Effects DME 115 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 116 Brick Shadow This effect creates a rectangular parallelepiped from 3 successive channels The Brick effect can combine Chl Ch2 and Ch3 or combine Ch2 Ch3 and Ch4 The three images are displayed as shown below Upper side Height el An example of the Brick effect Combinations of Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 Upper side Ch1 image Side V Ch2 image Side H Ch3 image Combinations of Ch2 Ch3 and Ch4 Upper side Ch2 image Side V Ch3 image Side H Ch4 image You can adjust the height of the brick the overlap between the three images and the way to insert the side images This effect gives the image a shadow The effect uses two successive channels You can adjust the position and density of the shadow with respect to the image and the color of the shadow The channel with the largest number for example Ch2 in the case of Chl and Ch2 becomes the shadow Digital Multi Effects DME Digital Multi A Effects Digital Multi Effects DME 1
3. fol Ed 3 Memory recall section 3 Use the buttons in the memory recall section to enter the pattern number consisting of up to three digits and press the ENTR button The entry is confirmed and now the numeric display shows the pattern number For the pattern numbers see the appendix Wipe Pattern List Volume 2 Pattern Mix Combining two patterns You can combine two selected patterns referred to as main and sub to form a new pattern Select a main pattern in the Main Pattern menu then use the following procedure Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 307 s d M g saydeyo 308 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF3 Sub Pattern The Sub Pattern menu appears 2 In the same way as for the main pattern select the sub pattern The patterns that can be selected for the sub pattern depend on the pattern selected for the main pattern see the following table Possible combinations of main pattern and sub pattern Yes Combination possible No Combination not possible Main Sub pattern pattern Standard Enhanced Rotary Mosaic Random diamond dust Standard Yes Yes No Yes Yes Enhanced Yes Yes No Yes Yes Rotary No No No No No Mosaic Yes Yes No No Yes Random Yes Yes No Yes No diamond dust 3 Select HF2 Pattern Mix 4
4. PST COLOR MIX NORM IREV PRIOR SET NORM Transition execution section Wipe direction selection buttons e Transition type selection buttons Key snapshot setting buttons Key delegation buttons Key source name display key snapshot buttons Independent key transition execution section D Independent key transition type selection buttons KF button O Pattern limit buttons TRANS PVW button Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 173 jaueg JOUOD pue snua z 13 deyo jaueg OuJUOD pue snua z Je deuD 174 Next transition selection buttons Press these buttons turning them on to determine what the next transition will apply to BKGD Next transition changes the background KEY1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 in the PGM PST bank Press this button turning it on to make the next transition insert or remove the corresponding key keys to 4 Ifa key is currently inserted it will be removed and vice versa In the PGM PST bank this inserts or removes downstream keys to 4 KEY PRIOR priority When this button is lit the setting of the key priority after the next transition is enabled The key priority after the next transition appears in the key status display ALL Pressing this button
5. a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 276 is on the setting value range is 0 00 to 4 00 When drop border or shadow is selected The setting parameter values depend on the on off setting of key drop and the selection of 4H mode 8H mode see page 52 e Key drop OFF mode Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width 0 00 to 8 00 2 Position Position 359 99 to 180 00 3 Density Density 0 00 to 100 00 e Key drop ON mode Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width 0 00 to 8 00 2 Position Position 359 99 to 0 00 3 Density Density 0 00 to 100 00 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 276 is on the setting value range is 0 00 to 4 00 Key Setting Operations Using Menus When emboss is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width 0 00 to 4 00 2 Position Position 359 99 to 0 00 3 Density Density 0 00 to 100 00 a The Density adjustment only affects the key edge This can be adjusted separately from Key Density and if Key Density is set to 0 00 the embossed edge effect only can be applied To make edge fill adjustments carry out the settings in step 6 Select the edge fill signal in the lt Edge Fill gt group Utility 1 Bus signal selected on the utility 1 bus Matte signal from dedicated color matte generator It becomes possible to adjust color 1
6. Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 When the edge type is outline in place of the edge fill signal the selected key fill signal fills the outline and elsewhere remains as the background Carry out the following operation depending on the selection in step 4 When Utility 1 Bus is selected Hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and select the signal in the background A bus row While the UTIL button is held down the background A bus changes to the utility 1 bus To enable the UTIL button its operation mode must be set to Hold beforehand See Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 When Matte is selected Press Matte Adjust in the same EDGE menu to display the Matte Adjust menu and adjust a single color or two color combination color matte You can select whether to use a single color matte or a two color combination color matte in the lt Edge Matte gt group Key Setting Operations Using Menus shey yp saydeyp shay vp da deyo For the color mix operation see Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte page 277 When emboss is selected for the edge type adjust the color in the lt Emboss Fill gt group To adjust matte 1 press Matte1 and to adjust matte 2 press Matte2 then adjust th
7. To select all of the files for deletion press Select All turning it on 3 To delete the main file in the selected list press Main in the lt Select gt group Similarly to delete the sub file press Sub 4 Press Delete A message for confirming the deletion appears 5 To confirm the deletion press Yes and to cancel press No Renaming Files Renaming a file using the thumbnails Use the following procedure 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF4 File and HF3 Rename Thumbnail The Rename Thumbnail menu appears In the status area whether pair mode is on or off all of the saved files appear as thumbnails 2 Using the arrow keys or turning the knob scroll the thumbnail display Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Scroll Thumbnail display scrolling 1 to 3 Press the thumbnail of the file you want to rename to select it When pair mode is enabled pressing either of main and sub Image Data Management 363 Aioway ewes 7 Jajdeyo oway ewes4 7 Jaydeyo simultaneously selects both files To deselect press once again Press Rename A keyboard window appears Enter the new name then press the Enter button in the keyboard window This renames the file Renaming files using the list display Use the following procedure 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF4 File and HF4 Rename List The Rename List menu appears In
8. Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block e When the CRK button is lit green Knob __ Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Chroma key reference level 0 to 100 2 Gain Key sensitivity 100 shown as 00 to 100 Hue Hue 0 to 359 Density Key density 0 to 100 e When Key Active is off only the parameters Hue and Density are displayed e When both Key Active and Color Cancel are off only the parameter Density is displayed e When the CVK button is lit green Selecting key fill Select whether to use a color matte as key fill or the signal on the key fill bus When using a color matte Press the MATTE FILL button setting it on The button lights green and you can now set the parameters with the knobs Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Color 1 luminance 0 to 100 2 Saturation Color 1 saturation 0 to 100 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 289 Knob __ Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Y Clip Reference level for Y signal 109 to 7 2 Y Gain Y signal sensitivity 100 shown as 00 to 100 3 C Clip Reference level for chrominance 100 to 0 signal 4 C Gain Chrominance signal sensitivity 100 shown as 00 to 100 Y Filter Y signal filter coefficient 1to9 C Filter Chrominance signal filter coefficient 1 to 9 Density Key density 0 to 100
9. Menu control block page 197 Key control block page 179 Device control block page 183 page 187 Memory card USB adaptor block page 198 Utility Shotbox control block page 199 Ena Transition control block standard type page 173 Downstream key control block page 205 Numeric keypad control block page 191 ade to black control block page 193 Flexi Pad control block standard type page 177 Control panel configuration 1 right side with standard transition modules Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 165 jauUeg 04u00 pue snua z seldeup jeueg OUD pue snua z Je deuD 166 Control Panel Example Configuration 2 With Simple Transition Modules The following illustration shows a typical Except for the simple modules this is the configuration with simple transition same configuration as in example modules used in the transition control configuration 1 block Control panel configuration 2 left side with simple transition modules Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Transition control block and Flexi Pad control block simple typ
10. coefficient Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Y Clip Reference level for creating 109 58 to 7 30 luminance signal Y Gain Luminance signal sensitivity 100 00 to 100 00 C Clip Reference level for creating 100 00 to 0 00 chrominance signal 4 C Gain Chrominance signal sensitivity 100 00 to 100 00 5 Density Key density 0 00 to 100 00 6 Y Filter Luminance signal filter coefficient 1 to 9 7 C Filter Chrominance signal filter 1to9 e When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 Soft Degree of edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 Density Key density 0 00 to 100 00 5 Make the following settings as required To invert the black white sense of the key source Press Key Invert turning it on Key Setting Operations Using Menus To adjust the horizontal position or key source width for a luminance key linear key or chroma key Press Key Position turning it on and set the parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Phase Key horizontal position 4 00 to 4 00 2 Left Key left edge position 4 00 to 4 00 3 Right Key right edge position 4 00 to 4 00 To set the key priority Press Key Priority or select VF7 Misc and HF3 Key Priority to access the Key Priority menu For details see Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Op
11. DSK mode Treat P P as four DSKs with no background transitions Of backgrounds 1 to 4 set one to configure the program output The signals which can be selected as the background are limited to Out to 6 from M E 1 to M E 3 e K PVW Config Set the key preview configuration to either video mode or key mode In key mode select whether to link the key state to the on off operation or have it always on e User 1 to 8 Config Assign the User regions being color backgrounds and 2 AUX1 to 48 monitor 1 to 8 and frame memory to 8 to any of USER1 to USER8 e Logical M E Assign Make settings for handling PGM PST hardware logically as an M E Input signal settings Input e Input Phase Adjust Carry out phase adjustment for each primary input e Through Mode Set through mode for the input side This applies only to the primary inputs and can be set independently for each primary input e Video Process Switch video processing on or off for each input signal and adjust the brightness hue and so forth e Matte Illeg Color Limit Switch the illegal limiter on or off for the signal generated by the switcher internal matte generator 152 Setup Output signal settings Output Output Assign Assign the signals output from the Output to 48 ports Video Clip Adjust the clip levels White Clip Dark Clip and Chroma Clip for the output signals from each of the Output to 48 ports V Blank Adjust the vertical blanking width fo
12. a When a value is smaller than 1 1 Aspect or 1 Perspective z is adjusted to an integral value Digital Multi Effects DME 89 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD Three dimensional parameter default values Each of the transformation operation modes has default values for three dimensional parameters If required you can return the current value to the defaults by pressing the CTR button in the device control block twice in rapid succession For details see Three Dimensional Transformation Operations in Chapter 11 Volume 2 The following table shows the default parameter values for each transformation operation mode Operation mode Default value Location XYZ 0 00 Rotation Spin 0 00 Axis Location 0 00 Location Size 1 00 Aspect 1 00 Perspective x y 0 00 Perspective z 1 00 Skew 0 00 Resetting of parameter values set in the source coordinate space In some transformation operation modes if you switch to the target coordinate space after setting up a three dimensional transformation in the source coordinate space the setting values in the source coordinate space three dimensional parameter values are converted to values in the target coordinate space source target conversion Once a conversion has taken place the original source coordinate space parameters do not return to their original values when you switch back to the source coordin
13. 2 0 Key Setting Operations Using Menus Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 4 Hue Hue offset amount 180 00 to 180 00 Selecting Key Fill and Key Source Selecting key fill and key source To select key fill and key source for key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 2 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF1 Type The Type menu appears In the lt Key Fill gt group select either of the following for use as key fill Key Bus signal selected on the key 1 fill bus Matte signal from the dedicated color matte generator If you selected Key Bus in step 2 select the key fill signal on the key 1 row in the cross point control block To select key fill for key 3 or key 4 in the cross point control block press the KEY3 button or KEY4 button to the right of the key bus buttons turning it on to allocate the key row or key 2 row to the key 3 fill or key 4 fill then press the desired cross point button If you selected Matte in step 2 in the same Type menu press the Matte Adjust button to display the Matte Adjust menu then adjust the single color or two color combination color matte Select whether to use a single color matte or a two color combination in the lt Fill Matte gt group Flat Color Adjust color 1 with the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturatio
14. Basic Independent Key Transition Operations In the independent key transition control block use the following procedure 1 Select one or more of the delegation buttons KEY 1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 in the PGM PST bank turning them on 2 Select the transition type To fade a key in or out Press the MIX button turning it on To insert or delete a key using a dedicated wipe pattern Press the WIPE button turning it on To insert or delete a key using a dedicated DME wipe pattern Press the DME button turning it on If in the Setup menus you set insertion and deletion as independent modes make the settings for the next transition in the independent key 248 Independent Key Transitions transition control block Separate settings are required both when inserting a key and when deleting it For example with the key not inserted if you select the transition type and carry out a transition this will be the setting when inserting a key You can also use the Transition menu to select a desired independent key transition type for each key see the next section For details of the wipe settings see Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions page 322 For details of DME wipe settings see DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions page 339 Execute the transition To insert or delete the key gradually with a mix or wipe transition Press the AUTO TRANS button For details of the tran
15. Effect execution section RUN When this button is pressed the effect is run from the first keyframe to 189 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jaueg 04u00 pue snua z seldeup jaueg OJU0D pue snua z Je deuD 190 the last keyframe However if a pause is set on a keyframe the effect stops at that point Press this button again to resume execution and continue to the next pause point or the end of the effect Effect indicator This consists of 30 LEDs and shows the progress of the effect Fader lever Moving this up or down manually runs the effect REWIND When this button is pressed the currently recalled effect is rewound to the first keyframe FF fast forward When this button is pressed the currently recalled effect is advanced to the last keyframe Effect execution direction selection buttons NORM normal When this button is lit effect execution runs from the first keyframe to the last keyframe REV reverse When this button is lit effect execution runs from the last keyframe to the first keyframe Pressing one of these buttons automatically turns the other off NORM REV normal reverse Press this button turning it on to reverse the direction of the effect when it reaches the last keyframe or first keyframe STOP NEXT KF stop next keyframe button When this button is pressed turning it on the effect execution range is from the current time to the
16. Fade to Black Control Block AUTO button FTB button Preview selection buttons FTB fade to black button Press this button to fade to black the program output of the PGM PST bank at the set transition rate You can set the fade to black transition rate in the menu Preview selection buttons Press one of these buttons to select a signal on the edit preview bus PST preset When this button is pressed the signal selected on the background B row of the PGM PST bank is selected on the edit preview bus M E 1 to M E 3 P P M E1 to M E 3 P P preview The preview signal M E 1 PVW M E 2 PVW M E 3 PVW P P PVW of the M E or PGM PST bank corresponding to the pressed button is selected on the edit preview bus M E1 K to M E3 K P P K M E1 to M E 3 P P key preview The key preview signal M E 1 K PVW M E 2 K PVW M E 3 K PVW P P K PVW of the M E or PGM PST bank corresponding to the pressed button is selected on the edit preview bus DME V DME video When this button is pressed the DME monitor output video signal DME MON V is selected on the edit preview bus DME K DME key When this button is pressed the DME monitor output key signal DME MON K is selected on the edit preview bus AUTO button When this button is pressed the M E or PGM PST bank preview signal selected on the edit preview bus is automatically switched to the prog
17. I I I l I I t Local coordinate space and global coordinate space Three dimensional parameters Three dimensional parameters are x y and z values which define the position of an image its axis of rotation the position of an imaginary point of view on the image and so on The standard values of parameters are as shown below depending on the aspect ratio of your monitor 4 3 or 16 9 Values for 4 3 mode e Origin at center of image source coordinate space or center of monitor target coordinate space x 0 00 y 0 00 z 0 00 Upper right corner of image or monitor x 4 00 y 3 00 z 0 00 e Lower left corner of image or monitor x 4 00 y 3 00 z 0 00 Digital Multi Effects DME 87 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuo 88 Z axis x axis 4 00 4 00 x axis Z axis The plus direction on the z axis is depth into the image or monitor screen Values for x y and z axes 4 3 mode Values for 16 9 mode e Origin at center of image source coordinate space or center of monitor target coordinate space x 0 00 y 0 00 z 0 00 e Upper right corner of image or monitor x 4 00 y 2 25 z 0 00 e Lower left corner of image or monitor x 4 00 y 2 25 z 0 00 The plus direction on the z axis is depth into the image or monitor screen Values for x y and z a
18. When the PTN button is lit green Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 to 100 2 Soft Edge softness 0 to 100 Density Key density 0 to 100 shey py saydeyp shay vp da deyo 290 Knob 3 Hue Parameter Adjustment Color 1 hue Setting values 359 to 0 When Mix Color is selected in the key fill Matte Adjust menu you can further adjust color 2 When Mix Color is on and the MORE button is lit amber Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Color 1 luminance 0 to 100 2 Saturation Color 1 saturation 0 to 100 3 Hue Color 1 hue 359 to 0 4 Size Pattern size 0 to 100 When Mix Color is on and the MORE button is lit green Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Color 2 luminance 0 to 100 2 Saturation Color 2 saturation 0 to 100 3 Hue Color 2 hue 359 to 0 4 Soft Edge softness 0 to 100 When using the key fill bus signal Press the MATTE FILL button turning it off To select the key fill signal use the key 1 or key 2 bus buttons in the cross point control block To select the key fill signal for key 3 or key 4 in the cross point control block press the KEY3 button or KEY4 button to the right of the key bus buttons turning it on to allocate the key bus row or key 2 bus row to the key 3 fill or key 4 fill then press the desired cross point button Selecting key source To
19. When the VTR operation mode is enabled LOCAL DELAY Press this button turning it on to enter a delay value from the numeric keypad control block GLB STB OFF standby off Press this button to switch to standby off mode SRC REC record Press this button at the same time as the Y button to record on the VTR TRGT STOP Press this button to stop the tape AXIS LOC START TC start timecode Press this button to set the timecode of the start point Each time you press the button the start point changes ASP PERS STOP TC stop timecode Press this button to set the timecode of the stop point Each time you press the button the stop point changes LOC SIZE VAR variable speed playback Pressing this button and turning the Z ring plays back the tape at a variable speed and direction proportional to the rotation angle of the Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jaueg JOUOD pue snua z seldeup Jaueg OUD pue snua z Je deuD 186 Z ring The variable speed range is 1 to 3 times normal playback speed LOC XYZ SHTL shuttle Pressing this button and turning the Z ring plays back the tape at a speed and direction proportional to the rotation angle of the Z ring ROT JOG Pressing this button and turning the Z ring plays back the tape at a speed and direction proportional to the rotation speed and direction of the Z ring CLR WORK BUFR CUE Pressing this button cues the t
20. suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD Aspect In the source coordinate space changes the aspect ratio in the x direction and y direction either independently or simultaneously Change of aspect ratio in Change of aspectratio in y Simultaneous change x direction direction aspect ratio in x direction and y direction Perspective In the target coordinate space changes the perspective on the image by changing an imaginary view point without changing the position of the image The x axis and y axis values define the position of the view point The z axis value defines its distance from the image Change of view point on Change of view point on y Change of distance from x axis axis view point to image 94 Digital Multi Effects DME Skew In the source coordinate space change the skew of the image on the x axis or y axis Change of skew on x axis Change of skew on y axis Graphics Display Graphics display is a function that allows you to display wire frames coordinate axes and a grid over the current DME image to make it easier to create effects in three dimensional coordinate space To make graphics display settings use the DME menu For details see Graphics Display in Chapter 11 Volume 2 You can display the following kinds of graphics Wire frames A wire frame displays an image enclosed in a frames so that
21. 2 Press one of the buttons in Table 1 above to select the wipe position to which the operation applies Multiple selection is possible 3 Press the POS button turning Position on 4 Move the trackball or joystick to set the wipe position By pressing the X button turning it on you can restrict movement to the horizontal direction and by pressing the Y button turning it on you can restrict movement to the vertical direction Also when either of these buttons is lit you can enter a coordinate of the wipe position from the numeric keypad To set the wipe position by a menu operation Use the following procedure 1 Press Position in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu turning it on Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions 2 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 2 Position V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 a See page 61 To move the pattern from its current position to the center through the course of a transition Press Auto Center in the lt Position gt group turning it on Rotating the wipe pattern Rotation Use the following procedure 1 In the lt Rotation gt group of the Key Wipe Adjust menu select the rotation type Angle Incline the pattern through a fixed angle Speed Rotate at a speed rate Magnitude Rotate the pattern through a fixed angle during the course
22. 210 Basic Menu Operations For details of the VF buttons and HF Menu Organization buttons see Interpreting the Menu Screen page 216 Operations on the DVS 9000 switcher system make frequent use of menu operations This section describes the menus and their interrelationships Overview All detailed settings for basic operations such as transitions keys DME or wipes are made in menus There are also menus for carrying out general system control managing setting data and initial setup Accessing menus You can use any of the following methods to access a menu and the initially displayed menu page depends on the method used Pressing a top menu selection button in the menu control block This displays the page you last accessed in the particular menu After initially powering on the system however the page of VF1 HF1 of the particular menu is always selected Pressing a top menu selection button in the menu control block twice in rapid succession The page of VF1 HF1 of the particular menu is displayed Pressing a button other than a top menu button twice in rapid succession see page 212 Depending on the button this may display a fixed page or the page selected last time you accessed the menu Basic Menu Operations Menus accessed from a top menu selection button Buttons Menus Function See M E 1 M E 1 Tran
23. 50 For details of video adjustment operations and the adjustment items see Chroma Key Adjustments page 266 Wipe pattern key This uses the wipe pattern selected for a transition as the key source Key wipe pattern key This uses the wipe pattern selected for an independent key transition as the key source Note on wipe pattern modifiers In a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key you can apply various modifications depending on the pattern used and the modifiers in common with a wipe However modifiers which relate to the wipe direction and edge are not reflected Key Modifiers Edge modifiers Keys You can apply borders and other effects to the edge of the key See Key Edge Modifications pages 273 and 291 Normal This is the state with no key edge modifiers applied Border This applies a uniform width border to the edge of the key You can adjust the border width and density You can also enable the separate edge function and adjust the top bottom left and right border widths separately Drop border This applies a border below and to the right for example of the key You can adjust the border width position and density Shadow This applies a shadow below and to the right for example of the key You can adjust the shadow width position and density Keys 51 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suonoun4 0006 SAC_ JaldeuD 52 Outline This uses the outl
24. Color Background Ss cc csccscesocsssrssocssessvscssesesssosssesesvcevsvensessoesseevesasvesesseseooace 78 Copy ANd SWAP sasscsscersosoccasserssorsoasosasecssoovesecsesscesendsoseseasersesassnsesessoaseceseasoese 79 Video PLOCESS sssessssessssesssresseseesesesceseecesessesesceseseseeseeesesessesessesersesessevees 83 Video Process Adjustment of a Primary Input Signal 83 Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus n 83 Video Process MeMOTY creien eieiei e eeni rio 84 Digital Multi Effects DME esssseessssecseesosescsoeseserosoeseoesosesecorsesecosoeseoeeosecesoe 85 Three Dimensional Transformations sesssessessseseeseesererreerrersesreessee 85 Transformation Operation Modes sseeesseeesessesesersreerereerrreerrreereressene 90 Graphics BI oE ne E E E eia tees 95 Three Dimensional Parameter Display ssesssseessessrsesseeerrrrereersrrersrees 97 DME Special Effects nicoi nensi a een 97 Interpolation areetan E E ae ATES aN 111 Key Density Adjustment 00 cee eeeeessceecceeseceeeeceeeceaeeeneeceeeeeneeeeneees 112 Key Source Selection eee ceeecseceseeseceseeseceeeeeeeeneeseeeaesseecaeesaeeaee 112 Global Ettects s n ieyint Seapecesignedennsndasauesovvuesieenenb ena teeetbenaess 112 External DeVice ercsi annona a 118 Shared Functions for External Device Control sesseeeeeseeeeeeseessseeeee 118 Control of P BUS Devices ssseesessessseessseeserssrsseesresstesressrssresressresres 119 C trolof G
25. Effect Execution Keyframes By pressing the RUN button in the keyframe control block you can replay the effect as a continuous sequence of images This is referred to as effect execution It is also possible to execute effects from the device control block see page 183 Range of execution Each time the RUN button is pressed the range of execution of the effect is from timecode 01 00 00 00 or the current time the position at which the current effect is stopped to the end point of the effect However if there is a pause set on a keyframe the execution range is up to that point Pressing the RUN button again resumes the effect which then runs to the next pause point or the end of the effect Run mode setting You can select from the following run modes for when the effect is executed DIRECTION Specify the effect execution direction STOP NEXT KF Run the effect and stop at the next keyframe EFFECT LOOP Repeat the effect in an endless loop Make these settings in the keyframe control block See Run Mode Setting in Chapter 13 Volume 2 Master Timelines You can save the regions selected for a keyframe effect and the register numbers saved in the regions in a master timeline register so that operation can be applied to two or more regions at a time Master timeline registers can be saved or recalled from the numeric keypad control block or using a menu operation See Creating and Saving a Master Tim
26. macro register For each control panel there are 99 macro registers numbered 1 to 99 Events Macros The individual control panel operations constituting a macro are termed events One macro can contain a maximum of 99 events The following table shows the operations for each control block of the control panel that can be saved as events in a macro Control block Auxiliary bus control block Event Bus selection Cross point control block Bus selection Transition control block standard type Auto transition and key insertion deletion for the independent key transition execution section e Auto transition and cut for the transition execution section Transition control block simple type Auto transition for the transition execution section Transition control block compact type e Auto transition for the independent key transition execution section e Auto transition and cut for the transition execution section Independent key transition control block simple type e Auto transition and cut for the independent key transition execution section e Auto transition for the transition execution section Flexi Pad control block standard type e Effect recall Snapshot recall Flexi Pad control block simple type Snapshot recall Control block Event Numeric keypad control block e Effect recall Snapshot recall Keyframe control
27. page 322 Wipe Settings Menu Accessing the wipe settings menu To access the M E 1 gt Wipe menu use any of the following operations e In the menu control block select the top menu selection button M E 1 and press VF5 Wipe e In the transition control block of the M E 1 bank press the transition type selection button WIPE twice in rapid succession e In the Flexi Pad control block of the M E 1 bank press the WIPE button twice in rapid succession Any of the above operations displays the M E 1 gt Wipe menu Wipe Pattern Selection You can select a wipe pattern in the Wipe menu or by entering a pattern number from the Flexi Pad control block For how to use the Flexi Pad control block see Selecting a wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad control block page 306 Selecting a wipe pattern by a menu operation Use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF1 Main Pattern The Main Pattern menu appears Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 2 Select the wipe pattern group with the pattern group selection button Standard standard wipes Enhanced enhanced wipes Rotary rotary wipes Mosaicl to Mosaic3 mosaic wipes Random Dust random diamond dust wipes The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen For details of wipe patterns see Types of Wipe Pattern page 56 and the appendix Wipe Pattern List Volume 2 Press the button to selec
28. 227 Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation eects 229 Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority ee 230 Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation cscccsecsessees 232 Super Mix Settings cccscccscsscscsssccsssssscsssesssscsessssssesssesseessesssessersesees 233 Color Matte Settings csccsscsscssscsscsscssssscsssssscssscssesssesssessceseessessessserses 234 Executing a Transition e seseosesoosessosessossosoesesoesessesoesesooseososoesossessesossesosses 235 Transition Indicator Function ceceeseceeeeeseceececeeceeseceeneeseeeneecenees 235 Setting the Transition Rate eee eee ceeseecreeseceeeeseceeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeaes 236 Pattern Limit oorno dioi ai cess sepenseh opted E E E 239 Executing an Auto Transition sseeesseeeseeereresrerrsrerrsresesreserrrereersreee 243 Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever Manual Transition 243 Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions 0 00 0 eee ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeee 244 Non Syne S tate ssiiss s cesses ienis rearset neas pe ae Er ris RE E RESSE Esha 244 Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode sseseeeeeeeeeseeeeereereres 245 Transition Preview sscsssssresssrsssersesssssssrssssrsesessesessesessesessesessesessesesees 247 Independent Key Transitions cssssscsssssssssssssssessesesescecsseesecsseesecees 248 Basic Independent Key Transition Operations eee eee reece 248 Setting the Independent
29. Color settings DME channel settings You can carry out copy operations with a simple button operation Swap operations and copy operations on DME data can only be done with a menu operation To carry out DME operations requires the BKDS 9470 DME Board Set For details of the operations see Chapter 9 Copy and Swap page 371 M E copy and M E swap You can copy and swap the overall bank settings among the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks Target bank M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 PGM PST Target data Bank settings excluding the following data items Setup data e Flexi Pad settings Snapshots Keyframe effects Key snapshots Key memory If a DME is being used on the source M E bank then if for example there are insufficient DME channels it may not be possible to select the DME There are no such restrictions on a swap Copy and Swap 79 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD Keyer copy and keyer swap You can carry out copy and swap operations among the 16 keyers listed in the following table Target bank Target keyer Target data M E 1 Keys 1 to 4 Key settings excluding the following data M E 2 items M E 3 Setup data PGM PST Downstream keys 1to4 Key Snapshots Key memory If a DME is being used on the source keyer for a copy or either keyer for a swap then if for example there are insufficient DME channels or the l
30. In constant duration mode see page 129 itis not possible to change the keyframe duration setting Effect duration This is the total execution time of the effect from the first keyframe to the last You can set this time in the keyframe control block See Time Settings in Chapter 13 Volume 2 When you change the effect duration the keyframe duration for each keyframe in the effect is automatically recalculated proportionally Keyframe duration Keyframe number 1 min 2 3 4 5 Willa _ Effect duration gt Schematic view of keyframe duration and effect duration The effect duration may also be changed by inserting or deleting keyframes 130 Keyframes Changes in the effect duration caused by inserting a keyframe e When the effect is stopped on a keyframe inserting a keyframe increases the effect duration by the duration of the inserted keyframe e When the effect is stopped between two keyframes inserting a keyframe does not change the effect duration In constant duration mode see page 129 the duration of the current keyframe is reduced to zero and the new keyframe is inserted with the previous duration of the current keyframe Thus the effect duration does not change Insertion position Change in effect duration Insertion before the first keyframe Ui cel 2 3 4 1 Z 2 3 4 5 Insertion between two keyframes
31. Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 78 Color Backgrounds The dedicated generators generate color signals and these can be used as color backgrounds in video effects Color background selection There are two color backgrounds color background 1 and color background 2 which you use by assigning to cross point buttons Color combinations color mix The color generators can output the result of combining two colors which are color 1 and color 2 Using a pattern from a dedicated pattern generator color and color 2 can be combined in the boundary region forming a color gradation This is referred to in the menu system as color mix You can also apply modifiers to the selected pattern When the color mix function is not used the result is a flat color and color 1 is always output For details of operations see Color Background Setting Operations page 368 Color Backgrounds Copy and Swap You can copy and swap the settings among the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks or between keyers The following settings can be copied or swapped Overall settings for the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks Keyer settings Wipe settings in a transition control block Wipe settings in an independent key transition control block DME wipe settings in a transition control block DME wipe settings in an independent key transition control block Matte data color 1 color 2 and how to compose them
32. M E 2 M E 3 PGM PST Downstream keys 1 to 4 Target data DME wipe settings in the independent key transition control block Matte data copy and swap You can copy or swap the matte data among the 38 color generators listed in the following table Target bank Target keyer and data Matte data for key fill Matte data for key edge fill M E 1 e Keys 1 to4 M E 2 e Downstream keys 1 to 4 M E 3 z PGM PST Matte data for wipe border edge Color background Matte data for color background 1 e Matte data for color background 2 Color data copy and swap You can copy or swap the color data among the 152 color generators listed in the following table Target bank Target keyer and data M E 1 e Keys 1 to 4 M E 2 e Downstream keys 1 to 4 M E 3 PGM PST Colors 1 and 2 for key fill Colors 1 and 2 for key edge fill Zabton color data Colors 1 and 2 for wipe border Color data for preset color mix Color background Colors 1 and 2 for color background 1 e Colors 1 and 2 for color background 2 Frame memory e FM1 color FM2 color Copy and Swap 81 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 82 Target bank DME ch1 to ch4 Target keyer and data Background Border Sepia Light Shade Drop shadow other than DME ch4 Trail DME channel copy and swap You can copy and swap the
33. See Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 When Matte is selected In the same Edge Direction menu press Matte Adjust to display the Matte Adjust menu then adjust the single color or two color combination color matte Select whether to use a single color matte or a two color combination in the lt Edge Matte gt group Flat Color Adjust color 1 with the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 When you select Mix Color for a two color combination see the next paragraph Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings Carrying out a color mix for the edge fill matte When you selected Matte for the border or soft border edge fill you can combine color 1 and color 2 For the combination you can use not only a normal wipe generator pattern but also the dedicated color mix pattern Use the following proced ure 1 In the lt Edge Fill gt group of the Edge Direction menu select Matte and press Matte Adjust The Matte Adjust menu appears 2 In the lt Edge Matte gt group select Mix Color turning it on 3 In the lt Mix Pattern gt group make one of the following selections Wipe Use the wipe pattern selected for the transition Pattern Use the dedicated pattern 4 Depending on the selection in step 3 set the fol
34. Wipe Snapshots page 327 DME Wipe Snapshots 341 sedim AWG 9 Jeldeyo sedi JWG 9 JeldeyD 342 Creating User Programmable DME Patterns With a user programmable DME you can use DME effects created through the use of keyframes for a transition on the switcher system Note the following points when creating a keyframe effect for use as a user programmable DME pattern Register numbers and pattern numbers When saving a keyframe effect as a user programmable DME pattern specify the register number that corresponds to the pattern number as shown in the following table Execution mode Register number Pattern number One channel mode 101 to 199 1901 to 1999 Two channel mode 201 to 299 2901 to 2999 For details of registers and keyframe effects see Registers page 125 and Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects Volume 2 respectively Keyframe effects in the global channel When the effect with the same number as the reference channel is present on the DME global GLBL channel executing the user programmable DME will also execute the effect on the global channel simultaneously When executing a user programmable DME take note of whether the effect is present on the global channel User Programmable DME Transition Mode To create a user programmable DME it is necessary to set the transition mode the way in which the effect moves To set the transition mode use the Key Frame gt DME Us
35. default 55 delegation buttons 176 205 deleting 33 density adjustment 112 disable 141 edge modifications 273 291 inserting 33 mask 53 memory 54 modifier buttons 180 modifiers 50 modify clear 55 output destination 284 output status display 230 257 settings 153 signal adjustments 268 source selection 112 status display 175 202 209 Key active 48 adjustment 267 KEY button 195 Key fill selection 271 selection buttons 180 Key priority 227 display 230 257 selecting 34 setting by a menu opera tion 229 setting in the transition control block 227 Key setting using menus 262 Key snapshot 299 buttons 176 206 recalling 300 302 saving 299 301 setting buttons 176 206 using simple transition module 301 Key source name display 176 206 selection 271 selection buttons 180 Key transition selection buttons 201 Key type selection buttons 180 setting 263 Keyboard window 220 Keyer copy 80 swap 80 Keyframe 127 control block 188 duration 130 effect registers 125 status 216 strobe 110 KF button 176 Knob 181 197 parameter buttons 216 K SS button 204 L Left button 221 Lens 106 Level selection buttons 196 Lighting 109 Line feed button 221 Linear key 46 Local coordinate space 86 Location size 93 XYZ 91 Lock function 361 Luminance key 46 M E bank display 172 copy 79 swap 79 Macros 160 attachment 161 editing 161 events 160 execution 161 pause events 161 registers 160 Magnitude 62
36. eect ceseeseceeceseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 191 Fade to Black Control Block 0 eee ceeeseceeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeas 193 Auxiliary Bus Control Block eee cseeeeceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeae 194 Menu Control Block eee eeeesceseeesecsseeseceseaecscseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeas 197 Memory Card USB Adaptor BIOCK 0 eee ceeceseeeeceseeeeeneeeseeees 198 Utility Shotbox Control Block oc eee eeeceeeesecnseesecneeeseeereeeeees 199 Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block Simple Type 200 Independent Key Transition Control Block Simple Type 203 Downstream Key Control Block 00 ceseeeeceeceseeeeeceeeneeeeeeseees 205 Transition Control Block Compact Type eee eeceeeeeceeereeeeeene 207 Table of Contents 11 12 Basic Menu Operations cccccscccsssscsscssscscsesssscsssssscssessseesecsseesscsseesesees 210 Menu Organization 0 0 eee eceseesceseecsecseesseceseaececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeena 210 Accessing a Menu ssnstinin isene EE r heaves Er E nE 215 Interpreting the Menu Screen esesseseseessserseesrerrsrerrsrererrrsrrrrsreersrene 216 Menu Operations sssrinin iseenese riie e ees rris riai 217 Chapter 3 Transitions Basic Operating Procedure esseseosescosessosessossesoesessesossesoesesoosessosoesoesesss 224 Key Priority Setting esseseesesoesessesessesoosesoosessossesoesesoesossesoesessosessosessoesesss 227 Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block 000000
37. q G i Video Processing Flow Signal Selection You carry out signal selection with the cross point buttons in the cross point control block of each M E bank or the PGM PST bank and the buttons in the auxiliary bus control block The number of buttons in each cross point row may be 16 24 or 32 but here the description is of the 32 button case as an example Source name displays Key 2 row Key 1 row Reentry buttons Cross point buttons KEY4 button KEY3 button OOUUOUUE Pa OE ERES a vi oat Chena Ber TE be he wer Reentry buttons SHIFT button Background B row Background A row goga UTIL button Cross point control block Signal Selection 25 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 26 Basics of Signal Selection Each of the M E bank PGM PST bank and auxiliary bus control block has 32 cross point buttons and three reentry buttons four in the case of the auxiliary bus control block These buttons are identified by numbers common to all of the banks and block and a signal is assigned to each number The basis of signal selection is to select in a cross point button row the cross point button to which is assigned the desired signal Reentry buttons To use the output of one M E bank as background input to another bank use the reentry buttons M E
38. 0 ee 323 Wipe Snapshotss s ssssscsscasessessssocessosocsassinssuesesssuvesassossecssesssea sosssessosvesssosaesosnsts 327 Saving a Wipe Snapshot eee ceseeeeceeceeeceeceeeeeeeeseeesesseecaeeaeeaes 328 Recalling a Wipe Snapshot eee eee esceseeeeecreesseceeaeceeceseeeeeseees 329 Deleting a Wipe Snapshot 0 cece eseeseecseesseceeceseeseceeeeeeneeeseeees 330 Table of Contents 1 3 14 Chapter 6 DME Wipes Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings ccscsssssscssssssesessseseseeees 332 DME Wipe Settings Menu 0 cece ee ceeeeeceeeeeeeeseeceeceaecaeeaeeaeeneens 332 DME Wipe Pattern Selection cece eeeseeesecseeeseceseeseceeceseeeeeeeeees 332 Setting DME Wipe Modifiers oes cseeeceeceseeseceseeeseneeeeeeees 333 DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions s000e 339 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings 339 Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers 340 DME Wipe Snapshots cccccssscscssscsccessssscsssssscscsssssscssssescssssseesesseees 341 Creating User Programmable DME Patterns cscscsssscsssssscsseesseees 342 User Programmable DME Transition Mode 0 0 00 eee eeeeseeeeeeeeees 342 Chapter 7 Frame Memory Frame Memory Operations scscccscsssssscsscssccsssssssscsssssscssessseeseeeseeee 348 Preparations ioc cscite e E E aU deerme tessa 348 Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu 0 cece eeseeceseee
39. 1 1 ae ea 1 1 r EE E E A 1 1 b 4 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 eee 1 1 1 Grid 4 3 mode Shrinking the graphics display You can shrink the graphics display so that you can see beyond the range displayed on the normal monitor screen This makes it possible to visually set the location of images in a larger space The range displayed on a normal monitor screen is indicated by a frame Digital Multi Effects DME f Wire frame Range displayed on normal monitor screen To automatically erase the graphic display Turn Auto Erase on The graphic display is erased automatically whenever a keyframe is executed It is displayed again after the keyframe ends after the time set in Recovery Time Three Dimensional Parameter Display You can display a three dimensional parameter list for the currently controlled image When more than one DME channel is selected the status of the reference channel is displayed For the method of displaying a parameter list and an example display see Three Dimensional Parameter Display in Chapter 11 Volume 2 DME Special Effects You can use DME to add a variety of special effects To add effects use the DME menu See DME Special Effect Operations in Chapter 11 Volume 2 Digital Multi Effects DME 97 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suonoun4 0006 SAC_ JaldeyD 98 Border This effect adds a bor
40. 3 5 or 7 is referred to as the main file and the other frozen in FM2 4 6 or 8 is referred to as the sub file Frame Memory 73 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 74 Operation modes The frame memory has the following operation mode V K mode When the pair mode is active the key signal is automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2 This is convenient for handling the video and key signals together in frame memory For example when you select a video signal on frame memory source bus 1 the key signal assigned to it is automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2 You can also use the signal automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2 as a key signal when processing keyframe memory 1 To change the pair mode or operation mode use the Frame Memory menu Frame Memory Functions The frame memory provides the following functions e Capturing an image e Saving an image e Recalling an image e Processing an image e Image output e Image data management e Image data transfer Capturing an image freeze As the input material for the frame memory you can use the signal selected on the frame memory source bus For this signal you can use video processing video levels or hue value adjustment or masking Allocating a frame memory source bus signal to one of FM1 to FM8 then carrying out a freeze captures a still image in the corresponding frame memory outpu
41. Com when image is processed lt FG gt input signal status FMS frame memory source Col color matte signal lt BG gt processing background signal status Blk black signal Stl still image freeze image or still image file Enable status display Off Both Freeze Enable and Edit Enable are off Frz Freeze Enable is on Edt Edit Enable is on Reposition Lock status display These appear for frame memory outputs FM1 to FM8 when reposition see page 360 or lock see page 361 is currently applied Pair button Press this button turning it on to enable pair mode lt Select gt group Select the output to which operations apply Selecting an Input Image For the input image to frame memory you can use either the signal selected on one of the two frame memory source buses or a dedicated color matte signal When using the signal on frame memory source bus or 2 for the input image select the signal as described below For the method of using a color matte signal see Freezing an image and writing it to memory page 352 Selecting the signal on a frame memory source bus As an example to select a signal on frame memory source bus 1 use the following procedure 350 Frame Memory Operations 1 In the auxiliary bus control block press the AUX delegation button to which frame memory source bus is allocated turning it on For allocation of buses to the AUX delegation buttons see AUX Del
42. Main mask 53 using 280 295 Main sub modifier link 59 Maintenance 147 Manual transition 43 243 Masks 53 279 295 Master region 125 snapshot registers 126 timeline registers 126 timelines 139 Matte data copy 81 swap 81 Max min value indication 218 Melt 109 Memory card slot 198 initialization 147 Index 383 xepu x pul Ni 384 recall buttons 199 Memory card USB adaptor block 198 Menu accessing 210 215 control block 197 display 197 operations 217 organization 210 page number button 216 screen 216 title button 216 MENU button 186 Minus button 219 Mirror 105 Misc menu operations 376 MIX 75 174 176 208 Mix 39 57 Mode selection buttons 177 191 202 Modulation 65 319 Mono 99 MORE button 181 Morphing 57 Mosaic 100 glass 101 Motion decay 110 Multi 63 317 326 mirror 105 move 99 N NAM 40 75 174 208 Nega 100 Negative NAM 57 Network configuration 145 Next transition 32 selecting 32 selection buttons 174 207 Non additive mix 40 174 208 Nonlinear effects 101 Non Sync state 244 Normal edge 294 mix 47 Numeric display 178 202 Index Numeric keypad 192 control block 191 window 218 O ON AIR indicators 181 One stroke mode 40 One time mode 40 Operation buttons 184 modes 74 settings 150 Outline 52 parameters 293 Output destination specification buttons 182 signal settings 153 OVERRIDE button 182 P Page turn 107 Pair mode 73 Pairing 64 318 Panel s
43. Regions and Registers Keyframes A keyframe represents an instantaneous state of an image it can be saved and recalled for reuse Effects By arranging a number of keyframes on the time axis and interpolating between successive keyframes you can create an effect in which there is a continuous change from each keyframe to the next The figure below shows three keyframes created with a wipe pattern the circle in different positions This is interpolated to create the effect shown Background A lt gt Interpolated images Background B Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution Example of keyframes and effect execution You can save the sequence of keyframes representing a single effect in a register Then by recalling this register you can replay the same effect For details of keyframe effect registers see Regions and Registers page 124 Keyframes 127 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 128 Saving and Recalling Effects To create a new effect first recall an empty register then create the keyframes one at a time in this register To run an effect it is also necessary to set the time and the path To edit an existing effect recall the register holding the effect then make the changes When you have finished creating or editing the effect save it in the recalled register or another specified register Auto save func
44. Set the key memory operation mode for each of the M E and P P banks Video Proc Memory Enable or disable video process memory Show Key Enable or disable show key for edit preview M E and P P Pvw K Pvw DSK Auto Drop Specify a DSK to be turned off automatically when a cross point button on the P P program bus is pressed Mask Border Process Set the processing order of masks and borders for each M E and P P bank Key Priority Set the key priority operation mode for each of the M E and P P banks In DSK mode the key priority is fixed Setup 153 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 154 Xpt Hold mode Set the operation mode for the cross point hold button provided on the key bus for each of the M E and P P banks Pattern Limit Transition Set the operation mode when the pattern limit is released for each of the M E and P P banks Wipe Edge Default Adjust the wipe edge softness for each of the M E and P P banks FM Auto Store Switch on or off the function to automatically attach a name and save in frame memory Link settings Link e Internal Bus Link Make a setting of the bus link function that links together two buses internal to the switcher e GPI Link Make settings for linking any cross point buttons or CUT and AUTO TRANS buttons in the cross point control block and GPI output ports External device connections Device Interface e Remote Assign Set the use of the four 9
45. Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block Simple Type 200 Independent Key Transition Control Block Simple Type 203 Downstream Key Control Block 0 eee cee eee ceeesecneceseeeeeseees 205 Transition Control Block Compact Type seeceeesceeeeeees 207 Basic Menu Operations ssscsccseccsessessecesessessescosssecccscsstecseassorseasscesaassasseese 210 MOO orm eee oeeaeey uerecer ener 210 Aeee Peat ICTs nara cee cee gee ne eae ene ater een ees 215 Interpretin sathesMenueS Crecmecassseseres eer e E E 216 Menu PeratlOms e r E E EE curse Steerer sree EE ees 217 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Control Panel Example Configuration 1 With Standard Transition Modules The DVS 9000 system control panel standard transition modules used in the comprises a number of modules transition control block The following illustration shows a typical 32 button 4 M E configuration with jaueg OuJU0D pue snua z Ja deuD 164 Auxiliary bus control block page 194 M E 1 bank ooogo0o0gocog0g00g000000000000000 POONGODOC V UQCIHOVV VB QOYD M E 2 bank M E 3 bank PGM PST program preset bank oot Cross point control block page 169 Control panel configuration 1 left side with standard transition modules Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Keyframe control block page 188
46. e Do interpolation in field units e Do interpolation in frame units You can also select the number of pixels used in interpolation processing and select the method used to show the picture reduced or expanded Key Density Adjustment You can adjust the key density for the key signal input to the DME Key Source Selection You can select either the key signals received from the switcher or the key signals generated in the DME for application to the front and back of the image see page 111 Global Effects Global effects are special effects created by combining the images of successive channels The Global Effect menu is used to add these effects For details of this menu see Global Effect Operations in Chapter 11 Volume 2 The following types of global effects are available e Combiner e Brick e Shadow Digital Multi Effects DME Combiner When multiple channels are selected on one keyer or for one transition the Combiner automatically combines the selected images Up to three channels can be combined You can also control the way in which the combination is carried out as a mix or an overlap with priority set automatically For a mix you can control the relative amounts of each channel Combination of channel 1 Ch1 and channel 2 Ch2 Chi Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 gt gt Combiner E Combination of Ch1 Ch2 and C
47. page 50 Normal unadorned edge Border edge with border applied Drop Border edge with drop border applied Shadow edge with shadow applied Outline edge used as outline Emboss embossing effect applied to edge If you select Normal skip to step 7 Set the border width and other parameters When border or outline is selected The setting parameters depend on the key type and whether the separate edge function is enabled or not To enable the separate edge function press Separate Edge setting it on Key Setting Operations Using Menus 273 skey vp saydeyp shay vp da deyo 274 e Separate edge off Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width 0 00 to 8 00 2 0 00 to 100 00 gt 3 Density Density 0 00 to 100 00 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 276 is on the setting value range is 0 00 to 4 00 b When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type e Separate edge on The left right top and bottom border or outline widths can be adjusted independently The separate edge function is only valid when a luminance key linear key or chroma key is selected as the key type Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Top edge width 0 00 to 8 00 2 2 Left Left edge width 0 00 to 8 00 3 Right Right edge width 0 00 to 8 00 4 Bottom Bottom edge width 0 00 to 8 00 5 Density Density 0 00 to 100 00
48. select Matte and press Matte Adjust The Matte Adjust menu appears Select Mix Color in the lt Fill Matte gt group Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Softness of the edge of the 0 00 to 100 00 pattern Select the combining pattern in the lt Mix Pattern gt group Key Wipe The wipe pattern selected for an independent key transition is used for combination Edge Pattern Combine using the dedicated pattern selected for the color mix in the key edge fill For details see Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte page 277 Key Setting Operations Using Menus 5 In the Type menu adjust color 1 and color 2 To adjust color 1 select Color1 and to adjust color 2 select Color2 then adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 6 To interchange color 1 and color 2 press the Color Invert button turning it on Key Edge Modifications To modify the key edge of key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 2 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF2 Edge The Edge menu appears Select the edge type in the lt Edge gt group For an overview of the key edge modifications see Edge modifiers
49. the foreground for combination 5 To use a color matte signal for the input signal press Frgd Color turning it on Even when pair mode is enabled you can make separate settings for each FM 6 Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 T If you turned Frgd Color off in step 5 if required press Input Adjust to display the Input Adjust menu and make the video process see page 353 and mask see page 354 settings for the input signal The input signal is lowered by one line but when you apply a freeze the freeze image is returned to the correct position 8 To set the background signal to black press Bkgd Black turning it on Notes e When the background signal is originally black Bkgd Black remains on e When the background signal is a freeze image an image frozen but not saved turning Bkgd Black on erases the unsaved freeze image and as a result Bkgd Black remains on 9 In the lt Type gt group set the type of combination see page 358 1 On the state in which you want to freeze press one of the following in the lt Freeze gt group to write the freeze image to temporary memory Frame Freeze one frame Field Freeze one field Off Release the freeze and delete the recorded freeze image After carrying out the f
50. 13 deyo jeueg OuJU0D pue snua z Je deuD 204 K SS key snapshot button This enables key snapshot mode In key snapshot mode it is possible to save and recall key snapshots Key source name display key snapshot buttons These show the signal name of the key fill selected for key 3 and the transition rate on two buttons In key snapshot mode these correspond to registers 1 and 2 for key 3 press to save or recall a key snapshot Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Downstream Key Control Block Key delegation buttons Key source name display key snapshot buttons Key snapshot setting buttons B Independent key transition type selection buttons Independent key transition execution section Key delegation buttons Press one of the DSK1 to DSK4 buttons to delegate this control block to the corresponding keyer Using the Setup menu it is possible to delegate this control block to key to key 4 of the M E bank Independent key transition type selection buttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to select the downstream key transition type MIX Carry out a dissolve with the key selected with the key delegation buttons WIPE Carry out a wipe with the key selected with the key delegation buttons DME This switches the key selected wi
51. 2 Bus override If you recall a snapshot while holding down an A or B bus button the selection of the signal on the A or B bus does not change when the snapshot is recalled This function is called bus override This function is effective when cross point hold is off and you want to temporarily maintain the cross point setting When cross point hold is on the above operation is not necessary Snapshots Ut lity The utility function refers to a function whereby you can assign an arbitrary action or a shortcut for frequently used menu to a particular button then instantly recall the action or menu by pressing the button The functions you can assign include menu shortcuts enabling disabling functions recalling utility commands and recalling shotbox registers Carry out the button assignment in the Setup menu For details of the operation see Setting Button Assignments Prefs Utility Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 You can carry out the utility function in the utility shotbox control block see page 199 or using the user preference buttons in the menu control block see page 197 Utility 143 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 144 Shotbox The term shotbox refers to a function whereby for each specified region any snapshot or keyframe effect can be recalled simultaneously The simultaneous recall setting data such as region names snapshot numbers a
52. Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings You carry out DME wipe setting operations principally using the DME Wipe menu for each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks This section describes the basic procedures for DME wipe settings taking the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu as an example For details of independent key transition DME wipe settings see DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions page 339 To carry out DME wipes requires the BKDS 9470 DME Board Set DME Wipe Settings Menu Accessing the DME Wipe menu To access the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu use any of the following operations e In the menu control block select the top menu selection button M E 1 and press VF6 DME Wipe e In the transition control block of the M E 1 bank press the transition type selection button DME twice in rapid succession e In the Flexi Pad control block of the M E 1 bank press the DME button twice in rapid succession Any of the above operations displays the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu DME Wipe Pattern Selection You can select a DME wipe pattern in the DME Wipe menu or by entering a pattern number from the Flexi Pad control block Selecting a DME wipe pattern by a menu operation Use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF1 Ich for one channel mode or HF2 2ch for two channel mode 332 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 2 Select the desired DME wipe pattern group with
53. For details of key settings see Chapter 4 Keys page 261 To carry out a cut transition skip to step 7 otherwise continue to step 5 Select one of the transition type selection buttons in the transition control block To carry out a dissolve to the new video Press one of the MIX NAM SUPER MIX and PST COLOR MIX buttons turning it on To carry out a wipe Press the WIPE or DME button turning it on You can also use the Misc gt Transition menu to select a desired transition type for the M E or PGM PST bank See Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation page 232 For an overview of the transition types see Transition Types page 39 Make the required settings according to the selected transition type For details of the settings see the relevant section Super mix Super Mix Settings page 233 Preset color mix Color Matte Settings page 234 Wipe Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings page 304 DME Wipe Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings page 332 Using the transition preview function page 247 you can check the transition on the preview monitor Carry out the transition in the transition execution section For a gradual transition such as a mix dissolve or wipe Press the AUTO TRANS button or operate the fader lever To execute a transition by pressing the AUTO TRANS button first set the transition rate specified as the duration of the tran
54. If the AUTO TRANS buttons for the two transitions are pressed simultaneously the following is the result Note that in both cases the common transition is a wipe and the independent key transition is a mix dissolve Deleting a key with simultaneous transitions With the key inserted it is deleted simultaneously with the two transitions When the common transition completes even if the independent key transition is still not completed the two end simultaneously kh k Wipe and mix The key is deleted dissolve are even if the carried out independent key simultaneously transition has not completed Deleting a key with simultaneous transitions Inserting a key with simultaneous transitions With the key not inserted it is inserted simultaneously with the two transitions If the common transition or independent key transition ends first the other continues to completion A P Wipe and mix The transitions dissolve are continue until both carried out are completed simultaneously Inserting a key with simultaneous transitions Time offset execution If the AUTO TRANS buttons for the two transitions are pressed with a time offset the following is the result Note that in both cases the common transition is a wipe and the independent key transition is a mix dissolve Transitions 37 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 38 Transitions Time offse
55. Key Transition Type by a Menu Operation 249 Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate eeeeeeeeeee 250 Fade to Black cssessssesssresssrsessrsessssessssssessnsessnssessesensessnsesensesesssessesenees 253 Fade to Black Operation eee ee eseesecseesecnseeseceeceseeeeeeseeeeeesereeeeaa 253 Setting the Fade to Black Transition Rate eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 253 Simple Transition sscsccscscsssssssssessescsccsessscessscsscsssssesseessessesseeeseesesens 255 Basic Operations for Simple Transitions cee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 255 Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority ee 257 Split Paderss saviour ea teehee a eis 257 Independent Key Transitions With a Simple Transition Module 258 Table of Contents Chapter 4 Keys Key Setting Operations Using Menus ccscssscsscsssssscsssesssscssseeseseeees 262 Key Setting Menus oo cece peere a EE E A 262 Key Type Setti soc e cect cebe eigen Gants ieee is 263 Chroma Key Composition ccc ceecesecseceseesseceeceseeeceeeeeseseeeeees 265 Chroma Key Adjustments 00 0 0 eee eseceeeeceseeeceeceseeeeeeseseeseeeeeeeees 266 Selecting Key Fill and Key Source o eee cece ceeceeeeeeeseeneenaes 271 Key Edge Modifications cece eceseeeecseeeseceeessececeeeeceeesseeeeeeeees 273 EN EEE AE de hin ee Guest An siocsts 279 Applying a DME Effect to a Key oo eee eeceseeeeceeceseeesceseeeeeeseeeeeens 283 Specifying the Key Output Destination eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 28
56. MIX In the first transition the current video is replaced by the color matte in a mix dissolve then in the second transition the color matte is replaced by the new video also in a mix dissolve WIPE The current video is replaced by the new video using the wipe pattern selected in the Wipe menu DME A wipe type of transition is carried out using the DME effect selected in the DME Wipe menu Transition execution section Transition indicator This comprises 30 LEDs which show the progress of the transition Fader lever Move this to carry out a manual transition Transition rate display This shows the transition rate the time from the beginning of a transition to its completion set for an auto transition in frames You can set the transition rate using the numeric keypad control block Flexi Pad control block or menu AUTO TRANS transition button Pressing this button carries out an auto transition of the set transition rate duration The transition starts immediately and the button lights amber When the transition completes the button goes off CUT button Pressing this button carries out the transition as a cut i e instantaneously Wipe direction selection buttons When you have selected a wipe or DME wipe as the transition type press one of these buttons turning it on to select the wipe direction NORM normal The wipe proceeds in the direction from black to white as shown
57. Make the settings as follows 1 In the Aux Mon gt Aux Bus menu using any of the following methods select the AUX bus to which the settings apply e Directly press the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter 6 AUX Bus Adjustment AUX bus selection Setting values 1 to 48 2 Press Video Process turning it on 3 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Video Gain Video signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 2 Y Gain Luminance signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 4 Hue Delay Hue delay 180 00 to 180 00 5 Black Level Black level 7 30 to 109 58 To return adjustment values to their defaults Press Unity AUX Menu Operations Video Process Settings This section describes operations on the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST background A and B buses and utility buses and 2 For these operations use the Misc gt Video Process menu in the respective operating bank For video process settings on other buses see the following e Settings for a particular input signal Signal input settings in Chapter 16 Volume 2 e Key fill bus settings Video Processing page 286 e Settings for frame memory source buses I and 2 Setting video processing page 353 e Settings for Aux 1 to 48 b
58. PST menu select first VF6 DME Wipe then HF4 Edge Direction The Edge Direction menu appears Executing a Transition Press the Pattern Limit button turning it on Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Pattern Limit Pattern limit 0 00 2 to 100 00 a 0 00 Executing the transition does not change the video output at all b 100 00 The transition is the same as when no pattern limit is set but the cross point button selections of the background A and B buses do not interchange when the transition completes Executing a pattern limit transition Use the following procedure 1 Press the PTN LIMIT button turning it on The button you pressed lights amber Carry out the transition The transition progresses as far as the set pattern limit Even if the transition completes the cross point button assignments of the background A and B buses do not interchange Carry out the transition once again The status before the previous transition is restored To cancel the pattern limit To cancel the pattern limit after completion of step 3 of the above procedure press the PTN LIMIT button turning it off If after carrying out step 2 above the pattern limit has been reached carry out the following procedure 1 2 Press the PTN LIMIT button The button you pressed lights green Carry out the transition
59. Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 vertically 3 Shift Replication layout 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 64 4 To make more adjustments press the Multi Adjust button The Multi Adjust menu appears 5 Make the following settings as required H Invert When this is on alternate tiles are inverted left to right V Invert When this is on alternate tiles are inverted top to bottom Non Mask When this is on even if the positioner function is used to move the pattern position the pattern is always present on the screen Position By adjusting the following parameters move the pattern position within the divisions determined in step 3 Knob _ Parameter 1 Position H Adjustment Horizontal position of pattern Setting values 200 00 to 200 00 2 Position V Vertical position of pattern 200 00 to 200 00 a See page 61 Making a wipe pattern like a Venetian blind Pairing Use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears 2 In the lt Pairing gt group select the slit direction H Create slits in the horizontal direction V Create slits in the vertical direction 318 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 3 Set the following parameters a
60. S BUS data link primary station is avoided and direct connection to the MKS 8080 8082 is possible A simple connection is possible if the following conditions are met e There are no devices other than the CCP 8000 and MKS 8080 8082 connected on the S BUS data link e There are no more than 16 MKS 8080 8082 units connected on the S BUS data link For details of the connection procedure see Procedure for Simple Connection in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Setup 157 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 158 Files You can save register data including setup information and snapshot information as a file on a hard disk or memory card and recall it as required You can operate on individual files or registers or together in a batch Regarding frame memory it is possible to capture image data stored in an external device into frame memory You can also convert the format of image data in frame memory into a different format and save it in an external device Files that can be manipulated The following files can be saved and recalled Operation mode setup data for system as a whole and individual devices Device status data for system startup Key memory setting data Video process memory setting data Keyframe effect setting data Snapshot setting data Wipe snapshot setting data DME wipe snapshot setting data Key snapshot setting data Shotbox setting data Macro setting data Macro att
61. See page 64 Applying modulation to the wipe pattern Modulation You can apply modulation independently to the main pattern and sub pattern Use the following procedure 1 2 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears Depending on the desired effect in the lt Modulation gt group select one of the following H Modulate the pattern applying waviness in the horizontal direction to edges V Modulate the pattern applying waviness in the vertical direction to edges Fringe Modulate the pattern applying waviness in the radial direction to edges Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Amplitude Amplitude of modulation 0 00 to 100 00 2 Frequency Frequency of modulation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Speed Speed of waves 100 00 to 100 00 2 4 Shape Form of the modulation 1 to 3 a See page 65 b See page 65 Applying barrel or pincushion distortion to the edge of the wipe pattern Spring You can set the spring function independently for the main and sub patterns Use the following procedure Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 319 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width of the slits 1 to 128 integer 2 H Offset Spacing in the horizontal direction 1909 00 to 100 00 3 V Offset Spacing in the vertical direction _100 00 to 100 00 s d M gsejdeyo s d M g
62. accessed by pressing a button twice Button locations Buttons Menus See Independent key transition WIPE M E 1 2 3 Key1 to page 322 control block of M E 1 M E 2 M Key4 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust gt Pattern E 3 or PGM PST bank Select PGM PST DSK1 to DSK4 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust gt Pattern Select DME M E 1 2 3 Key1 to page 339 Key4 gt Transition gt DME Wipe Adjust gt 1ch Pattern Select PGM PST DSK1 to DSK4 gt Transition gt DME Wipe Adjust gt 1ch Pattern Select K SS Snapshot gt Key Snapshot gt Xx Chapter 14 STORE Volume 2 SHIFT M E 1 2 3 Key3 and Key4 gt Xx page 262 PGM PST DSK3 and DSK4 gt Xx 9 Q Flexi Pad control block of M E 1 WIPE M E 1 2 3 PGM PST Wipe gt Main page 304 E M E 2 M E 3 or PGM PST bank Pattern gt Xx z DME M E 1 2 3 PGM PST DME Wipe gt Xx page 332 z D SNAP Snapshot gt Snapshot gt Xx Chapter 14 2 SHOT Volume 2 s fe Key control block KEY1 M E 1 2 3 Key1 and PGM PST page 262 a DSK1 gt Xx KEY2 M E 1 2 3 Key2 and PGM PST S DSK2 gt Xx y KEY3 M E 1 2 3 Key3 and PGM PST 2 DSK3 gt Xx KEY4 M E 1 2 3 Key4 and PGM PST DSK4 gt Xx LUM M E 1 2 3 Key1 to Key4 gt Type LIN PGM PST DSK1 to DSK4 gt Type CVK PTN CRK M E 1 2 3 Key1 to Key4 gt Type gt Chroma page 266 Adjust PGM PST DSK1 to DSK4 gt Type gt Chroma Adjust Numeric keypad control block c SNAP Snapshot gt Snapshot gt Xx Chapter 14 SHOT V
63. and the proportion of each cycle for which the original state holds Using the blink function For example to make the required settings for key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF6 Transition The Transition menu appears 2 In the lt Blink gt group select Key Blink or Edge Blink to set it on 3 Set the blink parameters e When key blink is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Blink Rate Length of blink cycle 1 to 100 2 Duty Proportion of cycle for which key 0 00 to 100 00 inserted e When edge blink is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Blink Rate Length of blink cycle 1 to 100 Key Setting Operations Using Menus 285 shey yp saydeyo shay vp da deyo 286 Knob _ Parameter 2 Duty Adjustment Proportion of cycle for which original state holds Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 Video Processing You can adjust the luminance and hue of the selected key fill signal For example to apply video processing to the signal selected on the M E 1 bank key 1 fill bus use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF7 Video Process The Video Process menu appears 2 Press Video Process turning it on 3 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Video Gain V
64. are assigned to the following buses respectively Background A row utility 1 bus Background B row utility 2 bus Key 1 row DME external video bus Key 2 row DME utility 1 bus when the KEY4 button is off or DME utility 2 bus when the KEY4 button is lit In a Setup menu you can select either of the following two modes for these buttons The button takes effect while being held down Every time the button is pressed it toggles between the on and off states for key 1 and key 2 rows For background A and background B rows utility buses remain disabled Source name displays These show the names of the signals which can be selected on the cross point buttons in two or four characters or in auto mode While the SHIFT button on the right hand side or the SHIFT button assigned to the column of cross point buttons is enabled the source name of the signal assigned to the column of cross point buttons in shift mode appears You can select green orange or yellow for the background color of the source name display for each source separately You can set the source name display mode and background color in a Setup menu SHIFT button When this button is enabled either the source name displays show the shifted signal names or the shifted signals for all buses in this M E P P bank are enabled You can select either mode in a Setup menu Each press of the button toggles between the enabled and disabled s
65. assign it to an FM output use the following procedure 1 2 In the Frame Memory menu select VF1 Recall and HF2 Recall List The Recall List menu appears In the status area select the FM to be assigned See page 351 Using any of the following methods select the file to be recalled The main and sub files scroll simultaneously e Press directly on the list to select e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No Memory file selection 1 to To recall the main file in the selected list press Main in the lt Recall gt group Similarly to recall the sub file press Sub This recalls the image file which is assigned to the FM you selected in step 2 When pair mode is enabled both are recalled regardless of whether you press Main or Sub Image Processing Combining the background image and input signal Use the following procedure 1 2 gt In the Frame Memory menu select VF2 Edit and HF2 Composite The Composite menu appears In the status area select the FM to be assigned See page 351 To select V K mode press V K Mode turning it on Frame Memory Operations 4 Press Edit Enable turning it on This enables the combining of the background signal the signal providing the background for combination and the input signal the signal providing
66. border has already been applied to the effect the behavior is as follows e When the DME wipe border setting is ON only part of the border applied in the effect is enabled and that portion can be adjusted e When the DME wipe border setting is OFF the border applied in the effect is enabled as is Positioner This can only be used when one of the following pattern numbers is selected 1031 1201 to 1204 1251 2651 2652 With the progress of the transition the center of the pattern automatically moves from its initially set position toward the center of the image see page 61 That is to say the same effect is obtained as in a normal wipe when the positioner is set to AUTO CENTER Again by using the position select function you can move the pattern instantaneously Pattern limit You can restrict the range of the transition as desired However this is not available for a DME wipe in the independent key transition control block For more details see Pattern Limit page 239 Size This can only be used when one of the following pattern numbers is selected 1201 to 1204 1251 2651 2652 You can set the size of the image Crop You can crop the image It is also possible in 16 9 mode to crop both sides to convert the image to a 4 3 aspect ratio Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects The relations between DME wipes and other effects are as follows Relation to ordinary wipes e DME wipes do not use
67. button Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings Setting the DME wipe pattern size Size Use the following procedure 1 2 In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF5 Modify The Modify menu appears Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one channel mode or two channel mode proceed as follows For a pattern in one channel mode press 1st Ch turning it on For a pattern in two channel mode from the lt Ch Select gt group select the corresponding channel You can select more than one channel at the same time Press Size turning it on Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Set size of effect 0 00 to 200 00 a The current effect size of the DME wipe pattern is taken as 100 00 Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same time The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest numbered channel When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings this changes the settings on the other channels by the same amount Adjusting the DME wipe pattern cropping Use the following procedure 1 2 In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF5 Modify The Modify menu appears Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one channel mode or two channel mode proceed as follows For a pattern in one channel mode press 1st Ch turning it on For a pattern in two channel mode from the lt C
68. button then press the DME button in the M E 2 Flexi Pad control block Basic Copy and Swap Operations Chapter 10 Misc Menu Etc Misc Menu Operationsss ccc ccsccsosescescsoncescsusscassesssensesssesseasscsseesesssesss 376 AUX Menu OperationS esseseosescosesoosessessesoesesoesossescosesocsesooseesossesossesse 378 INODE SEAT N eee eee O A A O S 378 AA COI ALENS AI ES E EO A O A A 379 94g Nua OSIN O JeIdeUD 376 Misc Menu Operations In the Misc menu you can carry out the following operations e Enable on or disable off control from external devices for each port of the switcher and DME e Switch the safe title function on or off for each output Enabling or disabling control from an external device Use the following procedure 1 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button Misc then select VF1 Enable and HF Port Enable The Misc gt Enable gt Port Enable menu appears with the status area showing the settings of the following ports e Switcher Remote 1 to Remote 4 ports RS 422A D sub 9 pin e Switcher GPI port parallel 25 pin e DME1 DME2 Editor ports RS 422A D sub 9 pin e DME1 DME2 GPI ports parallel 25 pin In the lt Switcher gt or lt DME gt group press on the name of the port for which you want to disable control from an external device turning it off To re enable control for the port press on its name once more e It is not neces
69. button off When the KEY PRIOR button is on the transition control block switches to the mode for changing the key priority for after the transition Key Priority Setting 227 suonsuel g Ja deuD suomisuel g sajdeyo 228 2 Holding down the PRIOR SET button press the one of the next transition selection buttons KEY 1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 buttons in the PGM PST bank for the key to appear on top The selected key now appears on top on the program monitor The priority of keys other than the selected one does not change Key priority 3 1 4 2 Key priority 1 3 4 2 To change the priority of more than one key repeat the above operation as required Changing the key priority for after the transition When executing a transition turning on the next transition selection button KEY PRIOR causes the keys to be rearranged based on the set priority To set the key priority for after the transition use the following procedure 1 In the transition control block hold down the PRIOR SET button and press the KEY PRIOR button to turn it on Do not release the PRIOR SET button before advancing to step 2 The KEY PRIOR button lights green and it becomes possible to change the key priority setting for after the transition 2 Hold down the PRIOR SET button and press the one of the next transition selection buttons KEY 1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 buttons in the PGM PST bank for t
70. buttons depends P P buttons are selected This on the number of DME processor enables the wipe pattern position channels installed setting positioner operation mode in When the DEV button is selected This the device control block You can enables the VTR operation mode in the select multiple buttons simultaneously device control block In this state the When the USER button is selected This M E 1 to M E 3 buttons P P button enables pattern position setting used and DME to DME8 buttons function for color backgrounds as the device 1 to device 12 allocation When the DME 1 to DME 4 buttons buttons as follows are selected This enables the three M E1 DEV1 device 1 dimensional transform operation mode M E2 DEV2 device 2 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 1 83 jauUeg JONUOD pue snua z saldeup jaueg OUD pue snua z Je deuD 184 M E3 DEV3 device 3 P P DEV4 device 4 DME DEVS device 5 DME2 DEV6 device 6 DME3 DEV7 device 7 DMF4 DEV 8 device 8 DMES5 DEV9 device 9 DME6 DEV 10 device 10 DME7 DEV11 device 11 DME8 DEV 12 device 12 To exit from this mode press the DEV button again turning it off When the RUN CTRL button is selected This enables the effect run control mode in the device control block The functions of the operation buttons trackball and Z ring vary with the operation mode as follows Operation buttons When the posit
71. can release the lock and separate the two halves of the fader lever With the split fader lever in a background mix transition you can control the background A and B buses independently Transition indicator This comprises 30 LEDs which show the progress of the transition Transition rate display This displays the transition rate the time from the beginning of the transition to its completion set for an auto transition in frames You can set the transition rate using the numeric keypad control block or menu TAKE button Pressing this button carries out an auto transition of the set transition rate The transition starts immediately and the button lights amber When the transition completes the button goes off Wipe direction selection buttons REV reverse When this button is off the wipe proceeds in the normal direction When the button is lit the wipe proceeds in the reverse direction The normal direction refers to the black to white direction or in the direction of the arrow as shown in the appendixes Wipe Pattern List and DME Wipe Pattern List Volume 2 NORM REV normal reverse The wipe direction alternates between normal and reverse every time a transition is executed Pattern limit buttons LIMIT SET Move the fader lever to the position of a particular pattern size and Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jou 04u00 pue snua z seldeup Jeueg OuJUOD pue
72. constant duration modes the keyframes to which a modify operation applies and the effect of a paste operation are different Difference in keyframes to which a modify operation applies Effect position Variable duration mode Constant duration mode On a keyframe Applies to currently Applies to currently selected keyframe selected keyframe Between two Applies to previous Modify operation not possible keyframes keyframe a A new keyframe is inserted at the effect position Keyframes 129 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD Difference in the effect of a paste operation Variable duration mode The copied keyframe is inserted at the specified position Constant duration mode The copied keyframe is written over the specified position Transition mode You can use an effect created with keyframes as a DME wipe pattern on the switcher In this case it is necessary to set the transition mode the way in which the effect behaves For details of the setting see User Programmable DME Transition Mode page 342 Time Settings Keyframe duration and effect duration You can determine the execution time of an effect by setting either the keyframe durations or the effect duration Keyframe duration This is the time from the keyframe to the next keyframe You can set this time in the keyframe control block See Time Settings in Chapter 13 Volume 2
73. deuD Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block Simple Type The simple versions of the transition type The transitions carried out using these control block and Flexi Pad control block simple type control blocks are also referred shown below is designed to allow to as simple transitions in this user s simplified operations than with the standard guide Numeric display XPT HOLD status display B Key transition selection buttons O Key status display Transition type selection buttons ON ON XPT HOLD OVER OVER ABUW1234 Transition execution section Pattern limit buttons Wipe direction selection buttons Mode selection buttons UNDO button Memory recall section Shown above is the right hand type transition control block with the right hand fader lever 200 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Transition type selection buttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to determine the type of the next transition for a background To select the key transition type hold down the KEY1 or KEY2 button and press one of the following buttons turning it on When multi program mode is selected in the Setup menu see Settings for Switcher Configuration Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 two or more of the fo
74. entered value is a timecode value Example Entering 123 constitutes an entry of 1 second 23 frames Whereas you can enter a value of up to 999 in frame input mode a value not smaller than 10 seconds cannot be entered in timecode input mode Frame display mode and timecode display mode For the transition rate display in the transition control block there are two modes frame display mode and timecode display mode You can select one of these modes in setup See Operation Settings in Chapter 16 Volume 2 The setting is common to all banks of the switcher Frame display mode Values are shown as from 0 to 999 frames In this display mode a value entered in timecode input mode is converted for display as a number of frames Timecode display mode Values are shown as timecode values consisting of seconds and frames In this display mode a value entered in frame input mode is converted for display as a timecode value If the value consists of four or more digits the last digit is not shown Example A value of 9 seconds 23 frames appears as 9 23 and a value of 10 seconds frame appears as 10 0 Executing a Transition Setting the transition rate in the Flexi Pad control block In the PGM PST bank or when using a simple type transition control block you cannot use the Flexi Pad control block to set the transition rate Use the following procedure 1 In the M E bank Flexi Pad control block press the TRANS R
75. group and setting the angle of the pattern rotation Knob _ Parameter 1 Angle Adjustment Pattern angle Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 61 Key Setting Operations Using Menus 281 shey py saydeyo shay vp da deyo 282 e When turning Speed on in the lt Rotation gt group and setting the rate of pattern rotation Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Speed Rate of pattern rotation 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 62 Using the subsidiary mask For example to use the subsidiary mask for key on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF4 Sub Mask The Sub Mask menu appears 2 In the lt Mask Type gt group select the mask type Key Mask Masks a part of a key Bkgd Mask Masks a part of a background 3 In the lt Mask Source gt group select the mask source Wipe wipe pattern selected for a transition If you select Wipe select the pattern and make modifier settings in the M E 1 gt Wipe menu see page 304 then return to this M E 1 gt Key1 menu In the case of a wipe pattern selected for a mask the modifier Edge and Direction settings are not available Utility 1 Bus signal selected on the utility 1 bus When you selected Utility 1 Bus hold down the UTIL button in the M E 1 bank cross point control block and select the signal with the background A bus buttons
76. in P BUS trigger mode are as follows e Store e Recall e Trigger External Devices 11 9 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 120 For details of the buttons assigned to each action see Chapter 12 External Devices Volume 2 P BUS timeline Ata keyframe point on the P BUS timeline you can set an action setting what action command is output to which device At any single keyframe point you can set actions for a maximum of 24 devices P BUS timeline mode actions The actions that can be used in P BUS timeline mode are as follows e Store e Recall e Trigger For the action setting or P BUS timeline editing use the Device menu You can save the data set in the Device menu in keyframe effect registers Recalling the register starts execution of the keyframe effect and when this reaches the keyframe point at which actions are set action commands are output to external devices through the 9 pin serial port assigned to P BUS For details see Chapter 12 External Devices Volume 2 Control of GPI Devices You can control GPI devices from the control panel of an DVS 9000 system or through the GPI output port of a DCU GPI timeline For a keyframe effect controlled from the center control panel the GPI timeline allows you to set an action setting a trigger output from a particular GPI output port at a keyframe point on the GPI timeline At any keyframe point you can ma
77. key 4 control block are the same Independent key transition control block simple type Saving a key snapshot For example to save the settings of M E 1 key 3 use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 independent key transition control block press the K SS button in the key 3 control block turning it on This switches to key snapshot mode and the key source name display key snapshot button shows the state of registers 1 and 2 for key 3 Off Nothing is saved in the register Lit orange Settings are saved in the register Lit yellow The most recently recalled register For a register holding a snapshot the register name is shown as up to eight characters Key Snapshots 301 shey yp saydeyD shay vp da deyo 302 2 In the Flexi Pad control block hold down the SNAPSHOT button and press the key source name display key snapshot button corresponding to the register in which you want to save the snapshot The key source name display key snapshot button which you pressed lights yellow If you save a key snapshot in a register for which the button is lit orange or yellow the existing contents of the register are overwritten Recalling a key snapshot For example the following procedure recalls the state of the M E 1 key 3 settings 1 2 Key Snapshots In the M E 1 independent key transition control block press the K SS button in the key 3 control block turning it on Press the
78. necessary settings have been made in a Setup menu to enable the split fader See Settings Relating to Video Switching Transition Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 e A background is selected for the next transition e For the transition type MIX or NAM is selected Split fader operation The two halves of the split fader lever correspond to the buses as follows Simple Transition 257 suonisuel g Ja deuD suomisuel g sa deyp Right fader lever Background A bus Left fader lever Background B bus The relationship between the positions of the two fader levers and the image output in a mix is as follows Left lever position Right lever A bus output B bus output position Top Top 100 0 Bottom Top 100 100 Top Bottom 0 0 Bottom Bottom 0 100 Center Center 50 50 e When the transition type is NAM the outputs of the A bus and B bus in the above table are the outputs subjected to NAM e The transition indicators always show the progress of the background A bus e The operation of the left lever and that of the right lever can be swapped See Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Independent Key Transitions With a Simple Transition Module You carry out independent key transition operations using the independent key transition control block simple type This controls only keys 3 and 4 258 Simple Transition Key 3 control
79. number of a DME wipe pattern use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section SNAPSHOT To save or recall a snapshot use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section EFF effect To recall or run an effect use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section SHOTBOXx To recall or execute a shotbox use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section 177 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jauUeg JOUOD pue snua z seldeup Jaueg OuJUOD pue snua z Je deuD MCRO macro To save recall or edit a macro use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section TRANS RATE transition rate To enter the transition rate press this button turning it on To enter the independent key transition rate hold down this button and press the key delegation button in the independent key transition control block To select whether the value is entered in frames or as a timecode value switch the TC button in the memory recall section on or off Bank selection buttons BANKO bank 0 Assigns the memory recall section to bank 0 of registers 1 to 10 BANK 1 bank 1 Assigns the memory recall section to bank 1 of registers 11 to 20 BANK SEL bank selection After pressing this button press a button in the memory recall section to select banks 0 to 9 Memory recall section This consists of 1
80. of Parts of the Control Panel TRACE button When a DME channel is already allocated to another keyer or transition hold down this button and press the corresponding DME channel selection button to switch to the state in which the keyer or transition to which the DME channel is allocated is currently selected AUTO DELEG auto delegation button When this button is on the key delegation selection state of the key control block is linked to the key delegation selection state of the independent key transition control block Device Control Block Trackball The device control block is used for three DME for wipe pattern position setting and dimensional transform operations using a for VTR operation MENU button Region selection buttons Trackball Operating buttons Z ring Region selection buttons in the device control block The operation mode allocated to the device Press a button turning it on to select a control block depends on the selection state DME channel You can select multiple of the region selection buttons buttons simultaneously When the M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 and The number of valid
81. on to make the next transition insert or remove the corresponding key keys to 4 Ifa key is currently inserted it will be Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 207 jeuUeg 04u00 pue snua z seldeu9 jeueg OuJU0D pue snua z Je deuD 208 removed and if it is not currently inserted it will be inserted In the PGM PST bank this inserts or removes downstream keys to 4 KEY PRIOR priority When this button is lit the setting of the key priority after the next transition is enabled The key priority after the next transition appears in the key status display ALL Pressing this button turns on a preselected set of the BKGD KEY 1 to KEY4 and KEY PRIOR buttons Make this setting in a Setup menu Transition type selection buttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to determine the type of the next transition When multi program mode is selected in the Setup menu see Settings for Switcher Configuration Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 two or more of the following buttons may light MIX In a background transition the new video fades in as the current video fades out During the transition the overall signal level is maintained at 100 In a key transition the key fades in for insertion or out for removal NAM non additive mix The current and new video signals are compared and the signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the ou
82. on the pattern in the lists of patterns see the appendixes Wipe Pattern List and DME Wipe Pattern List Volume 2 or in the direction of the arrow When the VTR operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button plays the tape REV reverse The wipe proceeds in the opposite direction to that when the NORM button is pressed When the VTR operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button stops the tape NORM REV normal reverse The wipe direction alternates between normal and reverse every time a transition is executed When the VTR operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button cues the tape automatically to the start point TRANS PVW transition preview button When this button is lit you can check in advance the video changes during the transition on the preview output from the M E or PGM PST bank During the preview you can use the fader lever AUTO TRANS button and CUT button One of the following functions of this button can be selected in a Setup mode When the transition completes the system returns to the normal mode The transition preview mode is maintained while this button is pressed Switching is made between the transition preview mode and normal mode every time this button is pressed Pattern limit buttons PTN pattern LIMIT Pressing this button turning it on enables the pattern limit function When the VTR operation mode is enabled i
83. one of the following buttons Slide Squeeze slide and squeeze Split Door split and door Flip Tumble flip tumble Page Turn Roll page turn and page roll Frame I O frame in out P In P picture in picture User Program user programmable DME In two channel mode only Slide Squeeze P In P and User Program are selectable For details of DME wipe patterns see Types of DME Wipe Pattern page 68 and the appendix DME Wipe Pattern List Volume 2 The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen 3 Press the button to select the desired pattern For a key transition the page turn page roll and picture in picture cannot be used Selecting a DME wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad control block In the standard type Flexi Pad control block enter a 4 digit pattern number using the DME button For details see Selecting a wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad control block page 306 You cannot select a DME wipe pattern in the simple type Flexi Pad control block Setting DME Wipe Modifiers You can apply various modifiers to the DME wipe pattern setting the DME wipe direction pattern position and so on For an overview of the DME wipe modifiers see DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers page 70 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 333 sedim JWG 9g Jeldeyo s d M JWG 9g Jeldeyo 334 Specifying the DME wipe direction Direction You can specify the DME wip
84. pin ports e GPI Input Set the GPI input ports and trigger polarities and make the action settings e GPI Output Set the GPI output ports and trigger polarities and make the action settings e Aux Control Set whether operations on the Aux buses from the four 9 pin ports are inhibited DME Setup In DME setup carry out settings particular to the DME processor You can make the following settings Input signal settings Input e Initial Crop Make the initial crop setting e Matte Illeg Color Limit Switch the illegal limiter for the signal generated by the DME internal matte generator on or off Interface with external devices Device Interface e Editor Protocol Set the protocol to be used on the Editor port e Editor Port Setting Make settings relating to the control of the four editor ports installed in the DME e GPI Input Set the GPI input ports and trigger polarities and make the action settings Setup e GPI Output Set the GPI output ports and trigger polarities and make the action settings Setup Relating to DCU Input Output In DCU setup carry out settings particular to the DCU You can make the following settings Input Config Assign GPI inputs to Parallel input ports GPI Input Assign Make GPI input settings Output Config Assign GPI outputs to parallel output ports inserted in an option slot GPI Output Assign Make GPI output settings Serial Port Assign Set the protocol to match th
85. rotation Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 61 When Speed is selected Knob 1 Speed Parameter Adjustment Rotation rate of pattern Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 62 e When Magnitude is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation at start of __190 00 to 100 00 transition 2 Magnitude Angle of rotation through course _990 00 to 200 00 of transition a See page 62 Setting the wipe pattern aspect ratio Aspect ratio You can set the aspect ratio independently for the main pattern and sub pattern Use the following procedure 1 Setting the wipe pattern replication Multi In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears Press Aspect turning it on Set the following parameter Knob 1 Aspect Parameter Adjustment Aspect ratio Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 63 You can set pattern replication independently for the main pattern and sub pattern Use the following procedure Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 317 s d Mm gJsejdeyo s d M g sajdeyo 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears 2 Press the Multi button turning it on 3 Set the following parameters Knob
86. row Turn off the DSK4 button DSK 3 bus DSK1 row Turn on the DSK3 button DSK 4 bus DSK2 row Turn on the DSK4 button M E 1 Utility 1 bus Background A When UTIL button mode M E 2 row is Hold hold down the MGM pst Utility 2 bus Background UTIL button row DME external video bus Key 1 row Hold down the UTIL button DME utility 1 bus Key 2 row Hold down the UTIL DME utility 2 bus button and press the KEY4 button turning it off Hold down the UTIL button and press the KEY4 button turning it on Signal Selection 21 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 28 Bank Auxiliary bus control block Bus name AUX1 to AUX48 buses MONITOR 1 to MONITOR 8 buses Frame memory source 1 and frame memory source 2 buses DME 1 to DME 4 video buses DME 1 to DME 4 key buses Edit preview bus M E 1 UTILITY 1 and M E 1 UTILITY 2 buses M E 2 UTILITY 1 and M E 2 UTILITY 2 buses M E 3 UTILITY 1 and M E 3 UTILITY 2 buses P P UTILITY 1 and P P UTILITY 2 buses M E 3 Key 1 fill to M E 3 Key 4 fill buses M E 3 Key 1 source to M E 3 Key 4 source buses DSK 1 fill to DSK 4 fill buses DSK 1 source to DSK 4 source buses M E 1 external DME bus M E 2 external DME bus M E 3 external DME bus P P external DME bus DME UTILITY 1 and DME UTILITY 2 buses Cro
87. set an independent key transition rate Region selection buttons These select the functional block region of the control panel to which operations apply You can select more than one region at the same time The first button you press is taken as the reference region and lights green while the next pressed button lights amber With the exception of the MASTER and ALL buttons you can change the region 191 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jauUeg JOUOD pue snua z seldeup jeueg OuJU0D pue snua z Je deuD assignment to the buttons as desired in the Setup menu MASTR Press this turning it on to save region information in a master snapshot register or master timeline register or to recall such region information ALL Select all regions When any region is already selected pressing this button makes all regions unselected M E 1 to M E 3 P P Select the corresponding regions M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 and PGM PST USER 1 to USER 8 Select a USER region DME1 to DME4 Select a DME channel P BUS Select the P BUS region GPI Select the GPI region RTR DEV1 to DEV12 Select the device 1 to device 12 regions respectively Function selection buttons UNDO After recalling a register press this button to return to the state before recalling the register STORE STATS store status This lights amber when data is stored in a register After saving data to a register ho
88. settings also apply to keyframes and snapshots Video Process 83 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 84 Making the adjustments Adjust VIDEO GAIN Y GAIN BLACK LEVEL C GAIN and HUE DELAY in the following menus Applicable bus Menu used for operation See page M E 1 to M E 3 Key fill buses for keys M E 1 to M E 3 menus page 286 banks 1 to 4 background Aand B Video Process menu page 379 buses Utility 1 and 2 buses PGM PST bank Key fill buses for PGM PST menu page 286 DSK1 to DSK4 Background A and B Video Process menu page 379 buses Utility 1 and 2 buses Frame memory source 1 and 2 buses Frame Memory menu page 353 Aux 1 to 48 buses AUX MON menu page 378 Video Process Memory When using video process adjustments for an image effect on a bus this function saves the final values for each pair number for the signals The video process on off setting is not saved When you change the adjustments the values are automatically saved and these last values are recalled when the pair number is selected In other words by switching video process memory on regardless of the video process information for each bus you can carry out video process adjustments for each input signal The parameters saved are as follows VIDEO GAIN Y GAIN BLACK LEVEL C GAIN HUE DELAY Switch the video process memory on or off in the Setup menu For details of sett
89. settings for color backgrounds are Color Bkgd All made simultaneously Color Bkgd 1 2 Paths for color backgrounds 1 and 2 Paths relating to DME To carry out path operations relating to DME requires the BKDS 9470 DME Board Set 134 Keyframes DME 3D Trans Local menu Item 3D Trans Local All Paths that can be set Overall path settings for local channel three dimensional transform items are made simultaneously Loc Size Overall path settings for items relating to Loc Size All image size changes and movement are made simultaneously Size Path for image size i Loc X Post Loc Paths for movement in the x and y axes Post Size Path for size Loc XYZ Overall path settings for items relating to Loc XYZ All image movement are made simultaneously Loc X Loc Y Loc Z Paths for the x y and z axes Rot Overall path settings for items relating to Rot All image rotation are made simultaneously Rot X Rot Y Rot Z Paths for the x y and z axes Spin Overall path settings for items relating to spin Spin All are made simultaneously Spin Src X Spin Src Paths for the x y and z axes Y Spin Src Z Spin X Spin Y Spin Paths for the x y and z axes Asp Overall path settings for items relating to Asp All aspect ratio are made simultaneously Rate X Rate Y Paths for the x and y axes Skew Overall path settings for items relating to s
90. snua z Je deuD stop it there then press this button to set the pattern limit range This button is enabled when the PTN LIMIT button is off PTN pattern LIMIT When a wipe or DME wipe is selected pressing this button turning it on enables the pattern limit function Key status display For each of keys 1 and 2 when the key is inserted the corresponding ON indicator lights The OVER indicators show the priority between keys and 2 by lighting when the corresponding key is on top For example when key 1 appears over key 2 on the program monitor the OVER indicator for key 1 lights The following is the Flexi Pad control block Mode selection buttons WIPE When saving or recalling a wipe snapshot use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section DME When saving or recalling a DME wipe snapshot use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section SNAPSHOT When saving or recalling a snapshot use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section Memory recall section This consists of eight buttons with LCDs whose display changes according to the operation mode Use these in combination with the mode selection buttons to save recall or delete wipe snapshots DME wipe snapshots or snapshots Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel UNDO button After recalling a register press this button to return to the state before recall
91. space E BA Rotation around the y axis Rotation around the x axis Rotation around the z axis Spin When rotating the image in Rotation mode it may not always be possible to achieve the kind of rotation around an axis that you want Combining Rotation mode with Spin mode creates an effect that rotates the image around a specified axis The type of rotation differs depending on whether you are manipulating the image in the source coordinate space or the target coordinate space The way the image rotates around an axis is the same as in Rotation mode Axis Location Moves an axis of rotation in the source coordinate space 92 Digital Multi Effects DME Axis movement X Y Movement on the x axis Location Size Changes the size of the whole image Movement on the y axis Movement on the z axis e Because shrinking and magnification of the image in the source coordinate space is done in three dimensional space magnifying the image emphasizes the sense of perspective e Because shrinking and magnification of the image in the target coordinate space is a conversion of the two dimensional image displayed on the monitor shrinking and magnification does not change the shape of the image Magnification and shrinking in the source coordinate space Magnification and shrinking in the target coordinate space Digital Multi Effects DME 93
92. suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 62 Wipes Speed Through the course of the transition the wipe pattern rotates at a fixed specified speed The parameter Speed determines the speed of pattern rotation A value of 100 00 of the parameter Speed corresponds to one turn per second counterclockwise a value of 100 00 corresponds to one turn per second clockwise With a value of 0 00 the pattern is stationary Magnitude Through the course of the transition the wipe pattern rotates through the specified angle WW The parameter Angle determines an angle of pattern inclination at the beginning of the transition e A value of 100 00 corresponds to the angle rotated one whole turn counterclockwise e A value of 100 00 corresponds to the angle rotated one whole turn clockwise e With a value of 0 00 there is no rotation The parameter Magnitude determines an angle of pattern rotation through the course of the transition e A value of 200 00 corresponds to a rotation of two turns counterclockwise e A value of 200 00 corresponds to a rotation of two turns clockwise e With a value of 0 00 the pattern is stationary Aspect ratio You can freely change the aspect ratio of the pattern E E Aspect off Aspect on a horizontal stretch A negative value of the parameter Aspect stretches the pattern vertically a positive value stretches the pattern horizo
93. that is equipped with a USB interface to any of these connectors For details on the devices that can be connected consult your Sony representative Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Utility Shotbox Control Block Bank selection buttons B Memory recall buttons Bank selection buttons Press any of the BANK1 to BANK4 buttons to select a bank of 24 memory recall buttons The selected button lights amber Memory recall buttons Use these by allocating a utility function or shotbox function When a utility function is allocated the button lights orange or green depending on the status and the allocated function name appears Pressing a button executes the allocated function When the function constitutes a switching on off operation the button lights green otherwise it only momentarily lights green When a shotbox function is allocated the button lights orange and the name of the allocated register appears If the register is empty the button goes off Pressing a button executes the allocated shotbox function and the button lights yellow If there is a button immediately previously lit yellow it changes to orange Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 199 jauUeg JOUOD pue snua z seldeup jaueg OuJU0D pue snua z Je
94. the status area whether pair mode is on or off all of the saved files appear in a list Using any of the following methods select the file to be renamed The main and sub files scroll simultaneously e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No Memory file selection 1 to Press Rename The keyboard window appears Enter the new name then press the Enter button in the keyboard window This renames the file Restoring Files Restoring a file that has been deleted To restore a still image file in memory that has been deleted for example by turning the power off use the following procedure 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF4 File and HF5 Restore Image Data Management The Restore menu appears 2 Press Restore This restores the file Image Data Management 365 Aioweay ewes 7 Jajdeyo Kowa ewes 7 Jaydeyo 366 Image Data Management Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds Color Background Setting Operations scccccsecsessssscseseneseee 368 Color Background Settings Menu 00 eee eee eeeeereeseeeeeeeeenees 368 Basic Color Background Setting Operations e eee eee 368 spunoibyoeg 10 09 g Jay deyo Color Background Setting Operations You carry out color background settin
95. the switcher can be configured with various inputs and outputs and different numbers of M E banks The system offers the flexibility to change and expand as required When the optional DME board set is installed the system allows you to use up to four DME channels Powerful external device interfaces By connecting to a Sony routing switcher or similar a large system can be built From the control panel it is also possible to operate other equipment including VTRs and disk recorders Powerful tally system The complete system including routing switcher provides an all inclusive tally system The system can be adapted to different applications and settings using multiple tally outputs including both on air and recording tallies Comprehensive video manipulation M E banks Each mix effects bank M E bank is equipped with four keyers and each keyer is capable not only of chroma keying but also independent key transitions separate from the background transitions The four keys can be freely combined to carry out four different program outputs 22 Features of the DVS 9000 Production Switcher System Powerful frame memory functions The frame memory can store 222 frames and up to eight of these can be recalled simultaneously Link operation with DME Using the BKDS 9470 DME Bord Set a range of DME functions including DME wipes and processed keys can be handled as switcher functions The system can interface with up to four DME
96. the wipe generator built into the switcher Therefore during the execution of a DME wipe you can still use a pattern produced by the wipe generator as the source for a pattern key or mask e A DME wipe pattern cannot be used as the source for a pattern key or mask Relation to processed keys When using the DME for a processed key if you select a DME wipe an available DME is automatically allocated to the DME wipe If all of the DME channels are in use then it is not possible to select a DME wipe Number of DME wipes that can be used simultaneously on a single M E bank DME wipes can be used in five places including the four independent key transitions but a maximum of two can be used simultaneously DME Wipe Snapshots You can instantaneously save the DME wipe pattern in a special purpose register together with all applied modifiers and the transition rate for recall as required DME Wipes 71 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 72 DME Wipes There are 10 DME wipe snapshot registers for each of the M E and P P banks To save and recall these registers use the FlexiPad control block in each switcher bank See DME Wipe Snapshots page 341 In the case of a simple transition system there are eight DME wipe snapshot registers for each switcher bank Frame Memory Overview Frame memory is a function whereby a frame of input video can be frozen and written to memor
97. to switcher processor Classification Functions supported Menu No See page Vol 1 Vol 2 Frame memory Frame memory feed using key processed keyer 1115 285 signals 297 Changes in Frame Memory menu 2111 to 2144 348 Copy and swap Color data copy and swap relating to DME 3116 81 Misc menu Enabling disabling control from external devices 3211 376 Setup User region setting 7331 4 152 238 Logical assignment of PGM PST to M E 7331 5 152 238 Through mode for program output clean output 7333 3 153 242 Preset color mix operation mode 7334 1 40 245 153 Selection of mask and border process priority 7335 153 248 9 pin port device interface setting 7337 1 154 253 KF Reverse Run GPI input operation 7337 2 255 Enabling disabling AUX bus control 7337 5 154 258 Functions relating to DME Classification Functions supported Menu No See page Vol 1 Vol 2 Three dimensional Three dimensional parameter display 4100 and 97 17 transform each DME menu Special effects Multi move 4122 99 31 Freeze 4131 100 36 Functions relating to external devices Classification Functions supported Menu No See page Vol 1 Vol 2 External device GPI device control 5311 120 91 control VTR disk recorder control 5331 to 5333 121 94 Functions relating to ke
98. transition then the remaining 3 4 of the transition is carried out in 100 frames Non Sync State If the fader lever is in an intermediate position when a transition is completed as an auto transition then the lever position no longer agrees with the transition state This is termed a non sync state In a non sync state two lit LEDs indicate the position from which a normal transition can be carried out This is either at one end position or both end positions of the fader lever travel Moving the fader lever toward the position of the lit LEDs does not carry out a transition but when the fader lever reaches the end position the non sync state is released and it is now possible to carry out the next transition Executing a Transition Once the fader lever is moved to this position the non sync SIate ends and the next transition direction shown by the arrow is possible ty 7 1 N Manual transition completed as auto Manual transition completed as transition when moving the fader auto transition when moving the lever upward Top two LEDs light fader lever downward Bottom two LEDs light e If the fader lever is moved in the direction away from the lit LEDs this carries out the next transition over the remaining part of the fader lever travel e Even in a non sync state you can carry out an auto transition by pressing the AUTO TRANS button During the auto transition the indicators show the
99. transition progress in the usual way but when the transition completes they once again indicate the non sync state Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode In the bus fixed mode there is a fixed relationship between the position of the fader lever and the signal output on each bus Depending on the direction of the transition the fader lever must therefore always be moved in a particular direction as shown in the following table This does not affect an auto transition which is executed regardless of the fader lever direction For an overview of the bus fixed mode see Flip flop mode and bus fixed mode page 43 Fader lever operating direction in bus fixed mode Next transition Transition direction Fader lever movement Background A B Downward BoA Upward Executing a Transition 245 suonsuel Ja deup suomisuel g sa deyp 246 Next transition Transition direction Fader lever movement Keys 1 2 3 and4 On gt Off deletion Downward Off On insertion Upward e When a transition applies to a combination of more than one of the background and keys 1 2 3 and 4 then the transition for all of these must be in the same direction complying with the above table e If as a result of an auto transition for example the fader lever position does not agree with the signal output this is a non sync state see page 244 and LEDs light at both end positions of th
100. units Designed for use in a live broadcasting environment Flexible control panel layout Because of its modular design the various sections of the control panel can be laid out as required This allows a flexible layout appropriate to the system operation High performance user interface The menu control block provides a large color LCD panel with rapid touch panel menu selection The source name displays and buttons in the Flexi Pad and shotbox sections have color backlit LCD displays The signal names and graphical representations of the patterns associated with buttons provide intuitive feedback and allow the immediate decisions that are required in a live operating environment Features of the DVS 9000 Production Switcher System 23 suojoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo 24 Video Processing Flow The following illustration shows the flow of operations for carrying out a transition on an M E bank or the PGM PST bank Select current background video page 25 4 Select next transition page 32 Background Keys 1 to 4 4 Select new background video page 25 4 Make key settings page 46 4 4 Select transition type page 39 i 4 NAM Super Preset color DME wipe mix mix Make wipe settings page 56 Make DME wipe settings page 68 Preview the effect of transition page 44 4 Execute the transition page 42 lt Cut ik
101. use the key source paired with the key fill signal selected on the key fill bus press the AUTO SEL button turning it on The pairing of the cross point buttons for key fill and key source is carried out in the Setup menu See Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 To select key source independently of the key fill signal selected on the key fill bus and paired with key source hold down the SPLIT button turning it on then press the desired Key 1 or Key 2 button in the cross point control block To use as key source the same signal as the key fill signal selected on the key fill bus select the SELF mode by pressing the AUTO SEL button and SPLIT button simultaneously so that both are off When chroma key is selected as the key type select the SELF mode Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block Key Edge Modifications To apply a modification to the key edge press one of the edge type selection buttons in the key control block BDR button border DROP BDR button drop border SHDW button shadow OUTLINE button outline EMBOS button emboss For an overview of the edge modifications see page 50 The pressed button lights green and you can now adjust the parameters with the knobs The display beside each knob shows the first letter of the parameter name and the three digit setting value Setting the border parameters When the BDR button is lit green the paramete
102. 0 378 delegation buttons 194 menu operations 378 Auxiliary bus control block 194 Axis location 92 B Background 111 A B row 170 changing 32 mask 53 Bank selection buttons 199 Basic menu operations 210 Beveled edge 99 Blind 104 Blink 54 function 285 Blur 99 Border 51 98 parameters 291 Brick 116 Brightness adjustments 151 Broken glass 103 BS button 220 Bus fixed mode 43 fader operation 245 wipe direction 246 Bus selection 26 Button assignment settings 150 numbers 29 30 C Caps Lock button 220 Channel ID 95 Character trail 109 Chroma key 47 adjustments 266 composition 265 shadow 49 shadow adjustment 270 window 48 Circle 106 Clean mode 47 Clear button 219 221 Close button 218 220 Color combination 78 368 matte settings 234 vector key 46 Color background 78 selection 78 setting operations 368 settings menu 368 Color cancel 48 adjustments 267 Color data copy 81 swap 81 Color mix 78 368 for edge fill matte 313 for key fill 272 Combiner 113 Contrast 100 Control panel 164 configuration 1 164 configuration 2 166 configuration 3 168 Coordinate axes 95 Copy 79 372 Crop 98 Cross point button numbers 170 button settings 149 buttons 169 control block 169 hold 141 Custom mode 146 Cut 42 CUT button 175 208 Cylinder 107 D Dead zone 345 Defocus 98 Del button 221 Delay setting 132 Delegation buttons 179 DEST button 195 Detents 89 Device Interface 154 management 147 DEVICE
103. 0 4 Density Density 0 to 100 294 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block Masks Using the main mask In the key control block press the MAIN MASK button turning it on The parameter settings depend on the mask source selected as Box or Pattern in the lt Mask Source gt group of the Main Mask menu for the key e When box is selected Knob __ Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Top position 100 shown as 00 to 100 2 Left Left position 100 shown as 00 to 100 3 Right Right position 100 shown as 00 to 100 4 Bottom Bottom position 100 shown as 00 to 100 When box is selected and the MORE button is lit amber there are more settings Press the MORE button so that it changes from amber to green to make the extra setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Soft Box softness 0 to 100 e When pattern is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 to 100 2 Soft Edge softness 0 to 100 3 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 242 a The pattern is the same as a standard wipe See the appendix Wipe Pattern List Volume 2 Using the subsidiary mask In the key control block press the SUB MASK button turning it on The parameter settings depend on the mask source selected as Wipe or Utility 1 Bus in the lt Mask Source gt group of the Sub Mask menu for the ke
104. 0 00 a See page 62 Applying the zabton effects Use the following procedure Key Setting Operations Using Menus 6 To interchange color and color 2 press Color Invert turning it on 1 In the Edge menu press Zabton turning it on 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Pattern edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 3 Density Density 0 00 to 100 00 If in the pattern selection described below you select Mask Pattern and Box for the main mask the Size parameter here cannot be adjusted Set Size in the Main Mask menu 3 To adjust the pattern and color press Zabton Adjust The Zabton Adjust menu appears 4 In the lt Zabton Pattern gt group select the pattern Key Wipe Use a key wipe Edge Pattern Use a color mixing pattern for key edge Mask Pattern Use the main mask Box or Pattern 5 To adjust the color press Zabton Color and adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 4 Density Density 0 00 to 100 00 Masks There are two masks which can be used to mask off unneeded parts of a key or background or to remove defects and these are known as the main mask and subsidiary mask You can either
105. 00 to 100 00 3 To link the masks on frame memory source buses 1 and 2 press Mask Link turning it on Recalling Images Using the thumbnail display to recall an image To recall an image file saved in memory using the thumbnails and assign it to an FM output use the following procedure 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF1 Recall and HF1 Recall Thumbnail The Recall Thumbnail menu appears e When Pair is on only pair files pairs of main file and sub file are displayed 354 Frame Memory Operations image001 image001 s image002 image002 S image004 image004 S image005 image005 s h A Sub file Main file e When Pair is off both single files and pair files appear image001 image001 S image002 image002 s image003 image004 image004 s Single file In the status area select the FM to be assigned See page 351 Using the arrow keys or turning the knob scroll the file thumbnail display 1 Scroll Scroll thumbnails 1 to Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values Press the thumbnail of the image you want to recall This recalls the image file which is assigned to the FM you selected in step 2 Frame Memory Operations 355 Aioway ewes 7 Jajdeyo oway ewes 7 Jaydeyo 356 Using the list display to recall an image To recall an image file saved in memory using the list display and
106. 00 to 0 00 2 Angle Angle value 180 00 to 0 00 For details of the crop and angle parameters see Chroma key window page 48 e When setting Y Balance on and adjusting the ratio in which Y balance is added to the color cancel key 1 Mixture Ratio of Y balance key 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values Adjusting the window Setting the window function on allows you to adjust the detection range used to determine the key signal When this function is off the default range is used for the key For an overview of the window see Chroma key window page 48 After making sure that the values of Clip Gain and Hue are adjusted appropriately use the following procedure to make the window adjustment 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set Window on 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Crop Crop value 100 00 to 0 00 2 Angle Angle value 180 00 to 0 00 Adjusting the Y balance Setting the Y balance on allows you to specify that even if the hue is the same only portions of a particular luminance will be replaced by the background For an overview of the Y balance see page 49 Use the following procedure 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set Y Balance on Key Setting Operations Using Menus 269 s y p 13 dey9 shay vp sa deyo 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob P
107. 000 287 Operations in the Key Control Block ssssseeseeeeseeeeesseresrsresessee 287 Key Edse Modifications ma ae nee eee 291 Mas a en te eee ee ee 295 Applying a DME Effect to a KEA oeoo raO TE 296 Other Key Setting Operations eee e 297 IC YZSTIAPSHOtSccccscecesscsasssscescsecccsscsssecocescstocencsass sucess susesacsesseatescseceescessss 299 Keyesnapshot perations ect re ete eee 299 Key Snapshot Operations Using a Simple Transition Module 301 shay vp sa deyo 262 Key Setting Operations Using Menus There are two ways of making key settings either using menus or using the key control block This section describes basic procedures for making key settings using the menus taking the M E 1 gt Key1 menu as an example Operations in the Key menus are the same for all banks M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST For details of the method of using the key control block see Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block page 287 Key Setting Menus The key setting menus for each bank M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST are as follows Bank Keys set Menus M E 1 Keys 1 to 4 M E 1 gt Key1 to 4 M E 2 Keys 1 to 4 M E 2 gt Key1 to 4 M E 3 Keys 1 to 4 M E 3 gt Key1 to 4 PGM PST Downstream keys 1 to 4 PGM PST gt DSK1 to 4 Accessing a key setting menu For example to access the M E 1 gt Key1 menu carry out any of the following procedures In the menu control block select the top menu select
108. 1 M E2 and M E3 on the auxiliary bus control block M E1 M E2 M E3 and PGM in the cross point control block of the destination bank For example to feed the output from the M E 1 bank as the background B input to M E 2 in the M E 2 cross point control block press the M E1 button in the background B row Bus Selection Each row of 32 cross point buttons is shared by multiple buses For example in the M E 1 bank the key 1 row of buttons can be assigned either to the key 1 bus or to the key 3 bus The KEY3 button switches between these two assignments To assign a bus to the cross point buttons in the auxiliary bus control block press one of the AUX delegation buttons to select the bus The following table illustrates the correspondence between buses and cross point button rows and the delegation operations Bank Bus name Cross point Delegation operation button row M E 1 Background A bus Background A M E 2 row WES Background B bus Background B row Key 1 bus Key 1 row Turn off the KEY3 button Key 2 bus Key 2 row Turn off the KEY4 button Key 3 bus Key 1 row Turn on the KEY3 button Key 4 bus Key 2 row Turn on the KEY4 button Signal Selection Bank Bus name Cross point Delegation operation button row PGM PST _ Program bus Program row Preset bus Preset row DSK 1 bus DSK1 row Turn off the DSK3 button DSK 2 bus DSK2
109. 1 Key density 4162 112 75 Key source selection 4162 112 76 DME setup KF Reverse Run GPI input operation 7344 1 4 262 Macros Macro operations in the numeric keypad control 160 310 block Event creation 160 312 e Effect recall Snapshot recall Keyframe rewind and run Table of Contents Chapter 1 DVS 9000 Functions Introduction sescssersssersersssssessssssesseesesescsssscsesssessesenssesesessenesessesesesessens 20 Features of the DVS 9000 Production Switcher System sssescseeee 22 Video Processing FIOW ssssssssssssssssescssssssescescesssssessesessnessessssessnesesees 24 Signal Selection scccscscscscsssssscsssssccsscsssssscsessessscecscsscesessseesesssecsssssessses 25 Basics of Signal Selection 00 0 cece ee eeceseeeeeeeeeseecaeeseecsecsaeeseeneeeeees 26 BUS Selection nii ennon Hacvochs dole see E O E EEEE Er A E Ceao EEEE cess 26 Signal Assignment and Selection esssseeessseeseseeesrrersersrrrsserrrserersreee 28 Signal Name Display eeesseeeeeseeeesesresesessrsrsserresterrsreerereseerrnsererserersreee 31 Transition Soinaren iiA EEAS 32 Selecting the Next Transition esssesesssesessereresrsresersrersrrssesrssererserersreet 32 Independent Key Transitions eee ee ceeeceseeeeceeceeeeeeeeseeeneeseeeaeenaes 35 Transition Types enen elt n i iece eaten aoe ieee ste 39 EX Cuting a TTansitiOn eih riean E AEE AEAT RAEE Eeh 42 KOYS weccdsscnsncsss
110. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 J 5 Insertion at an existing keyframe 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 Insertion at the last keyframe 1 2 3 4 Keyframe insertion position and the change in effect duration Changes in the effect duration caused by deleting a keyframe e When the effect is stopped on a keyframe a delete operation deletes the keyframe and reduces the effect duration by the duration of the deleted keyframe Keyframes 1 31 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 132 e When the effect is stopped between two keyframes a delete operation deletes the preceding keyframe and reduces the effect duration by the duration of the deleted keyframe In constant duration mode see page 129 the duration of the keyframe before the deleted keyframe is increased by the duration of the deleted keyframe Thus the effect duration does not change Deletion position Change in effect duration Deletion of the first keyframe 1 2 3 4 WLLL 1 lt 2 3 Deletion of an intermediate keyframe 1 2 3 4 ao o 1 aig Deletion between two keyframes 1 2 3 4 A 7 1 2i 3 Deletion of the last keyframe 1 2 3 4 a 1 2 3 Keyframe deletion position and the change in effect duration Delay setting Keyframes You can set the delay from the time of executing an operation to run the effect and the effect act
111. 1 bank press the key delegation button KEY 1 then press the independent key transition type selection button WIPE twice in rapid succession Carrying out the above operation displays the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust menu which will be referred to below as simply the Key Wipe Adjust menu Selecting the independent key transition wipe pattern You select the independent key wipe pattern from the list of patterns displayed in the menu In an independent key transition you can only use the standard wipe patterns pattern numbers to 24 To select a wipe pattern for independent key on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions 1 In the Keyl Wipe Adjust menu select Pattern Select The Pattern Select menu appears 2 Press the button for the desired pattern Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers Available modifiers You can use the following modifiers with an independent key transition wipe Note that the available modifiers may depend on the pattern you are using Edge Direction Positioner Rotation Aspect ratio Pattern replication Setting the wipe direction Direction In the lt Direction gt group of the Key Wipe Adjust menu make any of the following selections Normal regular direction Normal Reverse alternate between regular and reverse for each transition Reverse reverse direction to normal Softening the wipe
112. 17 suonoun4 0006 SAQ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 118 External Devices In the DVS 9000 system you can operate while controlling the following types of external device e Devices supporting P BUS Peripheral II protocol referred to as P BUS devices in the manual e Devices supporting GPI e VTRs e Disk recorder Sony disk 9 pin protocol The following is an outline of external device control For external device control operations see Chapter 12 External Devices Volume 2 For details on the devices that can be connected consult your Sony representative Shared Functions for External Device Control Keyframe functions There are 99 registers numbered 1 to 99 holding external device control data as keyframe data The following are the keyframe functions that can be used RECALL 1 99 STORE 1 99 RECALL UNDO STORE UNDO empty register search AUTO SAVE RECALL MODE RECALL RECALL amp REWIND EDIT ENABLE EDIT UNDO CONST DUR EFF DUR KF DUR DELAY PAUSE INSERT BEFORE INSERT AFTER MODIFY DELETE COPY PASTE BEFORE PASTE AFTER FROM TO ALL PREV KF NEXT KF GOTO TC GOTO KF RUN REWIND FF STOP NEXT KF NORMAL JOG KF FADER Actions set in a keyframe are executed only when the keyframe effect is executed in the normal direction Take care when executing simultaneously with a switcher or DME keyframe effect since the actions are not executed in the reverse d
113. 2 buttons with LCDs These display changes according to various operation modes UNDO button UNDO After recalling a register press this button to return to the state before recalling the register When contents have been saved to a register or the contents of the register have been deleted hold down the STORE STATS button and press this button to return the register to its state before the save or delete operation STORE STATS store status When a save or delete operation has been carried out on a register this button lights amber After saving to a register Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel hold down this button and press the relevant register button to delete the data in the register Again after a save or delete operation on a register hold down this button and press the UNDO button to restore the register to its state before the save or delete operation XPT HOLD cross point hold status display A bus for which cross point hold is set appears as a green light Numeric display Depending on the operation mode this shows the pattern number of a wipe or DME wipe a bank number a register number a transition rate and so on in up to four digits Key Control Block Each of the M E banks and the PGM PST any desired keyer In this control block you bank includes four keyers for keys 1 to 4 can adjust and modify keys and you can delegate this control block to Key fi
114. 4 Bik Pun Ct oise e eero eo etan aeo a E E Eeen 285 Video PROCESSING fssceseesycercevdcssveeseydes gs Auycheseshceeslestenadyspessenad oteeveestytessee 286 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block sssscssesseeee 287 Operations in the Key Control Block 00 cece ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeene 287 Key Edge Modifications ec ceesecsecseeecsseeseceeceseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeens 291 Masks ieten a eoe i e aE E E E ate timation 295 Applying a DME Effect to a Key ssesssesseeeeeseseessrerrsresesresrrresreersreee 296 Other Key Setting Operations s eesesesseseseesssesersersrsresrsrreerrsereresesees 297 Key Siiapshots c sssssccescsscssssccsscensesssussestesssvsscsasecssstesvasecssessvessedcnsssvadanscvssenses 299 Key Snapshot Operations 0 eee eceeeeeecseessecseesseceeceseseceeeeseeeeeeeeees 299 Key Snapshot Operations Using a Simple Transition Module 301 Chapter 5 Wipes Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings ccscsssssscsssssssscssssesesssssseeseceseees 304 Wipe Settings Men wisssc scescseeiscesessepisc a esssctenes ssperebbue sie 304 Wipe Pattern Selection iien e Ria NRG N 304 Patt ert MIX ena enc ees earth ese dears vee ecdd te ee blades es setae a eee 307 Setting Wipe Modifiers siisii e Alaa esis 309 Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions sssssssssssesseeee 322 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings 322 Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers
115. 9 Switcher Setups c 4 recorre heiasees ties E Er ETET SEa Ter EEEE ents 151 DME Setup mnan a e E R T anaes 154 Setup Relating to DCU Input Output s sssssseeseseeeseeeeeiesrsrsserersereesee 155 Setup Relating to the Router Interface and Tally Interface 155 Simple Connection to MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel 156 Fil S E A E E 158 MACTOS EE PEE TOT 160 Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel sscssssesssrees 164 Control Panel Example Configuration 1 With Standard Transition Modules cccccsssessseeeeeeees 164 Control Panel Example Configuration 2 With Simple Transition Modules ceeeceesceeeeeeeeneeeenees 166 Control Panel Example Configuration 3 With Compact Transition Modules ceceecceeseeeeeeseeeeeees 168 Cross Point Control Block 00 0 eee eceeeeceseeeeecseeseecesesaecaeceseeeeseees 169 Transition Control Block Standard Type cece eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeees 173 Flexi Pad Control Block Standard Type 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeseceeeeseeseeeseees 177 Key Control Block 2 3250 cecesccestssesetshaes etniese sgcepsscbs siisii aseissa 179 Device Control Block Trackball cccccccssccessceeeseeceseeeessteeensaeees 183 Device Control Block Joystick eecceescesceceseceneeceeeeceeceeeceeereesaeeeaees 187 Keyframe Control Block 0 eseeceecesecseceseeseceeeesecesenseeeeeeeeeeneenes 188 Numeric Keypad Control BOCK
116. ATE button The memory recall section display is now ready to accept the entered transition rate XPT HOLD ABUW1234 TRANS RATE button TC button ENTR button Memory recall section Flexi Pad control block standard type 2 Enter the desired transition rate with the numeric keypad If required press the TC button to toggle the input mode frame input or timecode input e Enter a value of up to three digits e To cancel the entry press any of the six buttons in the leftmost column WIPE DME or the TRANS RATE button 3 Press the ENTR button This confirms the entry and the new setting appears in the transition control block display Executing a Transition 237 suonsuel Ja deuD suomisuel g 10 deyo Setting the transition rate in the numeric keypad control block 238 TRANS RATE button Display Numeric keypad OOOGO0O000000 Region selection buttons TC button ENTER button Numeric keypad control block Use the following procedure 1 In the numeric keypad control block press the TRANS RATE button 2 Press the region selection button for the M E or PGM PST bank for which you want to set the transition r
117. Assign For each operating bank or bus assign a main table and sub tables 1 to 4 e Xpt Assign Carry out main table settings Assign video key sources for button numbers 1 to 128 Set source names of up to 16 characters Set the LCD color for source name display For each cross point table specify whether the rightmost cross point button in each row is used as a shift button and the operation mode when it is used as a shift button e Sub Table Assign For sub tables 1 to 4 set rearrangements of the button layout set in the main table Also set the shift button mode Setup 149 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD Shift Mode For the SHIFT button in the cross point control block select the mode in which this is a shift button dedicated to the source display section or the mode in which it is a shift button for all buses e Name Export This function sends the source name and destination name to the S BUS AUX bus settings Aux Assign e Aux Assign Assign the AUX delegation buttons in the auxiliary bus control block to any bus e Shift Mode Specify whether the rightmost button of the AUX delegation buttons is used as a shift button and when it is used as a shift button the operation mode Button assignment settings Prefs Utility Assign the PREFS 1 to PREFS 8 buttons in the menu control block and the utility shotbox control block buttons e User Preferen
118. Chroma Adjust menu set Plane on 2 Adjust the following parameter Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance level 0 00 to 100 00 Chroma Key Adjustments There are two ways of making chroma key adjustments automatically using the auto chroma key function or manually making individual adjustments such as color cancel adjustments and window adjustments Making auto chroma key adjustments Auto chroma key is an automatic adjustment function which allows you to specify a part of the foreground video for example the blue background color and use it as a reference for creating the chroma key image Use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF1 Type then select Chroma in the lt Key Type gt group 2 Select Chroma Adjust The Chroma Adjust menu appears 3 Select Sample Mark in the lt Auto gt group The foreground video only appears on the monitor with a white box shaped sample selector Key Setting Operations Using Menus 4 Adjust the position and size of the sample selector to specify the color to be used as the basis of chroma keying typically a blue background Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Position V Vertical position 100 00 to 100 00 3 Size Size 1 00 to 100 00 a The setting ranges depend on the signal format screen aspect ratio and size settings 5 Select Auto Start
119. E Wipe menu to access the Edge Direction menu for the M E or PGM PST bank For an overview of the pattern limits see page 44 e A pattern limit only applies when a wipe or DME wipe is selected as the transition type e A pattern limit cannot be applied to an independent key transition see page 248 Executing a Transition 239 suonsuel g Ja deuD suomisuel g sa deyo 240 ON ON ON ON 1234123412341234 _ TRANS PVW button PTN LIMIT button LIMIT SET button Transition control block standard type Setting the pattern limit with the fader lever Use the following procedure 1 Move the fader lever to the position corresponding to a particular pattern size e First make sure that the PTN LIMIT button is off e To check the pattern size on the preview monitor first press the TRANS PVW button to select the transition preview mode see page 247 Press the LIMIT SET button This sets the current fader lever position as the pattern limit Setting the pattern limit by a menu operation Use the following procedure 1 When a wipe is selected as the transition type in the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF5 Wipe then HF4 Edge Direction When a DME wipe is selected as the transition type in the M E or PGM
120. Flash Rate Rate of generation of particles 0 00 to 100 00 You can also apply the dust mix function to the pattern generated by a pattern mix When a rotary wipe pattern numbers 100 107 150 151 156 158 160 162 516 518 604 606 624 and 661 or random diamond dust wipe pattern numbers 270 274 is selected the dust mix function is not available Setting Wipe Modifiers You can apply various modifiers to the wipe pattern setting the wipe direction pattern position and so on Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 309 s d M gJsejdeyo s d M g sajdeyo 310 For an overview of the wipe modifiers see Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers page 59 Note that the available modifiers may depend on the pattern you are using For details see Possible combinations of wipe patterns and modifiers page 320 Main pattern and sub pattern modifiers You can make independent settings of the modifiers for the main pattern and sub pattern e To set the modifiers for the main pattern in the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify and make the settings in the Main Modify menu e To set the modifiers for the sub pattern select HF6 Sub Modify and make the settings in the Sub Modify menu Operations in the Main Modify menu and Sub Modify menu are the same Independently set modifiers for the main pattern and sub pattern e Positioner e Rotation e Aspect ratio e Pattern rep
121. Flexi Pad control block or menu AUTO TRANS transition button Pressing this button carries out an auto transition of the set transition rate duration The transition starts immediately and the button lights amber When the transition completes the button goes off CUT button Pressing this button carries out the transition as a cut i e instantaneously Wipe direction selection buttons When you have selected a wipe or DME wipe as the transition type press one of these buttons turning it on to select the wipe direction NORM normal The wipe proceeds in the direction from black to white as shown on the pattern in the lists of patterns see the appendixes Wipe Pattern List and DME Wipe Pattern List Volume 2 or in the direction of the arrow REV reverse The wipe proceeds in the opposite direction to that when the NORM button is pressed NORM REV normal reverse The wipe direction alternates between normal and reverse every time a transition is executed TRANS PVW transition preview button When this button is lit you can check in advance the video changes during the transition on the preview output from the M E or PGM PST bank During the preview you can use the fader lever AUTO TRANS button and CUT button One of the following functions of this button can be selected in a Setup mode When the transition completes the system returns to the normal mode The tran
122. PI DEVi eS oi csccssvssistesssonsssvesscessocvesvess costosvsetsnstosboesoatens 120 VTR Disk Recorder Control eeeeeseesnceeeeceeseceececeseeeneeceeeeceeeeneens 121 Regions and Registers sessesosoesosseoosessossesoesesoesossesoesesossessosoesoesessesossesoeses 124 REGIONS sccsceds sites bene savige setdask Les E S 124 REBISLCLS oeer osu sevens opera e a AE Se I SNS 125 KRG YEP aM 5 sssssesissassscesiacdstaseesssansssssnostantednosedosnsdedenseseaseteasasaseacestenesacsesestoese 127 ETRE CIS 5 sa es schostccsd eet ettr e En E a R A R 127 Saving and Recalling Effects ssessseeesseeeseerseseeereereserrssrerrsrererererees 128 Effect Atte DUtes einen a e E A 128 Effect EdItiN E aei n eane e oa Or E EOE A ch EE O E E EEEE tay 128 Time Set gs oe a a ea a e E ET EE E od ela 130 Paths gcc Stecoaxscaceecceiaicuetsetcvssstuntenscts E A EE A 133 Eifect EXECU ON e a Ea EE EE EEE S EEE NE eE riS Vie 138 Master Timeliness E E Eaa 139 STAPSHOUS sisscssscesevessescesssessescessevesapsenssostossesescekeesesseesvassessesevesdes nssseasagcesssenses 140 Snapshot Type Sinis el tna eats ceeded 140 Snapshot Attributes iiss inisenisi iser iris 141 LDE IEn E E T T AANA O 143 SHOtDOX PE EP N NE S T EE E O E E 144 10 Table of Contents Overview Of Setup eee enseiu E REA NR a eT 145 System Setup iiriksi a an E er E EE ES 145 Saving and Recalling Setup Data oo ee ececeesceeeeeeeeeseeeeneeaee 148 Panel Setup spenar ioe aero Aaa seats 14
123. Pad control block simple type 200 standard type 177 Flip flop mode 43 Flying bar 103 Frame input mode 236 Frame memory feed 285 297 overview 73 settings 153 Frame memory operations 348 capturing animage 352 input image selection 350 menu display 348 preparations 348 selecting frame memory 351 selecting outputs 351 Freeze 74 100 352 Fringe 65 FTB button 193 FULL LINK 59 Function button area 216 selection buttons 192 G Global coordinate space 86 effects 112 GPI Device control 120 GPI output 141 Graphics display 95 Grid 96 H HF buttons 216 Image capturing 74 data management 76 362 data transfer 76 output 75 processing 75 recalling 75 saving 75 Image file deletion 362 renaming 363 Independent key transition 35 248 DME wipe settings 339 simple transitions 258 type 249 type selection buttons 176 203 205 wipe modifiers 323 wipe settings 322 Independent key transition control block simple type 203 standard type 248 Independent key transition ex ecution section 176 203 206 209 Independentkey transition rate 250 display 252 setting by a menu opera tion 251 setting in the Flexi Pad control block 250 setting in the numeric key pad control block 250 Input signal settings 152 154 string 220 value 218 Installation 147 Interpolation 111 Invert 111 Item display 218 220 J Joystick 187 K Kaleidoscope 105 Key 46 1 2row 169 bus selection buttons 171 control block 179
124. Pairing on H Create slits in the horizontal direction V Create slits in the vertical direction e The parameter Width determines the width of the slits e The parameter H Offset determines the spacing in the horizontal direction If a negative value is set the even numbered pairs of strip and slit move to the left and the odd numbered pairs move to the right The value 100 00 represents the maximum movement If a positive value is set the even numbered pairs of strip and slit move to the right and the odd numbered pairs move to the left The value 100 00 represents the maximum movement e The parameter V Offset determines the spacing in the vertical direction If a negative value is set the even numbered pairs of strip and slit move upward and the odd numbered pairs move downward The value 100 00 represents the maximum movement If a positive value is set the even numbered pairs of strip and slit move downward and the odd numbered pairs move upward The value 100 00 represents the maximum movement Modulation The pattern signal can be modulated giving waves on the horizontal or vertical edges or radially The parameter Shape determines the form of the modulation 1 sine wave 2 triangular wave 3 rectangular wave Horizontal modulation This modulates the pattern applying waviness in the horizontal direction to edges The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves A va
125. REW PLAY FF CUE UP VAR PLAY SHTL JOG STANDBY OFF STOP and ALL STOP For details of the operation of the buttons see Device Control Block Trackball page 183 and Device Control Block Joystick page 187 Depending on the settings made in the Setup menu the CUE UP PLAY and STOP operations can be carried out from the transition control block standard type For details of the operation of the buttons see Transition Control Block Standard Type page 173 Device Control Block Trackball page 183 and Device Control Block Joystick page 187 e Setting a start point For each selected VTR you can set the start point timecode value as keyframe data e Setting a stop point For each selected VTR you can set the stop point timecode value as keyframe data e Setting a start delay time For each selected VTR you can set the start delay time as keyframe data External Devices 121 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 122 Cueup amp Play By saving the start point timecode stop point timecode and start delay time for a VTR or disk recorder in an effect register and recalling this register you can operate the following buttons in the keyframe control block to automatically control the VTR or disk recorder REWIND button Cue up to the start point timecode RUN button Play With this function you can also stop the VTR or disk recorder used for playba
126. S button turning it on Set the following buttons on or off depending on the information you want to recall These buttons are not provided in the downstream key control block K MOD ENBL button When this is on the key settings and key modifiers are recalled When this is off they are not recalled K TR ENBL button When this is on the independent key transition settings are recalled When this is off they are not recalled If both buttons are off the key memory function is enabled and only the saved selection of key fill and key source signals is recalled Press the key source name display key snapshot button corresponding to the register you want to recall The button you pressed lights yellow and this recalls the key snapshot To cancel a recall carried out in the downstream key control block press the UNDO button in the downstream key control block Key Snapshot Operations Using a Simple Transition Module When using a simple transition module the key snapshots hold the settings for key 3 and key 4 You can carry out key snapshot operations in the independent key transition control block simple type and Flexi Pad control block simple type There are two dedicated key snapshot registers for each of keys 3 and 4 Key 3 control block Key 4 control block Key source name display key snapshot buttons K SS button The functions of the key 3 control block and
127. S TRANS TRANS Independent key transition control block standard type Saving a key snapshot For example the following procedure saves the state of the M E 1 key 1 settings 1 In the M E 1 independent key transition control block press the key delegation button KEY 1 turning it on 2 Press the K SS button turning it on The system switches to key snapshot mode and the key source name display key snapshot buttons show the status of registers to 4 for key 1 Key Snapshots 299 skey py saydeyD shay vp da deyo 300 Off Nothing is saved in the register Lit orange Settings are saved in the register Lit yellow The most recently recalled register For a register holding a snapshot the register name is shown as up to eight characters Hold down the K SS STORE button and press the key source name display key snapshot button corresponding to the register in which you want to save the snapshot The key source name display key snapshot button which you pressed lights yellow If you save a key snapshot in a register for which the button is lit orange or yellow the existing contents of the register are overwritten Recalling a key snapshot For example the following procedure recalls the state of the M E 1 key 1 settings 1 2 Key Snapshots In the M E 1 independent key transition control block press the key delegation button KEY 1 turning it on Press the K S
128. SONY DVS 9000 9000SF System With CCP 8000 Series Center Control Panel User s Guide Production Switcher System Volume 1 1st Edition Revised 1 Software Version 2 00 and Later NOTICE TO USERS 2002 Sony Corporation All rights reserved This manual or the software described herein in whole or in part may not be reproduced translated or reduced to any machine readable form without prior written approval from Sony Corporation SONY CORPORATION PROVIDES NO WARRANTY WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR SUCH OTHER INFORMATION IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON TORT CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE THEREOF Sony Corporation reserves the right to make any modification to this manual or the information contained herein at any time without notice The software described herein may also be governed by the terms of a separate user license agreement Functions Newly Supported in Version 2 00 The functions newly supported in the DVS 9000 9000SF system version 2 00 are as follows 1 For the BKDS 9470 version 1 40 Functions relating
129. The PTN LIMIT button goes off and the pattern limit state is released Depending on the way in which the transition was executed the action will be as follows e When you press the CUT button the pattern limit is immediately released and the image switches instantaneously Executing a Transition 241 suonsuel Ja deuD suomisuel g sajdeyo 242 e When you press the AUTO TRANS button until the state of the next transition the transition is carried out over the duration given by the transition rate e When you move the fader lever the transition is carried out from the pattern limit state to the state before the pattern limit transition was carried out However moving the fader lever even a little synchronizes the fader lever position with the transition state and you can move the fader lever either in the forward direction or in the reverse direction Depending on the Setup settings the transition may be executed at the instant you press the PTN LIMIT button and the button goes off In this case execution continues for the time specified by the dedicated transition rate in the menu setting as far as the state of the next transition For details of the setting see Settings Relating to Keys Wipes and Frame Memory Key Wipe FM Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 To set the transition rate when the pattern limit is released Use the following procedure 1 In the lt Pattern Limit Release gt gr
130. The Pattern Mix menu appears In the lt Pattern Mix gt group select the type of pattern mix Mix mix Nam positive Nam Nam negative Nam Morphing morphing For an overview of types of pattern mix see page 57 Depending on the selection in step 4 set the following parameters e When mix positive Nam or negative Nam is selected Knob 1 Mix Parameter Ratio Adjustment Proportion of sub pattern to the main pattern Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings e When morphing see page 57 is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Start Point in transition at which main 50 00 to 150 00 pattern is at 100 3 End Point in transition at which sub 50 00 to 150 00 pattern is at 100 6 In the lt Main Sub Link gt group make the main sub modifier link function settings See Main and sub modifier link function page 59 Full full link mode Semi semi link mode Applying the effect of a diamond dust wipe to the selected pattern Dust mix Use the following procedure 1 In the Pattern Mix menu press Dust Mix turning it on 2 Set the following parameters as required Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Mix Ratio Proportion of diamond dust 0 00 to 100 00 pattern in mix 2 H Size Particle width 0 00 to 100 00 3 V Size Particle height 0 00 to 100 00 4
131. To select the video signal for the second channel hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and select the signal in the Key1 row DME external video bus To select the video signal for the third channel hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and carry out the following operation Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block If the selected DME is channel 3 or channel 4 turn off the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the signal in the key 2 row DME utility 1 bus Assigning the DME output signal to a monitor signal Use the following procedure 1 Holding down the output destination specification button MON in the key control block use the DME channel selection buttons to select the DME channel DME1 to DME8 you want to use The selected DME output is assigned to DME MON V and DME MON K 2 To check the DME assignment status hold down just the MON button While it is held down the lit color of the DME1 to DME4 buttons shows the key assignment status e Lit green Shows the DME currently being monitored e Lit amber Shows a DME which can be monitored e Off DME is not assigned Other Key Setting Operations Using an external processed key You can select and use the key processed keyer key fill and key source signals on the AUX buses Use the following procedure 1 Select the keyer to be allocated 2 In the key control block press PROC KEY tur
132. Transition DME Wipe Settings Accessing the independent key transition DME wipe settings menu As an example to access the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition gt DME Wipe Adjust menu carry out the following operation e In the menu control block select the top menu selection button M E 1 and select VF1 Keyl and HF6 Transition to display the Transition menu for key 1 Next press DME Wipe Adjust Carrying out the above operation displays the M E 1 gt Key 1 gt Transition gt DME Wipe Adjust menu which will be referred to below as simply the Keyl DME Wipe Adjust menu Selecting the independent key transition DME wipe pattern You select the independent key DME wipe pattern from the list of patterns displayed in the menu For an independent key transition only the slide split squeeze door frame in out and user programmable DME patterns are available To select a DME wipe pattern for independent key1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions 339 sedim AWG 9 Jeldeyo sedi JWG 9 Jeideyo 1 In the lt Pattern Select gt group of the Keyl DME Wipe Adjust menu press 1ch The Pattern Select menu for one channel mode appears 2 Select the desired DME wipe pattern group with one of the following buttons Slide Squeeze slide and squeeze Split Door split and door Frame I O frame in out User Program user programmable DME For details of DME
133. UTILITY 2 buses DSK 1 fill to DSK 4 fill buses DSK 1 source to DSK 4 source buses M E 3 key 1 fill to M E 3 key 4 fill buses M E 3 key 1 source to M E 3 key 4 source buses M E 1 external DME bus M E 2 external DME bus M E 3 external DME bus P P external DME bus DME UTILITY1 and DME UTILITY2 buses Selected source name displays These show the name of the currently selected signal source on the bus corresponding to the delegation button DEST destination button Press this button turning it on to display the names of buses allocated to the delegation buttons in the selection source name displays Selected bus display This shows the name of the bus selected by the auxiliary bus delegation buttons Cross point buttons The cross points in the auxiliary bus control block are arranged in two rows an upper row 1st row and a lower row 2nd row and are allocated to the buses selected with the AUX delegation buttons The Ist row contains the cross point buttons for unshifted buses and the 2nd row contains the cross point buttons for shifted buses When the DME 1 V K to 4V K buses are selected with the AUX delegation buttons the Ist row cross point buttons are for the currently showing side of DME and the 2nd row are for the reverse side By holding down the 2ND button and making an AUX delegation selection you can allocate the 2nd row to a different bus from the Ist row In this case if the 32nd b
134. Unassigned DME Specifying the Key Output Destination Using the key processed keyer signals external processed key To select the key processed keyer key fill and key source signals on the AUX buses press Ext Proc Key turning it on in the Processed Key menu This assigns the key fill and key source signals for M E 1 key 1 to reentry signals PROC V and PROC K You cannot select the PROC V and PROC K signals using the cross point selection buttons of the M E or PGM PST bank Key Setting Operations Using Menus Using the key processed keyer signals or signals to which a DME effect is applied in frame memory frame memory feed To use the key processed keyer key fill and key source signals on the frame memory source buses in the Processed Key menu press FM Feed Ext Proc Key turns on and the key fill and key source signals processed on the currently selected keyer are automatically assigned to frame memory source buses 1 and 2 When a DME is selected on the keyer the key fill and key source signals to which a DME effect is applied are assigned Blink Function With the blink function you can obtain the following effects Key blink The key is alternately inserted and deleted at regular intervals You can set the period of blinking and the proportion of each cycle for which the key is inserted Edge blink The key fill and key edge fill signals are interchanged at regular intervals You can set the period of blinking
135. V K mode see page 352 In the status area select the FM output See page 351 In the lt Reposition gt group select the movement mode see page 75 Normal Move in normal mode Black amp White Move in black amp white mode Frame Memory Operations 4 With the knobs adjust the parameters to move the image Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Move in horizontal direction 2090 00 to 200 00 2 Position V Move in vertical direction 200 00 to 200 00 2 a See page 61 The surroundings of the moved image on the screen are filled with black 5 To return the image moved by the reposition function to the center position in the lt Reposition gt group press Center It is not possible to write the image moved by the reposition function directly to frame memory Fixing the output image selection lock function Use the following procedure 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF3 Reposition Lock and HF2 Lock The Lock menu appears 2 In the status area select the FM output See page 351 3 Press Lock turning it on This fixes the currently selected frame memory output image To release the lock set Lock to off Frame Memory Operations 361 oway ewes 7 Jajdeyo oway ewes 7 Ja deyo Image Data Management You can carry out the following operations on the files in which images are saved e Delete e Rename e Restore For
136. While the UTIL button is pressed the background A bus switches to the utility 1 bus To enable the UTIL button its operation mode must be set to Hold beforehand See Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 4 Set the mask source parameters e When wipe is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 Key Setting Operations Using Menus 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values e When utility 1 bus is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Reference level for creating mask 109 58 to 7 30 signal 2 Gain Gain 100 00 to 100 00 5 To invert the black white sense of the mask source press the Mask Invert button turning it on Applying a DME Effect to a Key Assigning a DME to a key Use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF5 Processed Key The Processed Key menu appears 2 In the lt DME Select gt group select the DME channel DME1 to DME4 to be used The lit colors of DME1 to DME4 indicate the DME assignment Lit green Shows the DME assigned to the currently selected key Lit amber Shows the DME assigned to a key other than the currently selected key Off DME is not assigned To select a DME being used by another keyer Press Override turning it on then select the DME c
137. a EMME W Cylinder Winds the whole image onto a cylinder Digital Multi Effects DME 107 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ 19 deyo suonoun4 0006 SAC_ JaldeuD 108 You can set the degree of winding onto the cylinder the radius the horizontal position of the wound image and front and back side output for the image Sphere Winds the whole image onto a sphere You can set the degree of winding onto the sphere the radius the horizontal position of the wound image and front and back side output for the image You cannot monitor the part of a rotating sphere that corresponds to its axis on the monitor screen Explosion Divides the image into fragments which expand as they fly out You can set the pattern shape and aspect ratio the center position the amount of movement by fragments the curvature of the transition path and other parameters Swirl Swirls the image Digital Multi Effects DME You can set the amount of swirl the swirl region the amount of rotation and the swirl center position Melt Melts the image away from a specified part You can set the degree of transition the degree of extension in the image the jaggedness of the melting sections and the amplitude frequency amount of movement and speed of the melting sections You can also set the slant of the borders the shape of the sections that begin to melt and other parameters Character Trail Extends the edge of th
138. a number of groups as follows Note that only the standard wipe patterns can be used for an independent key transition For wipe patterns see the appendix Wipe Pattern List Volume 2 Standard wipe patterns Patterns consisting of straight lines vertically horizontally or diagonally and circular patterns Enhanced wipes More complex shapes such as hearts stars and round corners Rotary wipes These patterns involve rotation of the image about a point Mosaic wipe pattern This divides the image into small tiles Random and diamond dust wipe patterns These patterns consist of small random tiles or fine particles Pattern Mix You can create a new pattern by combining two selected patterns main and sub It is not possible to apply a pattern mix to an independent key transition For details see Pattern Mix page 307 Types of pattern mix There are four ways in which patterns can be combined in a pattern mix as follows Mix The effect of the sub pattern is applied to the main pattern modifying the outline or nature of the main pattern Positive NAM Nam Creates a pattern with an outline which contains all points within the outlines of either of the main pattern and the sub pattern Negative NAM Nam Creates a pattern with an outline which contains all points within the outlines of both of the main pattern and the sub pattern Mix Positive NAM Negativ
139. achment data Frame memory image data File operations Files You can carry out the following file operations When operating on individual files or registers Save Save the data in a register to the hard disk or memory card Load Load a file from the hard disk or memory card Copy Copy a file within a directory or from one directory to another When a remote panel is used this function applies to it too Rename Rename a file on the hard disk or memory card Delete Delete a file from the hard disk or memory card When operating on files or registers in a batch Only the above Save Load and Delete operations are performable Importing or exporting files to or from frame memory Import Import a file in a different format from hard disk or memory card into frame memory after changing its format Export Export a file in a register to hard disk or memory card after changing its format The supported file formats are TIF and BMP Files 159 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo Jaydeyo suoljoun4 0006 SAd 160 Macros The term macro refers to the function whereby a sequence of signal selections and other operations on the control panel is saved as data in memory so that it can be recalled as required to automatically execute the same sequence of operations For details of macro operations see Macros in Chapter 18 Volume 2 Macro registers The area of memory that holds a macro is termed a
140. ackground which will result in the key fill appearing Key mask Background mask Main mask and subsidiary sub mask Each keyer allows two masks to be used simultaneously and these are referred to as the main mask and the sub mask The signal that determines the mask shape and size is termed the mask source and different sources are used for the main mask and sub mask Main mask This uses the signal from the dedicated box generator provided on each keyer or the signal from the dedicated pattern generator as the Keys 53 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 54 mask source When the box generator is selected a rectangular mask is formed You can adjust the positions of the four sides of the box separately When the pattern generator is selected you can select the pattern and apply modifiers Sub mask This uses the wipe generator signal or the signal selected on the utility 1 bus on the M E or PGM PST bank as the mask source When the wipe generator is selected the patterns and the pattern modifiers are the same as in a wipe transition Key Memory The key memory function allows the keyer settings on each cross point button to be automatically stored so that the next time the same cross point button is selected these settings are recalled automatically There are two modes for key memory simple mode and full mode The parameters stored in each mode are as follows Sim
141. ails 110 Digital Multi Effects DME Background Adds a color to the background of the image Separate Sides Applies separate video signals and key signals to the front and back of the image Front Back Front and back sides Invert Inverts the input video signal and or key signal horizontally or vertically You can make separate settings for the front and back lt q p Horizontal inversion Input signal Vertical inversion Inversion of input signal Interpolation Specifies the methods used for interpolation processing of input video signals and input key signals For input video signals you can select from the following four methods Digital Multi Effects DME 111 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 112 e Detect changes in the luminance and chrominance signals separately and switch automatically between fields and frames You can select the degree of change detection e Detect changes in the luminance signal separately and switch automatically between fields and frames You can select the degree of change detection e Do interpolation in field units e Do interpolation in frame units For input key signals you can select from the following three methods e Detect changes in the luminance signal separately and switch automatically between fields and frames You can select the degree of change detection
142. ain Mask menu After selecting one of the patterns standard wipe patterns 1 to 24 displayed in the Mask Ptn Select menu you can adjust the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter Size Adjustment Pattern size Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 Key Setting Operations Using Menus 5 To invert the black white sense of the mask source press the Mask Invert 6 Knob _ Parameter 2 Soft Adjustment Edge softness Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 button turning it on When a pattern is selected as the mask source set the pattern modifiers as required When turning Position on and setting the pattern position Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 2 2 Position V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 a See page 61 When turning Multi on and replicating the pattern Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 44 a See page 64 When turning Aspect on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern Knob 1 Aspect Parameter Adjustment Aspect ratio Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 63 e When turning Angle on in the lt Rotation gt
143. ake the following settings Network configuration Network Config This provides automatic configuration of all devices connected to the Data LAN excluding the DCU and displays a list of them System configuration System Config Specify the overall system operation mode and the hierarchical relationship of the devices Setup 145 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 146 Operation mode setting e Single Proc mode The control panel controls a single switcher e Dual Simul mode The control panel controls two switchers simultaneously Device hierarchical relationship setting e Panel Assign Specify the switcher controlled by a control panel e Switcher Assign Specify the DME connected to a switcher Signal format settings Format Make the following settings Signal format Specify the signal format to be handled by the devices The combinations of signal formats that can be selected are as follows System Field frequency Effective number of scan lines SD system 59 94 480i 50 576i Screen aspect ratio Switch the screen aspect ratio to 4 3 or 16 9 Selecting the start up state Start Up Setup Set the initial state of the devices when the system is powered on For each device you can select Resume mode or Custom mode Resume mode This resumes the setting state at the previous power off operation This setting is only available for the switcher processor and pa
144. al chroma keying the key signal is based on the chrominance component only and all elements of the foreground with the same hue are replaced by the background Using the Y balance function you can specify a luminance level range within which the key is active and replace the specified part by the background You can use the Y balance function independently on the key signal for the composition and the key signal for the color cancel function When applied to the key signal for the composition this produces the foreground with the color cancel effect applied This can therefore be used to provide an impression of smoke for example When the Y balance function is applied to the color cancel key the relevant part is output in its original color without canceling and therefore it is possible to combine colors which are the same color as the background i e typically blue in the foreground Chroma key shadow This function provides a more realistic treatment when the shadow of an object in the field of view falls on the blue background Since parts of the blue background darker than a specified intensity are treated as shadows there is no effect on cutting out of the foreground Video signal adjustment You can vary the foreground signal gain or change the hue There are separate adjustments for the gain of the overall video signal and Y and C components Keys 49 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suonoun4 0006 SAC_ JaldeuD
145. al selected on the frame memory source bus 1 or a color matte signal When processing an image in FM2 4 6 8 you can use the signal selected on the frame memory source bus 2 to cut out the background image and fill with a color matte signal always white An external key can only be used when the pair mode is enabled see page 73 MIX Mix the background image with the signal selected on the frame memory source bus or color matte signal The mix ratio can be set NAM Non additive mix the background image with the signal selected on the frame memory source bus or color matte signal Image output Moving the output image reposition function For up to two channels of FM1 to FM8 one from FM1 FM3 FM5 and FM7 and the other from FM2 FM4 FM6 and FM8 you can move the output image Frame Memory 75 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 76 with respect to the screen The area of the screen around the image that has been moved is filled with black There are two ways of carrying out this repositioning Normal mode Movement in the horizontal direction is in two pixel increments Black and white mode Movement in the horizontal direction is in one pixel increments and for each pixel moved the color is inverted It is not possible to save an image moved with the reposition function directly to frame memory Fixing the output image selection lock function For the output of each of FM1 t
146. ally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 42 a See page 64 326 Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions Wipe Snapshots Buttons used You can save a snapshot of a wipe pattern together with the current settings of its modifiers and the transition rate in a dedicated register for recall when required In a standard transition system there are ten wipe snapshot registers for each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks and in a simple transition module eight registers for each bank WIPE WIPE button Numeric display XPT HOLD ABUW1234 UNDO Memory recall buttons UNDO button STORE STATS button Flexi Pad control block standard type Wipe Snapshots s d M g sajdeyo 327 s d M g Jaydeyo WIPE button Numeric display XPT HOLD ABUUW1 23 4 Memory recall buttons UNDO button Flexi Pad control block simple type Saving a Wipe Snapshot Saving a wipe snapshot Use the following procedure 1 Make the wipe settings that you want to save 2 In the Flexi Pad control block hold down the WIPE button and press the memory recall button corresponding to the register in which you w
147. ame is inserted after the current keyframe Pressing this button while holding down the SHIFT button inserts the deleted or copied keyframe before the current keyframe SHIFT Hold down this button and press the INS button MOD button or PASTE button to obtain the shifted function for the button UNDO When this button is pressed the last executed keyframe insertion modification or deletion or paste operation is canceled Duration setting buttons KF DUR keyframe duration Press this button turning it on to set the keyframe duration of the selected keyframe by numeric value entry from the numeric keypad control block EFF DUR effect duration Press this button turning it on to set the effect duration from the numeric keypad control block DELAY Press this button turning it on to enter a delay value from the numeric keypad control block CONST DUR constant duration Select the duration mode When this is lit the mode is constant duration mode and when off variable duration mode KF LOOP keyframe loop button Press this button turning it on to execute the effect the specified number of times through the keyframes in the specified range PAUSE button When this button is pressed a pause is applied to the selected keyframe When editing a macro press this button turning it on to include a pause event in the macro The pause length can be set in the numeric keypad control block
148. an overview of file management see page 76 Deleting Files Deleting files using the thumbnail display Use the following procedure 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF4 File and HF1 Delete Thumbnail The File gt Delete Thumbnail menu appears In the status area whether pair mode is on or off all of the saved files appear as thumbnails 2 Using the arrow keys or turning the knob scroll the thumbnail display Knob 1 Parameter Scroll Adjustment Thumbnail display scrolling Setting values 1 to 3 Press the thumbnail of the file you want to delete to select it To select all of the files press Select All turning it on To deselect press once again 4 Press Delete A message for confirming the deletion appears 5 To confirm the deletion press Yes and to cancel press No Deleting files using the list display Use the following procedure 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF4 File and HF2 Delete List 362 Image Data Management The Delete List menu appears In the status area whether pair mode is on or off all of the saved files appear in a list 2 Using any of the following methods select the file to be deleted e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the selection Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No Memory file selection 1 to
149. ange to 999 frames Macro attachment Macro attachment is a function whereby a macro register is assigned to a control panel button linking the execution of the button function with a macro execution Select one of the following three linking modes to make the macro attachment Carry out the linking mode selection in the PGM PST bank or M E bank cross point control block Macros 1 61 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 162 Macros Pre macro Mode in which the button function is executed after macro execution has completed Post macro Mode in which the macro is executed after carrying out the button function Macro only Mode in which the button function is not executed and the macro only is executed You can assign any one of the 99 macro registers to a button For a button whose function is switched by delegation you can make a separate macro attachment for each function For each control panel you can make up to 1000 macro attachment settings e The buttons for which a macro attachment can be made are the background A and background B rows of buttons in the PGM PST bank and the M E banks only e After setting a macro attachment for a cross point button if in setup you change the function assigned to that button see Cross point button settings Xpt Assign page 149 the macro attachment may be canceled Enabling and disabling macro attachment You can temporarily disable
150. ant to save e If you press a button which is lit orange or yellow the existing contents of the register are overwritten e If you carry out a pattern mix and both the main pattern and sub pattern are selected then the memory recall button shows the main pattern 328 Wipe Snapshots The pattern appears on the button you pressed which lights yellow The numeric display shows the number of the corresponding pattern It is also possible to display the register name using a Setup menu see Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Meaning of the state of buttons Off Nothing is saved in the register Lit orange Settings are saved in the register Lit yellow The most recently recalled register Canceling the saving of a wipe snapshot To cancel the saving of a wipe snapshot immediately after performing it hold down the STORE STATS button and press the UNDO button The STORE STATS button changes from amber to green On a simple type Flexi Pad control block it is not possible to cancel the saving of a wipe snapshot Recalling a Wipe Snapshot Recalling a wipe snapshot Use the following procedure 1 In the Flexi Pad control block press the WIPE button This switches the Flexi Pad control block to the mode for recalling a wipe snapshot 2 Press the memory recall button for the register from which you want to recall the wipe snapshot The button lights and the saved wipe snapshot is r
151. ape automatically to the start point X REW rewind Press this button to rewind the tape Y PLAY Press this button to play the tape Z FF Press this button to fast forward the tape CTR ALL STOP Press this button to stop all tape transport operations Trackball When the positioner operation mode is enabled By moving this you can move the pattern in the x axis and y axis directions When the three dimensional transform operation mode is enabled Move the trackball to control the x and y axes in a three dimensional transform Z ring When the positioner operation mode is enabled When the USER button is selected by turning the ring you can adjust the size of the pattern When the three dimensional transform operation mode is enabled Turn this ring to control the z axis in a three dimensional transform Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel When the effect run control mode is enabled By turning the Z ring you can run the keyframe effect independent of the STOP NEXT KF EFF LOOP and similar settings in the keyframe control block Turn clockwise to run the effect in the normal direction and counterclockwise for the reverse direction When the VTR operation mode is enabled Turning the Z ring controls the tape transport at a speed determined by the operating buttons Turn clockwise for the normal direction and counterclockwise for the reverse direction MENU button P
152. arameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Luminance range 0 00 to 100 00 Gain Key gain 100 00 to 100 00 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 Adjusting the chroma key shadow This function allows a shadow falling on the typically blue background color to be rendered more realistically Since portions of the blue background of less than a certain luminance are treated as shadows there is no effect on cutting out of the foreground Use the following procedure 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set Shadow on 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Reference luminance for shadows 0 00 to 100 00 2 Gain Shadow key gain 100 00 to 100 00 3 Density Shadow opacity 0 00 to 100 00 4 Soft Shadow softness 0 00 to 100 00 When chroma key shadow is on key edge is changed to normal and soft edge is switched off Adjusting the video signal You can change the gain of the foreground signal or vary the Hue There are separate adjustments for the gain of the whole video signal or Y and C individually Use the following procedure 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set FRGD CCR on 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Video Gain Overall gain of video signal 100 00 to 100 00 2 Y Gain Y signal gain 100 00 to 100 00 3 C Gain C signal gain 100 00 to 100 00
153. arameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Size Tile width 0 00 to 100 00 V Size Tile height 0 00 to 100 00 Volatility Rate of tile generation 0 00 to 100 00 e When a diamond dust wipe is selected pattern number 274 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Size Particle width 0 00 to 100 00 V Size Particle height 0 00 to 100 00 Flash Rate Rate of generation of particles 0 00 to 100 00 When Flash Rate is set to 0 00 you cannot change the pattern In this state adjusting H Size or V Size has no effect on the pattern For details of a pattern mix see the next section For details of applying pattern modifiers see Setting Wipe Modifiers page 309 Selecting a wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad control block To select a pattern with a standard type Flexi Pad control block use the following procedure It is not possible to select a wipe pattern with a simple type Flexi Pad control block 1 In the M E 1 Flexi Pad control block press the WIPE button This switches the Flexi Pad control block to wipe snapshot mode 306 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 2 In the memory recall section press the PTN NO button This switches the Flexi Pad control block to wipe pattern number recall mode and the memory recall section display changes as shown below WIPE button Numeric display XPT HOLD ABU WW1234 s d M g sajdeyo o w 2 g g
154. asssiccssbscsnscosesestessthovessccssbesesostsadeedebsesedeatesesiescededesisonsdsavedsosesiudssee 46 K y Type arara a ea o Tra EE eo EEEE a EE e seeds ES SERES EEES 46 K y MOdift ers iiss sc siscetsssescesves iensscvaassebaces ccs sebscebeceuets pchs seaetsviciisessasssssvness 50 Key Memory s e e er e edie etrdenehiating ahora thon 54 Key Snapshots erep nea EE e ie 54 Bikes cctecsescvset ss iar na a ei aN 54 Key Default sperren pree aeS Ea E E E EN SA 55 Key Modify Cleary onie ooien nE wa ations dines 55 WADPES ARE E EE REA T T E ETETE 56 Types of Wipe Patt in inesse tennene er ourense 56 Patte MIK eie eae aeo RE EEEE E E EE E ines 57 Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers sseeeseeeesseeesesseeesrrererereerereere 59 Wipe Snapshots sossen n eaeoe oan S ree E KEE Ea R E T 67 DME WARES oe secsecccssssctatscsscdses sesesceessecseseaee sdstuenses ceases t v cusedauseccsessebSesebesesssdsss 68 Types of DME Wipe Pattern oo eee eeseeeeceseeeeceeceeeseeeeseeeneeseecneenaes 68 DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 70 Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects 0 00 71 DME Wipe Snapshot ceccssscsnsesssesssnevenseosesseseesseensessesssonsenenses 71 Frame Memory seccsessessesssssscrveseovsssescsecseevesascesocnesesensecenssaoesasensossstasesssoenseasses 73 OAS TA TA AAEE O E en an RIA eee 73 Table of Contents 9 Frame Memory Functions sccesceesseeesceeeecececeececeeecaeceeeeceeeeeneeeeee 74
155. ate turning it on The numeric keypad control block display now shows the selected region name and the current transition rate setting for the region With the numeric keypad enter the transition rate If required press the TC button to toggle the input mode frame input or timecode input e Enter a value of up to three digits e To clear the entry press the CLR button Press the ENTER button This confirms the entry and the selected region name and the set transition rate appear in the numeric keypad control block display The transition control block display of the same bank M E or PGM PST also shows the setting Executing a Transition To enter a difference from the current value After pressing the button enter the difference and press the TRIM button To change the sign or press the button Setting the transition rate by a menu operation Use the following procedure 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF1 Transition The Transition menu appears N Select any transition type in the lt Transition Type gt group 3 Turn the knob to set the transition rate Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Rate Transition Rate 0 to 999 frame count Pattern Limit There are two ways of setting a pattern limit either by operating the fader lever to save the fader position or by using the Wipe menu or DM
156. ate space They are reset to zeros Source target conversion occurs in the following operation modes e Location XYZ e Rotation Transformation Operation Modes The following operation modes are available for three dimensional DME transformations These operations are carried out in the device control block For details see Three Dimensional Transformation Operations in Chapter 11 Volume 2 90 Digital Multi Effects DME Location XYZ Moves the image on the x axis y axis or z axis The direction of movement differs depending on whether you are manipulating the image in the source coordinate space or the target coordinate space Image movement in the source coordinate space Movement on the x axis Movement on the y axis Movement on the z axis Image movement in the target coordinate space A a Movement on the x axis Movement on the y axis Movement on the z axis Rotation Rotates the image on the x axis y axis or z axis The type of rotation differs depending on whether you are manipulating the image in the source coordinate space or the target coordinate space Digital Multi Effects DME 91 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD Image rotation in the source coordinate space Rotation around the y axis Rotation around the x axis Rotation around the z axis Image rotation in the target coordinate
157. aturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 5 If required set the pattern modifiers Key Setting Operations Using Menus 277 shey yp saydeyo shay vp sa deyo 278 When turning Position on and setting the pattern position Knob _ Parameter 1 Position H Adjustment Horizontal position Setting values 200 00 to 200 00 2 Position V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 a See page 61 When turning Multi on and replicating the pattern Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 44 a See page 64 When turning Aspect on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern Knob _ Parameter 1 Aspect Adjustment Aspect ratio Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 63 e When turning Angle on in the lt Rotation gt group and inclining the pattern Knob Parameter 1 Angle Adjustment Angle of pattern rotation Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 61 When turning Speed on in the lt Rotation gt group and rotating the pattern at a constant speed Knob _ Parameter 1 Speed Adjustment Rotation rate of pattern Setting values 100 00 to 10
158. block Key 4 control block Independent key transition execution section Independent key transition type selection buttons The functions of the key 3 control block and key 4 control block are the same Independent key transition control block simple type Carrying out a transition using a simple type independent key transition control block Use the following procedure 1 Select the transition type for key 3 or key 4 using the independent key transition type selection buttons To fade a key in or out Press the MIX button turning it on To insert or delete a key using a dedicated wipe pattern Press the WIPE button turning it on To insert or delete a key using a dedicated DME wipe pattern Press the DME button turning it on For details of wipe settings see Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions page 322 For details of DME wipe settings see DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions page 339 To cut the key instantaneously in or out Press the CUT button turning it on Simple Transition 259 suonsuel Ja deuD suomisuel g sajdeyp 260 Simple Transition If in the Setup menus you set insertion and deletion as independent modes make the settings for the next transition in the independent key transition control block Separate settings are required both when inserting a key and when dele
159. block Keyframe rewind and run Device control block trackball VTR start point setting Device control block joystick VTR start point setting Downstream key control block Auto transition and cut for the independent key transition execution section Macro editing You can create or edit a macro by recalling a macro register To create a new macro recall an empty macro register and create the desired sequence of events by executing the sequence of operations on the control panel that you want to save as events in the macro To add an event to an existing macro recall the register holding the macro and create the event you want to add For this use the auto insert function a function that automatically adds the events to the macro as you carry it out on the control panel While editing a macro it is not possible to execute another macro Macro execution and pause events To execute a macro recall the register in which the macro is held Simultaneous with the register recall all events stored in the macro are played back executed in sequence without pause Pause event To adjust the execution timing of a particular event to delay the start of execution of the event by a particular time interval you can store a special event which pauses macro execution This event is called a pause event When you store a pause event you can set the interval for which the macro is paused the pause length to any value in the r
160. c Copy and Swap Operations sscscscsscsssssscscsssccssssessessees Copy and Swap Menu Operations 2 0 0 0 ec eeeeecseceeecreenseeseeeeees Copy bysButtoni peratlonmesc meets tr eee ee eee dems pue Adoy 6 JajdeyD 372 Basic Copy and Swap Operations Copy and Swap Menu Operations There are two ways of carrying out a copy operation by using the menus or by a simple button operation Swap operations and operations on DME data can only be done with a menu operation Accessing the Copy Swap menu In the menu operation section top menu selection buttons press the Copy Swap button The Copy Swap menu appears Here a copy swap operation on wipe data is described by way of example using the Copy Swap gt Wipe menu but the same general procedure applies to all of the following menus e M E Copying and swapping M E data e Key Copying and swapping key data Wipe Copying and swapping wipe data DME Wipe Copying and swapping DME wipe data Matte Copying and swapping matte data Color Copying and swapping color data e DME Copying and swapping data by DME channels For an overview of the concepts involved see Copy and Swap page 79 To use DME requires the BKDS 9470 DME Board Set Copying and swapping wipe data As an example to copy or swap wipe data use the following procedure 1 In the Copy Swap menu select HF3 Wipe The Copy Swap gt Wipe menu appears The status area shows lists for the c
161. c Menu Operations 215 jauUeg JONUOD pue snua z saldeup jaueg OJU0D pue snua z Je deuD 216 Interpreting the Menu Screen The menu screen consists of the following principal parts When buttons on the screen are lit or represented in a depressed state this indicates that the corresponding item or function is selected set on Menu title button This shows the title of the menu screen Pressing this button displays status information about the top menu Menu page number button This shows the menu screen page number Pressing this button brings up the numeric keypad window see page 218 You can enter the page number of another menu and move directly to that menu VE buttons These indicate the larger subdivisions of this menu Depending on the selected item the menu screen contents including the HF button indications change HF buttons These indicate the items within the menu Depending on the selected item the menu indications change Status area This shows the status of the settings items controlled by the selected menu Function button area This shows the functions which can be operated in the currently selected menu by means of buttons Each function button corresponds to a function which can be set in the currently Basic Menu Operations selected menu Press it to enable the function to display a parameter group and adjust the parameters with the knobs or to exec
162. ce Make the settings for the user preference buttons in the menu control block This assigns recalling frequently used menus menu shortcuts enabling disabling functions recalling utility commands and recalling shotbox registers Utility Module Assign Make the utility shotbox control block settings This assigns recalling frequently used menus menu shortcuts enabling disabling functions recalling utility commands and recalling shotbox registers External device connections Device Interface e GPI Input Set the GPI input ports and trigger type and make the action settings e GPI Output Set the GPI output ports and trigger type and make the action settings e P BUS Control Set the control mode for P BUS devices e DCU Serial Port Assign Assign the devices DDR VTR connected to a DCU and accessible from the control panel to the DEV1 to DEV12 buttons of the control panel For a DDR you can also make settings relating to sharing of file lists Operation settings Operation e Button Tally Set whether or not the system tally generation results are reflected in the panel tally e Trans Rate Display Select whether the transition rate display mode is in frames or timecode units e Effect For keyframe effects you can make the following settings See Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects Volume 2 150 Setup Recall mode Automatically turning off the EDIT ENBL button when an effect is recalled Automatic
163. channel data among DME channels to 4 Copy and Swap Video Process The term video process is applied to adjustments to the luminance and hue of the input video signal There are two types of adjustment depending on the application e Adjustment of an individual primary input signal e Image effects on a particular bus These types of adjustment may be carried out independently However since they are implemented by the same hardware if the same signal is subjected to processing twice there may be limitations on the range of effects obtained in the final result Video Process Adjustment of a Primary Input Signal For each of primary inputs 1 to 80 you can switch video process adjustments on or off and can adjust the parameters Video Gain Y Gain C Gain Hue Delay and Black Level in the Setup menu The adjustments do not however apply to the output video on the MON monitor bus For details of the settings see Signal Input Settings in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus Buses to which the adjustments apply For each of the following buses you can switch video process adjustments on or off and adjust the parameters e Following buses in the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks Key fill buses for keys 1 to 4 Background A and background B buses Utility 1 and utility 2 buses e Frame memory source 1 and frame memory source 2 buses e Aux to 48 buses These
164. ck at the stop point timecode recalled from the same register VTR disk recorder timeline For a keyframe effect controlled from the center control panel the VTR disk recorder timeline allows you to set a VTR or disk recorder action at a keyframe point on the timeline VTR disk recorder timeline actions The actions that can be used on the VTR disk recorder timeline are as follows e Start e Stop e Cue up e Variable speed For a disk recorder the maximum number of files for a single register is 8 For the action settings VTR or disk recorder timeline editing use the Device menu The data set in the Device menu are saved in a keyframe effect register When you recall this register and start execution of the keyframe effect and advance the effect to the keyframe point for which the action is set an action command is output to the external device through the 9 pin serial port assigned to the VTR or disk recorder Recalling disk recorder files Material held on a disk recorder is managed in units of files You can recall a file to play it back Accessing the file list Before playback and suchlike operations on a disk recorder it is first necessary to display a list of the disk recorder files on the DCU The file list includes the following information e File name e Date of last update External Devices Duration of recorded material To recall the file list use the Device menu Recalling a file In the recalled
165. coi aoine ieee roerei o n Eo E ea E ERE 128 Time Settings i on eoep eE EE EE rE pte STARS 130 Paths sc cseies a ives seek e a A E E 133 Effect Ex cution nren a n E E E EERS 138 Master Timelines renino nioten e a e 139 SMAPShOtS vesesisccssasesissssscdiacesevsvnses soiesedsecceseseensessscsseeossaveatescesuseavesssineosiese 140 Snapshot Ty Pes iss sve cassvsseescsscssseescstisssacesseeetsvesds yithsesechasseetasascossioses 140 Snapshot Atti Dutes ccseses cee sscsesseehesessa eoscosd ose edsasbessgesseesisoescens 141 Utility sensisse iieri iieis oorsit sas Corsi Ee E ESEE iesene Shotbox SOU Pesssuscccsessssscecss seis scesoaseseoasivnssastancensscedosnseaseasesaseaseasssaaesesacaseeesoatesasuste Panel Setup nee e tee Ses ale E E tied eon ES 149 Switcher Setup ans ne ioeie tiel wba Messi a lactis 151 DME Setup scsi e E etched liciatlitia itiaiininein duels 154 Setup Relating to DCU Input Output oe eeeeeeeee 155 Setup Relating to the Router Interface and Tally Interface 155 Simple Connection to MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel 156 Fille E A 158 MACOS secsssesssreessressresecserseserscssssessssessnsesssscsessesessesessecensesensnsensesenees 160 19 suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD Introduction This manual is the User s Guide for the DVS 9000 9000SF Production Switcher system supporting the SDTV signal format only The DVS 9000 and DVS 9000SF have different numbers of M E banks and input output signals but are
166. connectors 198 Device control block joystick 187 trackball 183 Digital multi effects 85 Direction 59 310 323 334 Disk recorder control 121 Display 181 192 DME 85 174 176 208 applying toakey 283 296 channel selection buttons 181 Index 381 xepu x pul W setup 154 special effects 97 DME channel copy 82 swap 82 DME patterns user programmable 342 DME wipe pattern 68 edge modification 334 groups 68 selection 332 DME wipe settings 332 for independent key transi tions 339 DME wipes 68 331 copy 80 81 direction 334 modifiers 333 position 335 340 snapshot 71 341 swap 80 81 Downstream key control block 205 Drop border 51 parameters 292 Duration effect 130 keyframe 130 modes 129 setting buttons 189 Dust mix 58 309 E Edge 60 fill 53 modifiers 50 EDIT ENBL button 188 Edit point specification but tons 188 Editing buttons 189 EFF LOOP button 190 Effect 127 attributes 128 dissolve 128 141 duration 130 editing 128 execution 138 Index saving recalling 128 Effect execution direction se lection buttons 190 Emboss 52 Enter button 219 221 Explosion 108 External key 75 processed key 297 External devices 118 connections 150 disk recorder control 121 GPI device control 120 P BUS device control 119 shared control functions 118 VTR control 121 F Fade to black 44 253 control block 193 transition rate 253 Fader lever 174 206 208 Files 158 operations 158 Flag 102 Flexi
167. cope Creates an image like a view into a kaleidoscope Digital Multi Effects DME 105 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suonoun4 0006 SAC_ JaldeuD You can set the number of blocks the partition reference point and angle horizontal and vertical offsets a reflection position and other parameters Lens Creates an image like a view through a lens You can set the shape and aspect ratio of the lens the angle the magnification ratio the curve ratio the size the center position and other parameters You can also choose to display only the portion of the image that is seen through the lens Circle Makes a circle with the image You can set the size of the circle and make the axis of modulation vertical Panorama Curves the upper and lower edges of the image to emphasize the sense of perspective 106 Digital Multi Effects DME You can set the horizontal and vertical curve ratio and the curve center position Page Turn Turns the image like a turning page There are four modes H amp V H V and Off You can select the turn position the radius of the turned portion the amount and angle of turning and the input video for the front and back pages Roll Rolls the image up There are four modes H amp V H V and Off You can select the turn position the radius of the turned portion the amount and angle of turning and the input video for the front and back pages fim fee EEMU He
168. corresponding to the parameter This displays the numeric keypad window allowing you to enter the desired value Basic Menu Operations 217 jaUeg JOUOD pue snua z saldeup In the description of specific setting procedures the knob adjustment is described as follows Example When wipe pattern key is Numeric keypad window selected Knob Parameter Adjust Setting values ment 1 Size Pattern 0 00 to 100 00 size 2 Soft Edge 0 00 to 100 00 softness 3 Density Key 0 00 to 100 00 density jaueg 04u09 pue snua z Jajdeyo 218 When the MENU button in the device control block is lit you can use the trackball and Z ring to control the parameters e Move the trackball on the x axis to control the parameter for knob 1 or on the y axis to control the parameter for knob 2 Moving up or to the right increases the parameter value and moving down or to the left decreases the parameter value e Use the Z ring to adjust the parameter for knob 3 Turning clockwise increases the parameter value and turning counterclockwise decreases the parameter value Going back to the previous menu To return to the last displayed menu press the previous page button Basic Menu Operations Item display Max min value indication Input value Clip 10 0 110 0 100 00 button e Enter button Item display This is the name of the parameter being set
169. couple the selection in the key delegation buttons of the independent key transition control block so that the key control block delegation selection is automatically switched in the key control block press the AUTO DELEG button turning it on Returning the key adjustment values to their defaults Holding down a key type button LUM LIN CRK CVK or KEY WIPE recalls the key default values page 55 Key modify clear When an M E delegation button is held down holding down a key delegation button together returns the key settings to the initial status settings For details of the initial status see Selecting the State After Powering On Start Up Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 298 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block Key Snapshots Using the key snapshot function you can instantaneously save all of the key settings except the key insertion state on off and key priority in dedicated registers for later recall as required For an overview of the key snapshots see page 54 Key Snapshot Operations Key snapshot operations are carried out in the independent key transition control block or downstream key control block Each keyer is provided with four dedicated key snapshot registers Key source name display key snapshot buttons Key delegation buttons Key snapshot setting buttons aro aur TRAN
170. d as a manual transition using the fader lever You can also use a combination of these two modes For an overview of the auto transitions and manual transitions see Executing a Transition page 42 Transition Indicator Function In each of the M E banks and PGM PST bank to the left of the fader lever is a transition indicator composed of 30 LEDs This indicator shows the state of the transition whether auto or manual by which LEDs are lit Lit Transition indicator For example in the illustration above it can be seen that the transition is more than half completed When the transition is completed all of the LEDs go off Executing a Transition 235 suonsuel g Ja deuD suomisuel g sajdeyo Setting the Transition Rate 236 There are two ways of setting the transition rate using the Flexi Pad control block or numeric keypad control block to enter a numeric value or using the Misc menu to access the Transition menu for the M E or PGM PST bank Frame input mode and timecode input mode For numeric input of the transition rate value there are two modes frame input mode and timecode input mode You select one of these modes using either the Flexi Pad control block page 237 or the numeric keypad control block page 238 Frame input mode The entered value is a number of frames Example Entering 123 constitutes an entry of 123 frames Timecode input mode The
171. der to the image frame You can adjust the width or thickness of the border its color and the softness of the border edges Crop This effect crops away the edges of the image You can crop the top bottom left and right sides individually or all together You can also soften the cropped edges Defocus Defocuses the whole image The degree of defocusing can be set separately for video signals and key signals You can also cancel the black level leaking that occurs at the edge of the screen when the Defocus effect is used Digital Multi Effects DME Blur Applies a rounded blurring to the whole image Beveled Edge This gives an image a beveled edge You can set the edge width and color The inner edge softness and edge boundary softness can also be set Color Multi Move Shrinks the image and lines up a number of copies vertically and horizontally You can specify the center point of the shrinking the shrinking ratio and the aspect ratio of the image screen Sepia Overlays a specified color onto the image You can adjust the sepia color that is overlaid and specify the degree of mixing between the original image and the sepia image Mono Converts the image into a monochrome image Digital Multi Effects DME 99 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suonoun4 0006 SAC_ JaldeuD 100 Posterization Coarsens the luminance gradations of the image for a painting like effect You can speci
172. djusted SHOW KEY button While this button is held down a key processed key source signal is output from the specified output port You can make the output specification independently for each of edit preview and the preview of each M E or PGM PST bank in a Setup menu Knobs Turn the knobs to adjust the parameter values Displays Each display shows the initial letters of the parameter name and the parameter value maximum three digits including a minus sign for a negative value DME channel selection buttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to delegate a DME channel to the keyer The number of valid DME channel selection buttons depends on the number of channels installed in the DME processor A maximum of three consecutively numbered DME channels among DME 1 to 4 can be assigned to one keyer A DME channel assigned to a keyer cannot be selected on another keyer However using the override function it is possible to allocate a channel already allocated to another keyer to the currently selected keyer Using the trace function it is possible to check which keyer a DME channel is allocated to ON AIR indicators These light red when the corresponding DME channels are included in the final program output 181 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jauUeg JOUOD pue snua z 13 deyo jeueg OuJU0D pue snua z Je deuD Output destination specification buttons MON monitor H
173. e corresponding to the intermediate point of the whole effect see following figure during which the image does not change Therefore it is necessary to create the effect so that the image in the intermediate part of the transition is the keyframe for the mid point of the whole effect The range of this dead zone corresponds to the central one third of the range of the transition indicator This also applies to an auto transition Change in image through transition Keyframe effect Image at point C gt lt gt appears A B C Image at point B First keyframe Last keyframe appears Mid point of effect dead zone Image at point A gt appears Transition indicator Fader lever e Create the last keyframe for each channel as follows Channel 1 since the priority is low it will not be visible on the screen so no particular restrictions apply Channel 2 create the image full size e In the lt Transition Mode gt group of the Key Frame gt DME User PGM menu select P In P Creating User Programmable DME Patterns 345 sedim JWG 9g Jeldeyo s d M IWA 9g Jeideyo 346 Creating User Programmable DME Patterns Chapter 7 Frame Memory Frame Memory Operations cccccsssscsscsssceccsssssccecssscsscssseesesseees 348 IPLePAarallonsy tates ees ease ease eee eee ee ee a ance een ee ee 348 Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu secs eeeeeeeseee
174. e page 200 Independent key transition control block simple type page 203 Control panel configuration 2 right side with simple transition modules Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jauUeg JONUOD pue snua z saldeup 167 jaueg OuJU0D pue snua z Je deuD Control Panel Example Configuration 3 With Compact Transition Modules The following illustration shows a typical modules used in the transition control configuration with compact transition block Transition control block compact type page 207 00 oogogooogooQ QOOGOGOG0 QO00OGO000 QO00000000 oo0o0000go0g000G0000000000000 00000 BGOG08G08008005000080880 5989 Control panel configuration 3 with compact transition modules 1 68 Nam
175. e You can modify a single keyframe or a range of keyframes in the effect together Delete Delete a keyframe You can delete a single keyframe or a range of keyframes in the effect together Deleting keyframes from an effect reduces the duration of the effect see page 131 After deleting a keyframe you can reinsert the keyframe with a paste operation Copy Copy a keyframe You can copy a single keyframe or a range of keyframes in the effect together Paste Paste the keyframe last copied or deleted anywhere within the effect Pause You can set a pause on a particular keyframe so that when the effect is run it pauses on this keyframe You can make this setting on any number of keyframes To restart the paused effect repeat the operation to run the effect KF Loop Execute the effect the specified number of times through the keyframes in the specified range Undo an edit operation Undo the effect of the last operation to insert modify delete or paste a keyframe Duration modes In keyframe editing there are two duration modes switch between them in the keyframe operation section See Time Settings in Chapter 13 Volume 2 Variable duration mode In this mode inserting or deleting a keyframe increases or reduces the duration Constant duration mode In this mode inserting or deleting a keyframe does not change the duration This is useful for keyframe editing of an effect with a fixed duration In the variable and
176. e 61 When turning Multi on and using replications of the same pattern Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 42 a See page 64 When turning Aspect on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern Knob 1 Aspect Parameter Adjustment Aspect ratio Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 63 When turning Angle on in the lt Rotation gt group and slanting the pattern Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 61 When turning Speed on in the lt Rotation gt group and rotating the pattern at a constant rate Knob 1 Speed Parameter Adjustment Rotation rate of pattern Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 62 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 6 To adjust color 1 set Color1 on and to adjust color 2 set Color2 on then adjust the parameters T To interchange color 1 and color 2 press the Color Invert button turning it on Setting the wipe position Positioner You can set the position independently for the main pattern and sub pattern Use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe m
177. e NAM Morphing As the transition progresses the pattern morphs from the main pattern through the mix combination to the sub pattern Wipes 57 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD Parameter settings Main pattern at 100 Start Point in the course of the transition at which the main pattern Sub pattern at 100 is at 100 End Point in the course of the transition at which the sub pattern is at 100 0 00 g 100 00 Transition 0 00 100 00 1 I I 1 h I I P P I Start Mix combination of ae le oe End value main and sub an SMON WMCA i i value i patterns already mle ey l begun pattern a o l Begins with main Ends with sub pattern at 100 pattern at 100 k 0 00 i oot 100 00 Transition ends 1 T with main and I f I oo 10 00 190 00 Mix begins after sub patterns transition starts still in mix binati i combination w 10 001 77 x x ro 110 00 e A value of 0 00 corresponds to the beginning of the transition and a value of 100 00 to the end of the transition e A negative Start value signifies that the main and sub patterns are already combined when the transition starts e An End value of 100 00 or more signifies that the main and sub patterns are still combined when the transition complete e If the Start and End values are the same the main and sub patterns are interchanged instantaneously a
178. e devices connected to a 9 pin serial port You can also select the control panel used to control each device Setup Relating to the Router Interface and Tally Interface Carry out settings relating to the interface with the routing switcher and settings relating to the tally interface You can make the following settings Router interface setup Router These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally e Matrix Size Assign the switcher matrix of each switcher processor to S Bus space and select the matrix size and positioning level source address settings and so on e External Box To obtain the signal selection status of external devices with a parallel input assign a matrix as an external selector in the S Bus space Make the matrix size assignment level source address and other settings Tally interface setup Tally Group tally settings Group Tally e Tally Group Select the group tally Gp1 to 4 or Gp5 to 8 which can be used e S Bus Tally Enable Specify S Bus tally enabled or disabled Setup 155 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 156 Wiring information input Wiring Input the information which specifies the physical wiring between switcher and routing switcher or between two routing switchers These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally Tally enable settings Tally Enable Specify the destination to be the reference for ta
179. e direction normal reverse To specify the DME wipe direction in a menu Use the following procedure 1 2 In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF4 Edge Direction The Edge Direction menu appears In the lt Direction gt group specify the DME wipe direction Normal regular direction Normal Reverse alternate between regular and reverse for each transition Reverse reverse direction to normal To specify the DME wipe direction with a button in the transition control block In the transition control block of each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks press the following direction selection buttons NORM Normal NORM REYV Normal reverse REV Reverse Modifying the DME wipe pattern edge Use the following procedure 1 2 In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF4 Edge Direction The Edge Direction menu appears Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one channel mode or two channel mode proceed as follows For a pattern in one channel mode press 1st Ch turning it on For a pattern in two channel mode from the lt Ch Select gt group select the corresponding channel You can select more than one channel at the same time In the lt Edge gt group select the edge type Border border Soft Border soft border Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 4 Set the parameters according to the selection in step 3 When border is selected Knob Parameter Adjustmen
180. e fader lever travel Moving the fader lever does not carry out a transition but when the fader lever reaches the end position the non sync state is released and it is now possible to carry out the next transition If the fader lever is moved in the direction away from the lit LEDs this carries out the next transition over the remaining part of the fader lever travel Wipe direction in bus fixed mode The direction of a wipe is also in a fixed relationship to the fader lever movement direction Transition type Wipe direction Fader lever movement Wipe Normal Upward Reverse Downward Executing a Transition Transition Preview Carrying out a transition preview To carry out a transition preview use the following procedure For an overview of the transition preview see page 44 1 In the M E or PGM PST bank transition control block press the TRANS PVW button The TRANS PVW button lights green and the switcher is now in the transition preview mode At this point the preview output is the same as the program output before the TRANS PVW button was pressed 2 Operate the fader lever or press the AUTO TRANS button or CUT button On the preview monitor you can check the effect of the transition To terminate a transition preview There are three modes for a transition preview To terminate a transition preview carry out the operation which depends on the mode and press the TRANS PVW butt
181. e following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 To make the edge soft press Soft Edge to set it on and adjust the softness Knob _ Parameter 1 Soft Adjustment Edge softness Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 For a normal edge when Soft Edge is enabled Key Drop is kept on To make separate fine adjustments to the positions of the left right top and bottom of the source edge press Fine Key to set it on and adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Key top edge position 2 00 to 2 00 2 Left Key left edge position 2 00 to 2 00 3 Right Key right edge position 2 00 to 2 00 4 Bottom Key bottom edge position 2 00 to 2 00 6 H Phase Key horizontal position Left edge position value shown 7 V Phase Key vertical position Top edge position value shown In the emboss function it is not possible to set Fine Key on e When the edge type is normal drop border or shadow enabling the Fine Key function keeps Key Drop on e When applying a border to the key edge enabling the Fine Key function halves the border width setting range Key Setting Operations Using Menus Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte When you select Matte for
182. e image like a trail You can set the effect starting position the degree of expansion the slant angle of the effect region and trail direction the degree to which the image disappears the trail type and amount of stardust and other parameters Lighting Provides the effect of light striking the image You can specify the intensity and color of the light and the lighting pattern The following lighting patterns are available Digital Multi Effects DME 109 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suonoun4 0006 SAC_ JaldeuD Plane Illumination of the entire screen Bar Bar illumination You can specify the width and angle of the bar and its softness Preset Lighting pattern suitable for nonlinear effects Trail Recursively freezes the input video at regular intervals so that a trail of afterimages is created You can make the afterimages stardust trails Of the three effects of trail motion decay and keyframe strobe only one can be on at a time When one of them is on turning another of them on automatically turns off the one that has been on Motion Decay Blurs the motion of a moving video by creating afterimages of the moving video See Note in the preceding section Trail You can make the afterimages stardust trails Keyframe Strobe Freezes the video each time the effect passes a keyframe See Note in the preceding section Trail You can make the afterimages stardust tr
183. e keyboard window Input string This is the character string being input in the keyboard window Close button This closes the keyboard window BS button This clears the character immediately before the cursor in the input string Caps Lock button This enables input of capital letters only Basic Menu Operations You can enter items to be displayed on the control panel LCD using lowercase letters but these will be converted to capitals for display MS DOS does not distinguish case in filenames and therefore you are recommended to enter filenames in capital letters Shift button This selects the characters on the shift side of the keys The shift is released when you enter a character Space button This enters a space character Clear button This clears all of the characters in the input string Del button This clears the character immediately after the cursor in the input string O Left button This moves the cursor one character to the left in the input string Right button This moves the cursor one character to the right in the input string Enter button This sets the input string as a parameter value and closes the keyboard window if the value has been entered correctly If the value has not been entered correctly the display color changes Line feed button After pressing the Shift button press this button to feed a line The input string shows Basic Men
184. e outline parameters When the OUTLINE button is lit green the parameter settings depend on the key type and whether the separate edge function is active To activate the separate edge function press Separate Edge setting it on in the Edge menu for the key e Separate edge off Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Outline width 0to 82 0 to 100 4 Density Outline density 0 to 100 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 276 is on the setting value range is 0 to 4 b When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type e Separate edge on The outline width settings can be made independently for left right top and bottom sides The separate edge function is only available when luminance key linear key or chroma key is selected as the key type Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Top edge width 0to3 2 Left Left edge width 0to 8 3 Right Right edge width 0to38 4 Bottom Bottom edge width 0to8 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 276 is on the setting value range is 0 to 4 When Outline is selected with separate edge on the MORE button lights amber Pressing the MORE button to turn it green then allows you to adjust the key fill density parameter with a knob Knob Parameter 4 Density Adjustment Outline density Setting values 0 to 100 Setting the
185. e speed of the lateral waves A value of 100 00 represents the maximum speed to the left and a value of 100 00 represents the maximum speed to the right Wipes Wipe Snapshots You can save a wipe pattern and all its associated modifiers together with the transition rate instantaneously in a dedicated register for recall when required There are 10 wipe snapshot registers on each M E bank and the PGM PST bank Use the Flexi Pad control block in the bank to save and recall wipe snapshots For details see Wipe Snapshots page 327 For simple transitions see page 255 there are eight wipe snapshot registers on each M E bank and the PGM PST bank Wipes 67 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD DME Wipes A DME wipe is a wipe transition that uses a DME effect to change from one video image to the next There are two types of DME wipe those which can be selected for a normal transition and those which can be selected for an independent key transition For independent key transitions see page 35 To carry out DME wipes requires the BKDS 9470 DME Board Set Types of DME Wipe Pattern The patterns used for a DME wipe fall into two broad classes Preset patterns predetermined fixed patterns User programmable DME patterns patterns which you can create using keyframe effects DME wipe execution mode and pattern numbers that can be used There are two DME wipe exec
186. e standard configuration There are also the following functions Detail Information Gives details of the software and firmware installed in each device Device management Maintenance e Date and time setting e Formatting a memory card e Primary settings for USB external storage device e Reloading a USB driver Setup 147 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 148 Saving and Recalling Setup Data Setup menu Setup Define Non volatile memory ROM User setup data Factory default setup data Hard disk memory card User setup data File menu File menu Load Save RAM Current setup data If in Resume mode settings data is saved Initialize In Custom mode power on or reset Setup menu All Clear Setup Concept of saving and recalling setup data Updating the switcher or control panel setup data saves the updated setup data in RAM in each device e In Resume mode see page 146 even if devices are reset or powered off the data is preserved in RAM and recalled when the power is turned back on The Resume mode cannot be used for DMEs and DCUs e In Custom mode see page 146 the user defined settings user setup data saved in non volatile memory or factory default setup data held in ROM in each device is recalled when a reset is made or the power is turned back on See Selecting the start up state Start Up
187. e the following procedure 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF4 Next Key Priority The Next Key Priority menu appears 2 For each of Priority1 Priority2 Priority3 and Priority4 select a key to determine the key priority sequence For details of the key priority sequence see the figure shown for step 2in the previous item see page 229 The keys appear in the set order on the preview monitor 3 Execute the transition The keys are rearranged in the above set order on the program monitor Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority You can check whether keys are currently output and the key priority setting using the key status display in the transition control block of the M E or PGM PST bank The display is above the next transition selection buttons KEY 1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 buttons in the PGM PST bank Display of the key output status When a key is included in the output from the M E or PGM PST bank the corresponding ON indicator lights Key priority display The key priority is indicated by numerals 1 to 4 lighting The topmost key as seen on the program monitor is priority 1 and the keys underneath are numbered 2 3 4 away from the viewer see page 229 To display the key priority for after the transition press the KEY PRIOR button in the transition control block turning it on For keys for which the priority after the transition is diff
188. e the slats of venetian blinds There are two modes Bar and Wedge You can set the number of rotations by blocks the perspective the width and position of blocks the direction the center position and other parameters ae es ee ee Sh es SS A AL E e o Nee ites EA ed ae Ef ECtSI e en a ee a Split Splits the image upper and lower left and right You can set the degree to which the image is split the split positions and other parameters J ma te eal EAN Auiti as FRE ESEESE E Effects in SS ars Split Slide Divides the image into bars which slide alternately in reverse directions Digital Multi Effects DME You can set the degree of transition the degree of randomness in the distance moved by each block the degree of sliding block width block angle and other parameters Mirror Partitions the image vertically and horizontally creating an image like a reflection in a mirror You can choose to reflect in the directions left to right right to left bottom to top top to bottom or any combination of directions You can also set the position of the border between original and reflections Multi Mirror Divides the image into originals and reflections lining them up vertically and horizontally You can set the width of the original the center position of the original the offset of the image with fixed mirrors the direction of the mirrors and other parameters Kaleidos
189. e transition types have been selected Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation Super Mix Settings To make the super mix settings use the following procedure For an overview of the super mix see page 40 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF1 Transition The Transition menu appears 2 Select Super Mix in the lt Transition Type gt group 3 Turn the knobs to adjust the output levels Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 A Gain Background A output level 0 00 to 100 00 2 3 B Gain Background B output level 0 00 to 100 00 2 a Default 100 00 Super Mix Settings 233 suonsuel g Ja deuD suomisuel g sa deyp Color Matte Settings To set the color matte of a preset color mix use the following procedure For an overview of the preset color mix see page 40 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF1 Transition The Transition menu appears 2 Select Preset Color Mix in the lt Transition Type gt group 3 Turn the knobs to adjust the color matte parameters Knob _ Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 3 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 4 Hue Hue 0 00 to 359 99 234 Color Matte Settings Executing a Transition There are two ways of executing a transition as an auto transition by a button operation an
190. ecalled At this point the numeric display shows the pattern number or register name Canceling the recall of a wipe snapshot To cancel the recall of a wipe snapshot press the UNDO button Wipe Snapshots s d M gsejdeyo 329 s d M g 4ajdeyo Deleting a Wipe Snapshot 330 Deleting a wipe snapshot When the WIPE button is lit in the Flexi Pad control block hold down the STORE STATS button and press the memory recall button for the register in which you want to delete the wipe snapshot The indication of the memory recall button reverts from the wipe pattern or register name to the register number In a simple type Flexi Pad control block it is not possible to delete a wipe snapshot Wipe Snapshots Chapter 6 DME Wipes Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings sscsscssssssessesesseees 332 DME Wipe Settings Ment r est cares ern nee 332 PMP Mpe Eae S E O eaten eee 332 Setting DME Wipe MaS 333 DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions 339 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings 339 Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers 340 DIMIEBWiipe SmapshoOtsiicccssscsceccetscsssscsrerecereccerscierscastetenscacstesarscetsrenttcess 341 Creating User Programmable DME Patterns c sssscscseseseeee 342 User Programmable DME Transition Mode ce eeeeeeeeeeee 342 s d M JWG 9 Jeldeyo
191. ection menu appears In the lt Edge gt group select the edge type Border border Soft soft edge Soft Border soft border For an overview of the edge types see Edge page 60 Set the parameters according to the selection in step 2 When border is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Border width 0 00 to 100 00 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 311 s d M gsejdeyo s d M g Jaydeyo 312 When soft edge is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment 1 Soft Edge softness Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 When soft border is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Border width 0 00 to 100 00 2 Inner Soft Border inner softness 0 00 to 100 00 3 Outer Soft Border outer softness 0 00 to 100 00 When you selected border or soft border select the edge fill signal in the lt Edge Fill gt group Utility 2 Bus signal selected on the utility 2 bus Matte signal from the dedicated color matte generator Depending on the operation in step 4 carry out the following operation When Utility 2 Bus is selected Hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and select the signal on the background B bus While the UTIL button is held down the background B bus changes to the utility 2 bus To enable the UTIL button its operation mode must be set to Hold beforehand
192. ectories Directory operations 7171 7 306 Functions relating to macros Classification Functions supported Menu No See page Vol 1 Vol 2 Macros Macro function 5421 160 309 Principal Changes From Version 1 30 The principal changes from version 1 30 are as follows Classification Functions changed See page Vol 1 Vol 2 DEST button in Before While this button is held down the names of buses 195 the auxiliary bus control block change allocated to the delegation buttons appear in the selection source name displays After Press this button turning it on to display the names of change buses allocated to the delegation buttons in the selection source name displays Functions Not Supported in Version 2 00 The following functions are not supported in the DVS 9000 9000SF system version 2 00 Classification Functions not supported Menu No See page Vol 1 Vol 2 DME wipe Additional patterns 1161 1162 69 338 Frame in out No 1201 to 1204 340 e Picture in picture No 1251 2651 2652 Size and crop adjustment 1165 337 Individual modifier adjustment for two channel 1164 1165 333 mode patterns User programmable DME transition mode 6114 342 132 setting DME special effects Beveled edge 4112 99 27 Defocusing of video signal only 4121 98 29 Stardust trail afterimages 4152 110 69 Motion decay 4153 110 70 Keyframe strobe 4154 110 7
193. eeeeeeeeene 348 Selecting an Input Image 0 eee cee cess ceeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeaes 350 Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory 0 eee eeeeseeeee 351 Capturing an Image Freeze eee ceeesecsseeseeeseceseeseceeeeseeeeeeseees 352 Recalling mafe S unun nnee al ai nee 354 Image P oc ssingini neissen nseries roeie ise rio orror oieee riS 356 Image Output enna ni ee a aie 360 Image Data Manageme nt cccscsscsssssssscsssssscssscsscscscssecsseesecssessecsserees 362 Deleting Files ener eerie EsTe ESE S 362 Renaming Files seinistir ssri et sree rosee E E E EE E Es 363 Restoring Fulesssccccscessicise d ssektacesessetesny aiatiss gas E r seetiba SEE EN 364 Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds Color Background Setting Operations scscscccssccsssssscsssssscsseesseees 368 Color Background Settings Menu oie cseeseceeeseceeceseeereeseees 368 Basic Color Background Setting Operations 0 eee eee eeeeeee 368 Chapter 9 Copy and Swap Basic Copy and Swap Operations cscssccscsscsssssssssessssesssesseeseeeseeee 372 Copy and Swap Menu Operations eee eee cseeseeceeeeseceeeeseeseeeseees 372 Copy by Button Operation 0 eee eee eceseeeeeceeeeceeeaeceeensenseenseees 373 Table of Contents Chapter 10 Misc Menu Etc Misc Menu Operations ccccccscsssscsssssccsccssssscsssssscssssssessscssesseessersesees 376 AUX Menu Operations seseesesoeseoseseososossesossesseseesesoesseoossesossesossess
194. eeeeeees 348 Selechns anvinputlnmay caer te ceeee eres wee ee eee ee 350 Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory cesses 351 Capiunimnpeanylimascr ETCeZe pee meer ese ese eee eee ares 352 Recallin selma ges ue sett eee sg ane Cetra sr eee Srey 354 mag erRrOCeSSin Creme ee teers eee y pen Oen Mee E NA 356 mag er OUtpuULee eee See ecg a E 360 Image Data Management ccsccssssscscsssscscsssccssseccseccecssecseccsersecees 362 Delene PESA e ea ae aE E E EERE ESSEER 362 Renaming FESE e eese e RERE EE A EERE E SAES ES 363 Restonno Files aee eee se eas EE E EE ERE E E EEES 364 oway ewes 7 Jaydeyo 348 Frame Memory Operations For an overview of frame memory concepts see Frame Memory page 73 Preparations Allocating the frame memory outputs FM1 to FM8 to cross point buttons To output a frame memory image to a monitor for example the output signal from the frame memory FM1 to FM8 must be allocated to a cross point button Carry out this allocation in the Setup menu Accessing the Frame Memory menu Most frame memory operations are carried out using the Frame Memory menu To access the Frame Memory menu use either of the following procedures e In the menu control block select the top menu selection button FRAME MEM e Press the cross point button to which the frame memory output is allocated twice in rapid succession Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu The menu screen con
195. eeeeeoeeeeeese ooogooooooooooogogo 1 2 3 4 aaan first button numbers 32 33 34 35 second button numbers Shift button On each M E bank and the PGM PST bank each cross point button and reentry button has two button numbers and you use the shift button to switch between these numbers In the case of a 32 button layout the button numbers are as follows Cross point control block button numbers Button Number when the shift Number when the shift button is not pressed button is pressed From the left end to the 31st 1 to 31 32 to 62 button Reentry buttons 121 to 123 125 to 127 Switching button numbers The rightmost 32nd button functions as a shift button The shift button function can be disabled in a Setup menu When selecting the signals of button numbers to 31 press the cross point button for the desired signal To select button numbers 32 to 62 hold down the shift button and press the cross point button for the desired signal Signal Selection 29 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 30 Button numbers in the auxiliary bus control block 2ND button Istrow eee 29 30 31 121 124 PEJ 1 UOO O 000 mE ime F ap seooo00 O oopge OOM GB
196. egation Buttons Settings Aux Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 2 In the auxiliary bus control block cross point buttons select the signal to be used for the input image To select a signal with a key or DME effect applied on the frame memory source bus In the key control block press the FM FEED button turning it on This automatically assigns the key fill and key source signals being keyed by the currently selected keyer to frame memory source buses and 2 When DME is selected on the keyer the key fill and key source signals to which a DME effect is applied are assigned Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory Selecting outputs FM and target frame memory The signals of frame memory source buses 1 and 2 are used assigned to one of the pairs of FM1 amp 2 FM3 amp 4 FM5 amp 6 and FM7 amp 8 The following description applies to the case of assignment to FM1 amp 2 but the procedures are similar for the other cases 1 In the Frame Memory menu press one of VF1 to VF3 and select the required HF menu The current status of frame memory appears in the status area See page 349 2 If required press Pair to select the FM operation mode pair mode On Operate on FM1 3 5 7 and FM2 4 6 8 as a pair Off Operate on FM1 3 5 7 and FM2 4 6 8 individually For more details see Pair mode page 73 3 In the lt Select gt group press FM1 amp FM2 to select it This assigns the signals t
197. egisters to 4 for the selected keyer to save or recall a key snapshot Key snapshot setting buttons K SS Key snapshot This enables key snapshot mode K SS STORE key snapshot store To save a key snapshot hold down this button and press the key source name display key snapshot button corresponding to the register you want to save K MOD ENBL key modifier enable To recall key adjustment values and key modifier settings when recalling a key snapshot press this button turning it on K TR ENBL Key transition enable To recall independent key transition settings when recalling a key snapshot press this button turning it on Flexi Pad Control Block Standard Type The Flexi Pad control block is used for saving and recalling wipe snapshots DME wipe snapshots and snapshots for recalling effects and shotbox content and for entering the transition rate Mode selection buttons B XPT HOLD status display QO Numeric display UNDO button XPT HOLD ABUW1234 Memory recall section Bank selection buttons Mode selection buttons WIPE To save or recall a wipe snapshot or recall the pattern number of a wipe pattern use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section DME To save or recall a DME wipe snapshot or recall the pattern
198. eline in Chapter 13 Volume 2 Keyframes 139 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 140 Snapshots The term snapshot refers to a function whereby the various settings required to apply a particular effect to an image are saved in memory as a set of data for recall as required to recover the original state You can carry out snapshot operations using the numeric keypad control block the Flexi Pad control block in each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks and the Snapshot menu For details of snapshot operations see Chapter 14 Snapshots Volume 2 Snapshot Types Snapshots Snapshots are divided as follows Snapshots applying to a particular region functional block of the switcher or DME The term snapshot alone usually refers to this type of snapshot Master snapshot This applies to the selected regions and the register numbers saved in the regions A master snapshot can be saved and recalled using the numeric keypad control block Snapshots applying only to particular functions This type of snapshot includes the following Key snapshot This includes the key on off state and all key settings other than key priority for each keyer See Key Snapshots page 54 Wipe snapshot This includes the wipe settings of each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks See Wipe Snapshots page 67 DME wipe snapshot This includes the DME wipe set
199. embossing parameters When the EMBOS button is lit green adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter 1 Width Setting values Oto 4 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 293 skey p 13 dey9 shay vp sa deyo Knob Parameter Setting values 2 Position 359 to 0 4 Density 0 to 100 Selecting a normal edge When all five edge type selection buttons are off a normal edge is selected If one of the buttons is lit press it turning it off Softening the edge Press the SOFT EDGE button turning it on The button lights green and you can now adjust the softness with the knob Knob 1 Parameter Soft Adjustment Edge softness Setting values 0 to 100 e For anormal edge when SOFT EDGE is enabled Key Drop mode turns on e When a luminance key or linear key is selected as the key type and clean mode is enabled enabling SOFT EDGE ends the clean mode Applying the zabton effects When the ZABTN button is lit green adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 to 100 2 Soft Pattern edge softness 0 to 100 Press the MORE button lit amber changing it to green then adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 to 100 2 Saturation Saturation 0 to 100 3 Hue Hue 359 to
200. en the function is enabled Accessing a Menu To display for example the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu use any of the following operations e Press the top menu selection button M E 1 then press the VFI Key1 button and the HF1 Type button in that order e Press the menu page number button in the upper left corner of the menu screen to display the numeric keypad window then enter the page number of the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu which is 1111 and press the Enter button For details of the menu page numbers see the appendix Menu Tree Volume 2 The M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu appears in the menu display as follows Menu page number button Menu title button Edge Main Mask Mode 8H Drop Source Sub Mask Video Proc CG1 Auto Select On Status area Function button area Parameter group button Keyframe status Free KF 0 KF HO 0 00 00 Transition On Transition Off 4 Rate 1 00 Rate 1 00 Proc Key Priority DME1 4 ree DME2 2 KEY2 DME3 KEY Y Gain Linear Chroma Key Invert Key Positon DME Wipe Key Fill Matte Main Mask VF buttons Key Source Sub Mask HF buttons Key Wipe Pattern Pattern Clip Key Me Priority C Gain Auto Select Density Processed Transition Video Process parameter buttons Previous page button M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu Basi
201. ency of the ripples their direction and speed their center point and other Digital Multi Effects DME parameters In Shape mode you can select ripple shapes other than circles stars etc Rings Partitions the image into rings that rotate while moving in the same direction You can set the degree of transition the degree of randomness in the distance moved by each block the amount of movement the width of the partitions the degree of randomness in partition width the center point the starting angle and other parameters Broken Glass Partitions the image like broken glass with shards flying outward You can set the degree of transition the degree of randomness in the distance moved by each block the amount of movement the width of the partitions the degree of randomness in partition width the center point the starting angle and other parameters You can also fix the direction in which shards scatter Flying Bar Divides the image into bars which peel off in two blocks as they move Digital Multi Effects DME 103 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suonoun4 0006 SAC_ JaldeuD You can set the degree of transition the degree of randomness in the distance moved by each block the direction of movement the width of the partitions the degree of randomness in partition width the partition angle and other parameters Blind Divides the image into bars or wedges with blocks rotating lik
202. enu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears 2 In the lt Position gt group press Position turning it on and set the pattern position Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 2 2 Position V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 2 a See page 61 To return the pattern position to the center of the screen In the lt Position gt group press Center To move the pattern from its current position to the center through the course of a transition In the lt Position gt group press Auto Center turning it on To set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick You can also set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick in the device control block Use the following procedure 1 In the device control block press the M E1 M E2 M E3 or P P button turning it on The buttons in the device control block are assigned to the wipe position setting as follows Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 0 00 to 359 99 s d M g sejdeyo 315 s d M g Jaydeyo 316 Table 1 Buttons and assigned settings Button name Setting MAIN Wipe position for common transition main pattern SUB Wipe position for common transition sub pattern Table 2 Butto
203. er PGM menu Creating User Programmable DME Patterns The following transition modes are available Channel One channel mode Transition mode Single transition mode Effect group Slide Squeeze Split Door Page turn Page roll Dual transition mode Flip tumble Frame in out Frame in out Picture in picture Picture in picture Two channel mode Dual transition mode Slide Squeeze Picture in picture Picture in picture Notes on creating keyframe effects When creating a keyframe effect to be used as a user programmable DME pattern note the following depending on the transition mode used Notes on single transition mode one channel mode Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen Create the last keyframe to be a full size image In the lt Transition Mode gt group of the Key Frame gt DME User PGM menu select Single Notes on dual transition mode one channel mode Create the first keyframe to be a full size image In the DME gt Input Output gt Video Key menu press Separate Side turning it on Then in the lt Back gt group of the same menu press H Invert or V Invert turning it on depending on the direction in which you want to rotate the image during the transition Create the last keyframe so that the image is reversed and t
204. eration page 229 Chroma Key Composition Composing an image by chroma keying There are two types of composition for chroma keying normal mix and additive mix To carry out chroma key composition use the following procedure For an overview of the chroma key composition see page 47 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF1 Type 2 Select Chroma in the lt Key Type gt group It becomes possible to adjust the key density see page 264 3 Select Chroma Adjust The Chroma Adjust menu appears 4 Carry out auto chroma key adjustments Also carry out manual adjustments if necessary to obtain an optimum chroma key image For the adjustment procedures see page 266 5 In the lt Mix Mode gt group select Normal Mix or Additive Mix depending on the desired type of chroma key composition Key Setting Operations Using Menus 265 skey py saydeyo shay vp sa deyo 266 When using an additive mix for chroma keying the typically blue background parts of the foreground video must be converted to black For this use the color cancel function see page 267 Using the plane function In an additive mix since no key is applied to the foreground any variations in the typically blue background may appear in the composite image To avoid this a particular luminance level can be set for the blue background and regions of lower luminance forcibly cut Use the following procedure 1 In the
205. erent from the current priority the Key Priority Setting corresponding numerals to 4 flash For a key with the same priority the indication remains on Example key status display given when the KEY PRIOR button is pressed e Current key priority 1 2 3 4 e Key priority after the transition 3 2 1 4 e Indicators 1 3 flashing 2 1 flashing 3 4 Lit Lit Lit BKBD KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 I Example key status display showing the key priority after the transition Key Priority Setting 231 suonsuel Ja deuD suomisuel g sajdeyp Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation 232 You can also select the required transition type by a menu operation Use the following procedure 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF1 Transition The Transition menu appears 2 Select the required transition type in the lt Transition Type gt group The parameter settings can now be adjusted with the knobs according to the selected transition type For details see the following e Super Mix Settings page 233 e Color Matte Settings page 234 e Setting the Transition Rate page 236 When multi program mode is selected in the Setup menu see Settings for Switcher Configuration Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 there may be cases in which two or mor
206. es Trans Transition path for each M E and P P bank User1 to User8 menus The items that can be adjusted depend on the settings in the Setup menu For details see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Keyframes 133 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD Item Paths that can be set User1 All to User8 All Overall path settings for the following items for each User are made simultaneously FM All Overall path settings for frame memory items are made simultaneously FM Src Overall path settings for frame memory source FM Src All items are made simultaneously FM Src1 Path for frame memory source 1 and video process FM Src2 Path for frame memory source 2 and video process FM Proc Overall path settings relating to the signal wea oe ae simultaneously FM Proc1 Path for frame memory signal processing 1 FM Proc2 Path for frame memory signal processing 2 FM Still Store Overall path settings for frame memory freeze FM Still Store All image output are made simultaneously FM Still Store 1 to 8 Paths for frame memory freeze image outputs 1to8 Aux Overall path settings for Aux buses are made Aux All simultaneously Aux 1 to 48 Paths for Aux 1 to 48 Mon Overall path settings for monitor buses are Mon All made simultaneously Mon 1 to 8 Paths for monitor buses 1 to 8 Color Bkgd Overall path
207. es and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Cross Point Control Block In the cross point control block you can select the signals to be used in this M E bank or PGM PST bank Key 2 row Key 1 row D Cross point buttons Reentry buttons ME bank display amp Key bus selection buttons ae aL Fae ES Background B row Background A row Source name displays O SHIFT button Macro buttons UTIL button XPT HOLD buttons Reentry buttons Cross point buttons These buttons select the signals used for video creation on this M E bank or PGM PST bank Each row of buttons corresponds to one or more signal buses within the switcher Key 1 row The buttons in this row select the key 1 or key 3 signals to be inserted into the video on this M E bank or PGM PST bank To select the key fill signal check that the right hand KEY3 button in the M E bank or the DSK3 button in 169 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jouUeg JONUOD pue snua z 13 deyo jeueg OuJU0D pue snua z Je deuD 170 the PGM PST bank is off then press the button assigned to the desired signal To select the key 3 fill signal press the KEY3 button turning it on While the UTIL button on the right hand side is held down these buttons are assigned to the DME external video bus allow
208. esoesesoesesss 378 AUX Bus Setting Sasien eese eeccecneerevcebte stesipoveestdevneveea bes 378 Video Process SettingsS sessesessesossosoosesoosecsosocsossossesossosossecsosoesosoesososssesosse 379 IET C ERTA ESTA E A A T TT 381 Table of Contents 1 5 16 Table of Contents Chapter 1 DVS 9000 Functions MTL OCUGUON E 20 Features of the DVS 9000 Production Switcher System 0 22 WIC EOIREOCESSIN GIN OWccccscconccsccsscosssescsaceceoccsscaestascscseasescsescescssosssscs ceases 24 Signal SelectiOmiccscccscccccesccsscasecescseccececcsececrssssscnssccssncosctensescosnscsecessaseses 25 Basics OE SEI SCleCtlomnas cocci eee 26 BUSISClECHON Reece ere ee 26 Signal Assignment and Selection 0 0 0 0 eeececceeeeseeeseeneeeseeeeeaees 28 SionaliNamesDisplayeeerces sees ee cope eres ee ees meee ee O 31 UNE E A E T E T E 32 SEAKAN INESE N e SOIO aeanoea oore AEE E AOO 32 CEDC Eni IK e SO NS oaro E E 35 Transito Pype Sr eee a e E E EE E 39 EEXCCULIN Geabl Tran StlOMaseessees a T E E T 42 CE E O E A A T O E T E 46 Keyi ypes me E E E E E E EE 46 KOM oes E 50 Ke MEMON e e E A E A A S 54 I EET A a E N N hoe ee tere en mere N 54 BR E e E R A a T nee 54 Kee yee hain E a A ee eae gn eens 55 KeeysModitys leases rere tsar eererce nents ree eee ee a 55 LV DOS ssscrsccsssasctacseesussceoscccenacecceccuncscotacestoccrscccnsrectssecasesttsasescesseonccrecsacecsess 56 Py pesoleWi pec Patlernine o E esters tants eae ere eee 56 RatterniMaxc
209. etion in the lt Off Transition Type gt group Turn the knob to set the transition rate Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Rate Transition rate 0 to 999 frame count Independent Key Transitions 251 suonsued g Ja deuD suomisuel g sa deyp Independent key transition rate display To check the set independent key transition rate press the key source name display key snapshot button above the corresponding delegation button when the K SS button is off 252 Independent Key Transitions Fade to Black Fade to Black Operation FTB button Fade to black control block Carrying out a fade to black To carry out a fade to black press the FTB button in the fade to black control block The fade to black is carried out with the transition rate set for the program output of the PGM PST bank During the transition the FTB button lights amber When the transition completes the video is completely black the button lit color changes to red For an overview of the fade to black see page 44 Setting the Fade to Black Transition Rate To set the fade to black transition rate use the following procedure 1 In the PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF1 Transition The Transition menu appears Fade to Black 253 suonsuel Ja deuD suomisuel g sa deyp 254 2 Select FTB 3 Turn the knob to se
210. etup 149 Panorama 106 Parameter group button 216 Paths 133 DME 134 switcher 133 types 137 Pattern key 75 Pattern limit 44 239 buttons 175 201 setting by a menu opera tion 240 setting with the fader lever 240 transition 241 Pattern mix 57 307 types 57 Pattern replication 63 Pause events 161 P BUS devices 118 control 119 Perspective 94 Plane function 48 Positioner 61 315 323 335 340 Positive NAM 57 Posterization 100 Preset color mix 40 Preview 44 247 selection buttons 193 Previous page button 216 PRIOR SET button 175 209 PST COLOR MIX 174 208 R Reentry buttons 26 170 Reference region 124 Regions 124 selection buttons 191 Registers 125 Related manuals 21 Replication 326 Resume mode 146 Right button 221 Rings 103 Ripple 102 Roll 107 Rotation 61 91 316 325 Router interface setup 155 RTR button 196 S Screen saver 151 Second 2ND button 195 Selected bus display 195 source name displays 195 SEMI LINK 59 Separate sides 111 Sepia 99 Setup 145 DCU input output 155 overview 145 panel 149 router interface 155 switcher 151 system 145 Setup data saving recalling 148 Shadow 51 116 parameters 292 SHIFT button 171 Shift button 220 Shotbox 144 SHOW KEY button 181 Show key function 298 Signal assignment to buttons 28 name display 31 selection 25 Simple transition 255 Skew 95 Snapshot 140 attributes 141 registers 126 Soft edge 52 323 Softening edge 294 wipe pattern edge 323 Sola
211. eturn to the state immediately before the freeze press Undo in the lt Freeze gt group e All freeze images written to temporary memory are lost when the system is powered off If you change the frame memory to use as in step 2 before saving the freeze images written to temporary memory all the freeze images in Frame Memory Operations temporary memory are lost unless the auto store function has been enabled in setup With the auto store function enabled the freeze images written to temporary memory are saved automatically when the frame memory selection is changed Saving a freeze image To save a captured freeze image in a file use the following procedure in the Edit gt Freeze menu 1 Press Store The keyboard window see page 220 appears The default file name imaget where is a three digit number is input 2 In the keyboard window enter the file name maximum 8 characters 3 In the keyboard window press the Enter button This saves the freeze image as a file in memory When the system is powered off the file saved in memory is erased but you can restore it in the Frame Memory menu See Restoring Files page 364 Setting video processing To set video processing for the signal selected on a frame memory source bus use the following procedure in the Edit gt Freeze menu 1 In the lt Video Process gt group press Video Process turning it on 2 Use the knobs to adjust the fo
212. ew video is mixed while increasing progressively to 100 then the current video is progressively reduced from 100 to zero in the second half with the new video maintained at 100 output Note that you can set the output levels of the current and new video signals at the mid point of the transition in the range 0 to 100 See Super Mix Settings page 233 This transition type is not available for an independent key transition Preset color mix Transitions This is a two stage dissolve comprising two transitions the first a dissolve to a color matte and the second from the color matte to the new video In the first transition the current video is replaced by the color matte in a mix dissolve then in the second transition the color matte is replaced by the new video also in a mix dissolve You can specify the color matte by luminance saturation and hue values See Color Matte Settings page 234 e This transition type is not available for an independent key transition e In the bus fixed mode a preset color mix cannot be used One stroke mode and one time mode e You can make a setting such that a preset color mix is carried out in a single transition This is called one stroke mode e You can also make a setting such that when a preset color mix is completed the next transition switches to the previous transition type automatically This is called one time mode When only the background is chan
213. ey fill bus as key fill and a signal separate from the signal assigned in a pair with key fill for key source press this button turning it on To select the signal on the key source bus hold down this button and press a button in the key 1 or key 2 row in the cross point control block To use the signal selected on the key fill bus as key source self keying press the AUTO SEL button and SPLIT button at the same time so that both are off MATTE FILL To use a color matte from the internal generator as key fill press this button turning it on You can adjust the color matte using the knobs When this button is off the signal selected on the key fill bus is used as key fill Key modifier buttons To add an edge modifier to the key press one of these buttons turning it on Depending on the edge type selected parameters appear in the displays and you can set the values with the knobs KEY DROP When drop border or shadow is selected turning this button on lowers the key fill and key source position by four or eight scan lines as set in the key menu To select 4H or 8H use the Key menu When the selected edge type is normal and soft edge is selected or when border outline or emboss is selected this button lights automatically BDR border Apply a border of a uniform thickness to the whole key DROP BDR drop border Apply a border to two sides of the key for example below and to the rig
214. ey source name display key snapshot button for the register you want to save UNDO key snapshot recall undo This undoes the last key snapshot recall Key source name display key snapshot buttons These display the selected source name for each corresponding keyer In snapshot mode they correspond to registers 1 to 4 of the selected keyer and pressing the button saves or recalls a key snapshot Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Transition Control Block Compact Type The compact version of the transition control block shown below has fewer buttons than the standard type Independent key transition operations can also be controlled with the compact transition control block PRIOR SET button Next transition selection buttons Key status display Transition type selection buttons Independent key transition execution section ON ON ON ON 1234123412341234 KEY3 SUPER MIX KEYI KEY2 NORM TRANS rom IREV P Oo ano HAE a TRANS PVW button Transition execution section Wipe direction selection buttons Next transition selection buttons KEY 1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 in the Press these buttons turning them on to determine what the next transition will apply to BKGD Next transition changes the background PGM PST bank Press this button turning it
215. for inserting or deleting a key you can set both rates independently For example with the system in the state with the key not inserted the transition rate setting applies to key insertion Setting the independent key transition rate in the Flexi Pad control block Use the following procedure In the PGM PST bank or when using a simple type transition control block you cannot use the Flexi Pad control block to set the transition rate 1 In the Flexi Pad control block of the M E bank hold down the TRANS RATE button and in the independent key transition control block press the delegation button KEY 1 to KEY4 for the key for which you want to set the transition rate The memory recall section display is now ready to accept the entered independent key transition rate 2 Enter the desired transition rate with the numeric keypad e Enter a value of up to three digits e To cancel the entry press any of the six buttons in the leftmost column WIPE DME or the TRANS RATE button For details of frame input mode and timecode input mode see page 236 3 Press the ENTR button Setting the independent key transition rate in the numeric keypad control block Use the following procedure You cannot use the numeric keypad control block to set the transition rate for a simple transition 250 Independent Key Transitions In the numeric keypad control block hold down the TRANS RATE button and in the independent ke
216. fy the degree of luminance coarsening Solarization Like the Posterization effect creates a painting like effect but does so by coarsening the chroma gradations of the image You can specify the degree of chroma coarsening Nega Reverses the luminance and or chroma of the image Digital Multi Effects Contrast Changes the contrast of the luminance and or chroma of the image Mosaic Divides the image into small tiles so that it looks like a mosaic You can specify the size and aspect ratio of the tiles Digital Multi Effects Freeze Freezes the input video The following types are available Digital Multi Effects DME Hard Freeze Freezes the input video at an arbitrary timing Time Strobe Freezes the input video at specified intervals for a specified length Film Slows the apparent frame rate for an effect like film You can specify the ratio of advancement For Hard Freeze and Time Strobe you can select the first field or the frame as the freeze timing Nonlinear Effects You can add a variety of effects including effects that change the shape of the image as a whole The following nonlinear effects are available For more information about settings and operations with nonlinear effects see Nonlinear Effect Settings in Chapter 11 Volume 2 It is not possible to apply two or more nonlinear effects at the same time Turning any nonlinear effect on automatically turns all other
217. g 10 09 g sajdeyo 370 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 42 a See page 64 When turning Aspect on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern Knob 1 Parameter Aspect Adjustment Aspect ratio Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 63 When turning Angle on in the lt Rotation gt group and slanting the pattern Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 61 e When turning Speed on in the lt Rotation gt group and rotating the pattern at a constant rate Knob 1 Parameter Speed Adjustment Rotation rate of pattern Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 62 e When selecting H horizontal or V vertical in the lt Modulation gt group and applying waviness to the pattern The modulation is always a sine wave Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Amplitude Amplitude of modulation 0 00 to 100 00 Frequency Frequency of modulation 0 00 to 100 00 Speed Speed of waves 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 65 5 To interchange color 1 and color 2 press the Color Invert button turning it on Color Background Setting Operations Chapter 9 Copy and Swap Basi
218. ged a l ee r A Current video Color matte New video Preset color mix changing background only When a key is inserted Key fades out When a key is selected as the next transition p i When no key is selected Key fades in Preset color mix transition including key By means of a Setup menu setting it is possible to preserve the key state while carrying out the color matte mix When with a key inserted a key is selected in the next transition Key state preserved Key gradually VIDEO removed Preset color mix when set to preserve key state A wipe replaces the current video by the new video according to a predetermined pattern This transition type can also be selected for an independent key transition For details see Wipes page 56 and Chapter 5 Wipes page 303 Transitions 41 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 42 DME wipe Cut Using a DME effect it is possible to obtain a transition to a new image from the current image as in a wipe You can also use this transition type as an independent key transition For details see DME Wipes page 68 and Chapter 6 DME Wipes page 331 To carry out DME wipes requires the BKDS 9470 DME Board Set A cut switches instantaneously from the current video to the new video When the next transition is a key transition the
219. gs for DME global effect items are made simultaneously Combine Path relating to combiner Shadow Path relating to shadow Brick Path relating to brick Types of path Path types for Curve There are five types as follows OFF Executing the effect causes no change Step There is no interpolation between keyframes so that the effect parameters are updated each time a keyframe is passed Linear Linear interpolation between keyframes resulting in constant speed movement S Curve The rate of change accelerates and decelerates before and after a keyframe so that the rate of change is maximum midway between two keyframes Spline The effect follows a smooth curved path from each keyframe to the next Keyframes 137 suonjoun 4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 138 Path types for Hue There are four types as follows CW The hue changes in a clockwise direction as seen on a Vectorscope CCW The hue changes in a counterclockwise direction as seen on a Vectorscope Short The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise directions is shorter Long The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise directions is longer Path types for Xpt There are two types as follows Xpt Hold off When replaying a keyframe change the inputs to the settings saved in memory Xpt Hold on When replaying a keyframe do not change the inputs
220. gs in the Color Bkgd menu This section describes the settings menu for color background 1 as an example For an overview of the color background see page 78 Color Background Settings Menu Accessing the Color Bkgd1 menu Use either of the following operations e In the menu control block select the top menu selection button COLOR BKGD and press VF1 Color Bkgd1 e Press a cross point button assigned to color background 1 twice in rapid succession The above operation displays the Color Bkgd1 menu Basic Color Background Setting Operations Making a single color matte Flat Color If you are not using the color mix function to combine two colors use the following procedure 1 In the lt Matte gt group of the Color Bkgd 1 menu press Flat Color turning it on You can now adjust color 1 2 Set the following parameters Knob _ Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 Making a color combination color mix To combine color 1 and color 2 use the following procedure 368 Color Background Setting Operations 1 In the lt Matte gt group of the Color Bkgd1 menu press Mix Color turning it on 2 Set the following parameters as required Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 Soft Degree of softening
221. h Select gt group select the corresponding channel You can select more than one channel at the same time Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 337 sedim AWG 9g Jeldeyo s d M JWG 9g Jeldeyo 338 3 In the lt Crop Mode gt group press Crop turning it on 4 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Crop the top of the image 100 00 to 100 00 2 Left Crop the left of the image 100 00 to 100 00 3 Right Crop the right of the image 100 00 to 100 00 4 Bottom Crop the bottom of the image 100 00 to 100 00 Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same time The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest numbered channel When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings this changes the settings on the other channels by the same amount In 16 9 mode to crop to 4 3 aspect ratio In the lt Crop Mode gt group press 4 3 turning it on Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions You carry out independent key transition DME wipe setting operations using the DME Wipe Adjust menu for each keyer For an overview of independent key transitions see page 35 This section describes the independent key transition DME wipe settings taking the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition gt DME Wipe Adjust menu as an example Basic Procedure for Independent Key
222. h3 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Li Combiner Digital Multi Effects DME 113 suojoun 4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 114 Combination of Ch1 and Ch2 combination of Ch3 and Ch4 Chi 1 gt Combiner Ch1 Ene Ch2 2 gt 1 Ch3 3 Combiner Ch4 4 gt 2 Mixing Ch1 and Ch2 Chi 1 gt Chi Mix4 gt Ch2 2 If the Mix1 setting is 70 the proportion of the channels in the mixed portion in the illustration above is as shown in the following table Combination Indication in figure Chi Ch2 Ch1 and Ch2 30 70 Mixing Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 Mix1 ch2 2 gt ch3 3 Ch3 Mix2 Digital Multi Effects DME If the Mix setting is 70 and the Mix2 setting is 40 the proportions of the channels in the mixed portions in the illustration above are as shown in the following table Combination Indication in figure Chi Ch2 Ch3 Ch1 and Ch2 m 30 70 Ch2 and Ch3 Oo o 60 40 Ch1 and Ch3 C 30 70 Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 p 30 42 28 Pairwise mixing of Ch1 and Ch2 and Ch3 and Ch4 chi 1 ch2 2 ch3 3 T Mix2 Ch4 4 gt Mix1 gt
223. hannel The later selection is valid and the button lights green Using two or three DME channels on one keyer Use the following procedure 1 Select the DME for the first channel see the previous item Assigning a DME to a key then select the successive channel for the second channel For the third channel select the channel after that Key Setting Operations Using Menus 283 skey py saydeyo shay vp sa deyo 284 2 3 To select the video signal for the second channel hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and select the signal in the Key1 row DME external video bus To select the video signal for the third channel hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and carry out the following operation If the selected DME is channel 3 or channel 4 turn off the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the signal in the key 2 row DME utility 1 bus Assigning a DME output signal as a monitor signal Use the following procedure 1 2 3 In the Processed Key menu press Monitor The Monitor menu appears Press Monitor Set turning it on In the lt DME Select gt group select the DME channel DME1 to DME4 to be used This assigns the selected DME output to DME MON V and DME MON K The colors with which DME1 to DME4 are lit show the key assignment status Lit green DME currently being monitored Lit amber DME that can be monitored Off
224. he PGM PST bank and the background at the same time Key 1 Changing the background and key 2 simultaneously Key 1 Key 2 Changing the background and keys 1 to 4 simultaneously Selecting the key priority If a number of keys are already inserted in the current video you can check or change the key priority that is to say the order in which the keys are overlaid When a key priority KEY PRIOR is selected as the next transition you can also change the key priority in the new video For details of this operation see Key Priority Setting page 227 34 Transitions The key priority values go from 1 to 4 with a higher priority key being in front as seen on the screen Priority sequence on the screen Independent Key Transitions What is an independent key transition In addition to common transitions it is possible to carry out independent transitions on the keyers of the M E banks and PGM PST bank These are called independent key transitions By carrying out an independent key transition in combination with a common transition different transition types can be used for the background and keys It is also possible to use different transition types for key insertion and key deletion by means of a Setup menu setting For details of this operation see Basic Independent Key Transition Operations page 248 The following description compares the independent
225. he back side is visible and with the image size remaining at full size In the lt Transition Mode gt group of the Key Frame gt DME User PGM menu select Dual Notes on frame in out one channel mode Create a minimum of three keyframes Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen Creating User Programmable DME Patterns sedi JWG 9 seideyo i i s d M JWG 9g Jeldeyo 344 Create the first transition to end such that the image can be seen within the screen At this point press the PAUSE button in the keyframe control block turning it on to set a pause for the keyframe Either create the last keyframe image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen In the lt Transition Mode gt group of the Key Frame gt DME User PGM menu select FRAME I O Notes on picture in picture one channel mode Create a minimum of three keyframes Create the first keyframe with the image full size Create the first transition to end such that the image can be seen within the screen At this point press the PAUSE button in the keyframe control block turning it on to set a pause for the keyframe Create the last keyframe again with the image full size In the lt Transition Mode gt group of the Key Frame gt DME User PGM menu select P In P Notes on dual transition mode two channe
226. he key you want to bring to the front after the transition To set the priority to be the same as before the transition press the BKGD button The BKGD button is only effective when in the mode for changing the key priority for after the transition Key Priority Setting When the next transition selection button KEY PRIOR is on the selected key appears on top on the preview monitor The priority of keys other than the selected one does not change 3 To change the priority of more than one key repeat the above operation as required 4 Execute the transition The keys are rearranged based on the above set priority Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation Changing the priority of the currently inserted keys Use the following procedure 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF3 Key Priority The Key Priority menu appears 2 For each of Priority1 Priority2 Priority3 and Priority4 select a key to determine the key priority sequence The keys are inserted in the key priority sequence with priority at the front Priority 1 Priority 2 fier Priority 3 ai Priority 4 It is not possible to select the same key for two or more priority numbers Key Priority Setting 229 suonsuel g Ja deuD suomisuel g sa deyo The keys appear in the set order on the program monitor Changing the key priority for after the transition 230 Us
227. ht or below and to the left SHDW shadow Apply a shadow to two sides of the key for example below and to the right or below and to the left OUTLINE Use the outline of the key EMBOS emboss Apply an embossing effect to the periphery of the key To select a normal as the edge type that is a plain edge set all five of the above buttons off When border drop border or shadow is selected you can use a special color matte or a signal selected on the utility 1 bus for the edge When emboss is selected you can use the dedicated color matte signal for the emboss function When outline is selected the signal selected on the key fill bus is used to fill the edge MAIN MASK Press this button turning it on to enable the key mask using the main pattern It also enables you to set the parameters with the knobs SUB MASK Press this button turning it on to enable the key mask using the sub pattern It also enables you to set the parameters with the knobs ZABTN zabton When this is pressed turning it on a translucent pattern is inserted behind the key With the knobs you can adjust the color size density and softness parameters SOFT EDGE Soften the edge of the key MORE button When there are more than four parameters this button lights amber When it is pressed it changes from amber to green and the fifth and subsequent parameters are assigned to the knobs allowing them to be a
228. ideo gain 200 00 to 200 00 2 Y Gain Luminance gain 200 00 to 200 00 3 C Gain Chrominance gain 200 00 to 200 00 4 Hue Delay Hue delay 180 00 to 180 00 5 Black Level Luminance black level 7 30 to 109 58 To return adjustment values to their defaults Press Unity Key Setting Operations Using Menus Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block This section describes the basic procedures for key settings using the key control block Key delegation buttons M E delegation buttons Displays Key type selection buttons Key fill key source selection buttons Edge type selection buttons Key control block Operations in the Key Control Block Selecting the bank and keyer To make key settings first select the bank from M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST and keyer then assign them to the key control block For example to set key 1 on M E 1 with the key control block use the following procedure Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 287 skey yp saydeyp shay vp sa deyo 288 1 Using the M E delegation buttons in the key control block press the M E1 button setting it on 2 Using the key delegation buttons in the key control block press the KEY 1 button setting
229. iew Pattern limit When a wipe or DME wipe pattern is selected for the transition you can specify the range of movement of the wipe pattern through the course of the transition for each bank independently When the pattern limit function is enabled carrying out a transition results in the following effect for example settings When the limit value is set to 50 the effect at the end of the transition is the same as when the fader lever is at the center position in the normal case with the pattern limit function disabled the wipe pattern does not complete When the limit value is set to 0 the wipe effect is completely disabled and carrying out the transition produces no change in the image When the limit value is set to the maximum 100 the image changes in exactly the same way as when the pattern limit function is off but when the transition is completed the cross point selections on the background A and B buses do not interchange You can specify the limit value either by entering a numeric value in the menu or by operating the fader lever to set the fader lever position See Pattern Limit page 239 The pattern limit function is not available in an independent key transition Fade to black Transitions The PGM PST bank provides a fade to black function controlled with the FTB button in the fade to black control block See Fade to Black page 253 In multi program mode or DSK mode it is possible t
230. imit on using DME channels within an M E bank is exceeded it may not be possible to select the DME Wipe copy and wipe swap You can copy and swap the wipe settings among the banks listed in the following table Target bank Target data M E 1 Wipe settings M E 2 It is not however possible to carry out copy or swap involving M E 3 independent key transition wipe settings PGM PST Wipe copy and wipe swap in the independent key transition control block You can copy and swap the wipe settings among the 16 keyers listed in the following table Target data 80 Target bank Target keyer M E 1 Keys 1 to 4 Wipe settings in the independent key M E 2 transition control block M E 3 It is not however possible to copy or PGM PST Downstream keys 1 to 4 swap wipe settings to or from an external downstream keyer DME wipe copy and DME wipe swap You can copy and swap the DME wipe settings among the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks Copy and Swap Target bank Target data M E 1 DME wipe settings M E 2 M E 3 PGM PST It is not however possible to carry out copy or swap involving independent key transition DME wipe settings DME wipe copy and DME wipe swap in the independent key transition control block You can copy and swap the DME wipe settings among the 16 keyers listed in the following table Target bank Target keyer M E 1 Keys 1 to 4
231. in Src X Spin Src Paths for the x y and z axes Y Spin Src Z Spin X Spin Y Spin Paths for the x y and z axes Pers Overall path settings for items relating to Pers All perspective are made simultaneously Pers X Pers Y Pers Z Paths for the x y and z axes Axis Loc Overall path settings for items relating to image rotation axis are made simultaneously Axis X Axis Y Axis Z Paths for the x y and z axes DME Effect menu Item Paths that can be set Effect All Overall path settings for DME effect items are made simultaneously Edge Overall path settings for edge items are made simultaneously Edge All Border Path for border Crop Edge Soft Path for crop edge softness Item Paths that can be set Video Modify Overall path settings for video modify items are Video Modify All made simultaneously Defocus Blur Path for defocus blur Multi Move Path for multi move Color Modify Path for color modify Mosaic Path for mosaic Freeze Path relating to freeze Non Linear Path relating to nonlinear effects Light Path relating to lighting Trail Path relating to trails In Out Overall path settings for items relating to input In Out All output are made simultaneously Bkgd Path for background Video Key Path for video key DME Global Effect menu Item Global Effect All Paths that can be set Overall path settin
232. in the lt Auto gt group This executes an auto chroma key based on the color specified by the sample selector and displays the composite image on the monitor Making key active adjustments When the key active function is on the composite image is output to the monitor and you can watch the monitor while manually adjusting the keying When the key active function is off only the foreground image appears Set this off when manually adjusting color cancel see the next section Use the following procedure 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set Key Active on 2 Adjust the following parameters Making color cancel adjustments If the background color is leaking into the foreground video turning the color cancel function on allows you to eliminate this leakage Use the following procedure 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu turn Key Active off Only the foreground image appears on the monitor 2 In the lt Color Cancel gt group set Color Cancel on Key Setting Operations Using Menus 267 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Chroma key reference level 100 00 to 0 00 2 Gain Key gain 100 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 a 4 Density Density 0 00 to 100 00 5 Filter Filter coefficient 1to9 skey yp saydey shay vp da deyo 268 3 Adjust the following parameters 4 Set Key Active on Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Lumi
233. in the numeric keypad window Max min maximum minimum value indication This shows the maximum and minimum settings of the parameter Input value This is the value being input into the numeric keypad window Close button This closes the numeric keypad window TC timecode button When the numeric keypad window is opened for a setting requiring a timecode value to be entered this button appears in a depressed state You can enter a timecode value in the range that depends on the signal format page 146 as follows 00 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 nn where nn number of frames per second 1 minus button This toggles the sign of the entered value When it is pressed the value is negative Clear button This clears the input It does not change the parameter setting Trim button After entering the difference from the current value press this button to confirm the numeric input Enter button This confirms the entered value Basic Menu Operations 219 jaueg JOUOD pue snua z seldeup jaueg 04u09 pue snua z Jajdeyo 220 Keyboard window Item display Shift button Caps Lock button BS button Input string Space button Right button Enter button Close button Enler Clear Del Lefi Aigh Left button Del button Clear button Item display This is the name of the parameter being set in th
234. in which the transition occurs Carry out the type selection with the transition type selection buttons in the transition control block of the M E or PGM PST bank For details of this operation see Basic Operating Procedure page 224 The following are the transition types This is a dissolve in which the new video progressively fades in over the current video with the sum of the two video outputs maintained constant At the mid point of the transition when the fader lever is in the center position the output of each is 50 This transition type can also be selected for an independent key transition In this case the key either dissolves in or dissolves out similarly with the progress of the transition Transitions 39 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 40 NAM non additive mix In this dissolve the current video and new video signals are compared and the signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output The current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of the transition as the new video increases progressively to 100 then the current video is progressively reduced from 100 to zero in the second half with the new video maintained at 100 output This transition type is not available for an independent key transition Super mix In this dissolve the current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of the transition as the n
235. ine of the original key as the key You can adjust the width and density of the outline You can also enable the separate edge function and adjust the top bottom left and right outline widths separately n b Emboss This applies an embossing effect to the outline of the key You can adjust the width and position of the embossing and the density You can adjust the density separately for key fill and key edge When embossing is on the Fine Key and zabton functions go off Soft edge This softens the edge of the key Zabton This inserts a translucent pattern behind a key You can adjust the pattern size softness density and color Edge type and key fill key source position Keys The key edge modification function has two modes a mode key drop ON mode in which the key fill key source position moves downward and a mode key drop OFF mode in which it does not move downward Key drop ON mode The key fill key source position moves downward by eight scan lines or four scan lines When a drop border or shadow is selected it is possible to apply a border to the top edge of the key Key drop OFF mode The key fill key source position does not move When a drop border or shadow is selected it is not possible to apply a border to the top edge of the key In the key drop ON mode a menu setting selects between the mode 4H mode in which the key fill key source position is lowered by four scan lines and the
236. ing operations see Settings Relating to Keys Wipes and Frame Memory Key Wipe FM Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Video Process Digital Multi Effects DME DME allows you to add three dimensional effects such as image movement rotation magnification and shrinking as well as a wide variety of special effects DME is the general name for all of these effects You can use up to four channels as dedicated DME channels Each channel can be used on its own or in combination with other channels which allows you to create advanced effects with more complexity To carry out DME wipes requires the BKDS 9470 DME Board Set Three Dimensional Transformations Transformation is the process of placing a video image in a three dimensional DME coordinate space and subjecting it to manipulations such as movement rotation magnification or shrinking Three dimensional coordinate space Source coordinate space and target coordinate space Images are placed in one of two types of coordinate space source coordinate space and target coordinate space The source coordinate space is a three dimensional coordinate space with reference to the image itself The x and y axes are defined parallel to the plane of the image and the z axis is defined perpendicular to the plane of the image When you move the image the coordinate axes also move The target coordinate space is a three dimensional coordinate space with reference to the output monito
237. ing the register XPT HOLD cross point hold status display A bus for which cross point hold is set appears as a green light Numeric display Depending on the operation mode this shows a wipe or DME wipe pattern number or a register number in up to four digits Independent Key Transition Control Block Simple Type The left side of this control block controls key 3 and the right side controls key 4 The control block for key 3 only is described as an example but the operations on the key 4 control block are the same K SS button 0 Key source name display key snapshot buttons B Independent key transition execution section Independent key transition type selection buttons Independent key transition type selection buttons Press one of the following buttons turning it on to select the independent key transition type MIX Faded in or out WIPE Inserted or deleted with a wipe DME Switches the key with a DME wipe CUT Inserted or deleted instantaneously SHIFT Independent key transition execution section KEY3 ON button This inserts or deletes key 3 instantaneously When key 3 is present in the final program output from the switcher this lights red and otherwise lights amber TAKE button This carries out an auto transition on key 3 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jouUeg JONUOD pue snua z
238. ing twice in rapid recall succession directly recalls a related menu Xx represents the HF menu recalled last page The following table lists these in the VF menu Menus accessed by pressing a button twice Button locations Buttons Menus See Transition control block of M E 1 KEY1 M E 1 2 3 Key1 gt Xx page 262 M E 2 or M E 3 bank KEY2 M E 1 2 3 Key2 gt Xx KEY3 M E 1 2 3 Key3 gt Xx KEY4 M E 1 2 3 Key4 gt Xx Transition control block of PGM DSK1 PGM PST DSK1 gt Xx PST bank DSK2 PGM PST DSK2 gt Xx DSK3 PGM PST DSK3 gt Xx DSK4 PGM PST DSK4 gt Xx Transition control block of M E 1 PRIOR M E 1 2 3 PGM PST Misc gt Key Priority page 229 M E 2 M E 3 or PGM PST bank SET KEY M E 1 2 3 PGM PST Misc gt Next Key page 230 PRIOR Priority WIPE M E 1 2 3 PGM PST Wipe gt Main page 304 Pattern DME M E 1 2 3 PGM PST DME Wipe gt Xx page 332 SUPER M E 1 2 3 PGM PST Misc gt Transition page 233 MIX PST M E 1 2 3 PGM PST MiscsTransition page 234 COLOR MIX Independent key transition KEY1 M E 1 2 3 Key1 gt Xx page 262 control block of M E 1 M E 2 or M E 3 bank KEY2 M E 1 2 3 Key2 gt Xx KEY3 M E 1 2 3 Key3 gt Xx KEY4 M E 1 2 3 Key4 gt Xx Independent key transition DSK1 PGM PST DSK1 gt Xx control block of PGM PST bank DSK2 PGM PST DSK2 Xx DSK3 PGM PST DSK3 gt Xx DSK4 PGM PST DSK4 gt Xx 212 Basic Menu Operations Menus
239. ing you to select the signal on that bus Key 2 row The buttons in this row select the key 2 or key 4 signals to be inserted into the video on this M E bank or PGM PST bank To select the key 2 fill signal check that the right hand KEY4 button in the M E bank or the DSK4 button in the PGM PST bank is off then press the button assigned to the desired signal To select the key 4 fill signal press the KEY4 button turning it on While the UTIL button on the right hand side is held down these buttons are assigned to the DME utility 1 or 2 bus as follows When the KEY4 button is off holding down the UTIL button assigns these buttons to the DME utility 1 bus Holding down the UTIL button and pressing the KEY4 button turning it on assigns these buttons to the DME utility 2 bus Background A row Press the desired button to select the signal as the current background video on this M E bank or PGM PST bank While the UTIL button on the right hand side is held down in Hold mode these buttons are assigned to the utility 1 bus and can be used to select the signal on that bus Background B row Press the desired button to select the signal as the background after the next transition on this M E bank or PGM PST bank While the UTIL button on the right Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel hand side is held down in Hold mode these buttons are assigned to the utility 2 bus and can be used
240. insertion of a first keyframe when an empty register is recalled Effect Auto Save Default KF Duration Setting whether or not to replay the first keyframe after rewinding a GPI P BUS DDR VTR effect Source Dest Name For the Source Dest source destination names used by the system select one of the following Source name set by cross point assignment or fixed bus name Description name set on routing switcher Type No name set on routing switcher Name Display Specify the number of characters for display of the names selected in Source Dest Name above as two characters four characters or Auto Flexi Pad Carry out Flexi Pad settings Specify the delegation selection coupling and display mode for the LCD buttons Custom Button Set the following button operation modes ALL button for next transition selection AUTO TRANS TAKE or FTB button during auto transition execution RUN button during keyframe execution UTIL button TRANS PVW button XPT HOLD button in key rows Sensitivity Adjust trackball joystick and double click sensitivity Main Split Fader When the split fader is active specify whether the fader to control other than mix is the left side or the right side Screen saver brightness adjustments and alarm Maintenance Screen Saver Make the menu screen saver settings LCD Brightness Adjust the LCD brightness LED Brightness Adjust the LED brightness S
241. ion the signal from the utility 2 bus of the M E bank appears as the background Pattern numbers 1101 to 1102 one channel mode Page turn The old video moves like a page turning and the new video appears behind it Pattern numbers 1301 to 1313 one channel mode Page roll The new video unrolls like a scroll over the old video This is a type of page turn Pattern numbers 1321 to 1333 one channel mode Frame in out Completed in two transitions In the first transition the new video appears then on the second transition the new video goes out and the old video returns Pattern numbers 1201 to 1204 one channel mode Picture in picture the one channel mode and two channel mode differ as follows In one channel mode this completes in two transitions In the first transition the old video shrinks and the new video appears behind it In the second transition the old video expands again until it is its original size Pattern number 1251 one channel mode In two channel mode in the first half of the transition the old video shrinks and the new video appears In the second half of the transition the new video expands and the old video disappears During the transition the signal from the utility 2 bus of the M E bank appears as the background Pattern numbers 2651 and 2652 two channel mode User programmable DME Using a DME keyframe effect created with a keyframe operation this executes a DME wipe Pat
242. ion Saturation 0 to 100 3 Hue Hue 359 to 0 4 Density Density 0 to 100 Setting the drop border or shadow parameters When the DROP BDR or SHDW button is lit green the parameter settings differ between the key drop OFF and key drop ON modes see page 52 as shown below Switching between these two modes is made by turning the KEY DROP button on or off e Key drop OFF mode Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width 0to8 Position Position 359 to 180 Density Density 0 to 100 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 276 is on the setting value range is 0 to 4 e Key drop ON mode Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width 0to 82 2 Position Position 359 to 0 4 Density Density 0 to 100 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 276 is on the setting value range is 0 to 4 To adjust the edge fill color When DROP BDR or SHDW is selected the MORE button lights amber Pressing the MORE button to turn it green then allows you to adjust the edge fill color parameters with the knobs Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 to 100 Saturation Saturation 0 to 100 Hue Hue 359 to 0 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block Knob 4 Density Parameter Adjustment Density Setting values 0 to 100 Setting th
243. ion button M E 1 then press VF1 Keyl In the M E 1 bank transition control block press the KEY1 next transition selection button twice in rapid succession In the M E 1 bank independent key transition control block press the key delegation button KEY 1 twice in rapid succession In the key control block press the M E delegation button M E 1 then press the key delegation button KEY 1 twice in rapid succession Any of the above operations displays the M E1 gt Key1 menu Note that you can access the DSK menus by pressing the button for the corresponding key in the downstream key control block twice in rapid succession Key Setting Operations Using Menus Key Type Setting Setting the key type in a menu Use the following procedure 1 2 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF1 Type The Type menu appears In the lt Key Type gt group select the key type Luminance luminance key Linear linear key Chroma chroma key Color Vector color vector key Wipe Pattern wipe pattern key Key Wipe Pattern key wipe pattern key For the selected key type you can now set the parameters For an overview of the key types see page 46 Carry out the following settings as required depending on the key type selected in step 2 To enable clean mode see page 47 for a luminance key linear key or color vector key Select Clean Mode so that it is set on When clean mode is enabled key fill is added
244. ioner operation mode is enabled K1 CB1 Press this button to enable wipe pattern position setting for key 1 DSK1 When the USER button is selected pattern position setting for color background 1 is enabled K2 CB2 Press this button to enable wipe pattern position setting for key 2 DSK2 When the USER button is selected pattern position setting is enabled for color background 2 K3 FM1 Press this button to enable wipe pattern position setting for key 3 DSK3 K4 FM2 Press this button to enable wipe pattern position setting for key 4 DSK4 MAIN Press this button to enable main wipe pattern position setting for normal transitions Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel SUB Press this button to enable sub wipe pattern position setting for normal transitions Among the K1 CB1 button K2 CB2 button K3 FM1 button K4 FM2 button MAIN button and SUB button you can make a multiple selection POS Press this button to enable pattern movement in the x axis and y axis directions with the trackball When the USER button is selected this enables the trackball to move the pattern in the x axis and y axis directions and the Z ring to adjust the size of the pattern X Y These restrict the axes affected by the trackball and Z ring to the x or y axis Z This restricts the axes affected by the trackball and Z ring to the z axis CTR center When this button is pressed the patter
245. ipe transition using a pattern mix it is recommended that you set the modifier link function to FULL LINK mode If the link function is off or SEMI LINK mode is selected the desired effect may not be obtained at the start or end of the transition Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers You can carry out a wipe with the following variations and modifications to the selected pattern For details see Setting Wipe Modifiers page 309 Direction You can specify the direction of the wipe the regular direction is referred to as normal and the other direction as reverse You can also select alternating directions each time the transition is completed normal reverse mode __f N a f N ZON Normal Reverse 59 Wipes suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 60 Split Edge Wipes This splits the pattern making the parts of the wipe move in opposite directions on Split off Split on The parameter Split No specifies the number of splits The parameter Spacing specifies the spacing between adjacent patterns You can apply a border to the pattern soften the edges or soften the applied border In an independent key transition only the Soft setting is available Border Soft Soft border Border You can adjust the border width Soft You ca
246. irection The following keyframe functions cannot be used e KF LOOP EFFECT LOOP REVERSE NORMAL REVERSE e PATH External Devices Saving to registers Set the data for controlling external devices in the Device menu You can save the set data in keyframe snapshot or shotbox registers You can recall the register in which the data is saved and carry out operations on it with the keyframe control block For details see Chapter 12 External Devices Volume 2 Register manipulation functions You can carry out the following operations on the registers in which the data for controlling external devices is saved e Copy e Move e Swap e Merge this cannot be carried out for registers holding VTR or disk recorder control data e Lock e Name File related functions As effect data you can save and recall using the File menu Control of P BUS Devices You can control P BUS devices from the DVS 9000 system through the 9 pin serial port of a DCU P BUS device control modes There are two modes of P BUS device control as follows P BUS trigger mode Operating a previously specified button outputs the command for an action assigned to that button P BUS timeline mode Carrying out a keyframe effect under the control of the center control panel controls external devices In the setup select which of P BUS trigger mode and P BUS timeline mode to use P BUS trigger mode actions The actions that can be used
247. it on This assigns the key control block to M E 1 key 1 Parameter adjustment with the knobs When the button for a function requiring parameter settings is pressed that is on you can set the parameters with the four knobs If there are more than four values to be assigned to the knobs the MORE button lights amber At this point press the MORE button which turns green to assign the fifth and subsequent parameters to the knobs so that the parameter settings can be made Selecting the key type To select the key type press one of the key type selection buttons in the key control block LUM button luminance key LIN button linear key CRK button chroma key CVK button color vector key PTN button key wipe pattern key When using a wipe pattern key as the key type in the lt Key Type gt group of the Type menu for the keyer select Wipe Pattern and make the settings For an overview of the key types see page 46 The button you pressed lights green and you can now adjust the parameters with the knobs The display beside each knob shows the first letter of the parameter name and the three digit setting value When the LUM or LIN button is lit green Knob __ Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Reference level for generating the 109 to 7 key signal 2 Gain Key sensitivity 100 shown as 00 to 100 3 Density Key density 0 to 100 4 Filter Filter coefficient 1to9
248. ize Size of pattern 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness of pattern 0 00 to 100 00 3 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24 a The patterns are the same as for a standard wipe See the appendix Wipe Pattern List Volume 2 Frame Memory Operations e When Ext Key is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Reference level for key 7 30 to 109 58 signal generation 2 Gain Key sensitivity 100 00 to 100 00 e When Mix is selected Knob 1 Parameter Mix Rate Adjustment Mix proportion Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 3 When you selected a pattern key press Pattern Adjust The Pattern Adjust menu appears In the menu set the pattern modifiers as required When turning Position on and setting the pattern position a See page 61 When turning Multi on and replicating the pattern Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of 1 to 63 pattern horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of 1 to 63 pattern vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 42 a See page 64 When turning Aspect on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern Knob 1 Parameter Aspect Adjustment Aspect ratio 100 00 to 100 00 Setting values a See page 63 When turning Rotation Angle on and incli
249. k and auxiliary bus control block show the source names of the video signals assigned to numbers 1 to 31 e To display the source names for numbers 32 to 62 press the SHIFT button to the right of the source name displays e To display the source names of the key signals assigned to buttons hold down the Split button in the key control block or the KEY button in the auxiliary bus control block Colors of lit cross point buttons In a particular row of cross point buttons only the last pressed button is effective and lights amber or red The amber indicates the low tally state and the red indicates the high tally state to indicate whether or not the selected signal appears in the final output video Significance of colors of lit cross point buttons Color State Significance Amber Low tally Does not appear in final output video Red High tally Appears in final output video Signal Selection 31 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeup 32 Transitions In the M E banks and PGM PST bank the switch from the current video stream appearing on the corresponding program monitor to a new video stream is referred to as a transition Selecting the Next Transition To execute a transition it is first necessary to decide how the image will be changed as a result of the transition This selection is carried out using the next transition selection buttons see
250. ke a maximum of eight GPI output port settings GPI timeline actions The actions that can be used on the GPI timeline are as follows e Control panel GPI output port e DCU GPI output port For the GPI output settings keyframe editing use the Device menu The data set in the Device menu are saved in a keyframe effect register When you recall this register and start execution of the keyframe effect and advance the effect to the keyframe point for which the GPI output is set a trigger pulse is output to the external device from the specified GPI output port External Devices VTR Disk Recorder Control You can carry out the following manual operations and timeline settings for up to 12 VTRs or disk recorders connected to a DCU e Controlling manually from the device control block MKS 8031 e Saving a start point stop point start delay time and variable speed in a data register then recalling the register to control automatically from the keyframe control block e In the Device menu you can check the following VTR and disk recorder information Device name Register number VTR status Current time Start point Stop point Variable speed Start delay time Manual operation In the device control block you can carry out the following operations manually e VTR or disk recorder selection e Tape transport and disk drive control You can use the following tape transport control buttons
251. kew Skew All are made simultaneously Skew X Skew Y Paths for the x and y axes Aspect Path for aspect ratio Pers Overall path settings for items relating to Pers All perspective are made simultaneously Pers X Pers Y Pers Z Paths for the x y and z axes Axis Loc Overall path settings for items relating to Axis All image rotation axis are made simultaneously Axis X Axis Y Axis Z Paths for the x y and z axes Keyframes 135 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 136 Keyframes DME 3D Trans Global menu Item 3D Trans Global All Paths that can be set Overall path settings for three dimensional transform items in the global channel are made simultaneously Axis All Loc Size Overall path settings for items relating to Loc Size All image size changes and movement are made simultaneously Size Path for image size i Loc X Post Loc Paths for movement in the x and y axes Post Size Path for size Loc XYZ Overall path settings for items relating to Loc XYZ All image movement are made simultaneously Loc X Loc Y Loc Z Paths for the x y and z axes Rot Overall path settings for items relating to Rot All image rotation are made simultaneously Rot X Rot Y Rot Z Paths for the x y and z axes Spin Overall path settings for items relating to spin Spin All are made simultaneously Sp
252. key cuts in or out instantaneously Executing a Transition There are two modes of executing a transition an auto transition by button operation or a manual transition using the fader lever It is also possible to combine both methods taking control with the fader lever of an auto transition which has partly completed or complete a transition started with the fader lever as an auto transition By combining common transitions with independent key transitions different transition types can be applied to the background and keys for example allowing a key wipe combined with a background dissolve See Executing a Transition page 235 Auto transitions Transitions Cut A cut switches instantaneously from the current video to the new video When the next transition is a key transition the key cuts in or out instantaneously Auto transition The transition from the current video to the new video is carried out automatically at a constant rate using the transition effect selected as the transition type You can set the transition rate in advance See Setting the Transition Rate page 236 Manual transitions Using the fader lever you can manually control the progress of the transition Moving the fader lever from one end of its travel to the other completes the transition Flip flop mode and bus fixed mode The following describes the difference between flip flop mode and bus fixed mode taking an M E bank a
253. key source name display key snapshot button corresponding to the register you want to recall The button you pressed lights yellow and this recalls the key settings excluding the key insertion state on off and key priority Chapter 5 Wipes Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings cccccscsssssscsssscscsssecsesseees 304 WaperSettin os Meneses terres es neces ere srese cota eens coerce 304 WapeRattemm s cleciloninee ete eee eee eee ees 304 Atte rm MII Kee ees nas eee E eee eee 307 SettinsawipeiModihersye css eee ee ee eee eee eee 309 Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions sseseseeees 322 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings 322 Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers 323 WipelSmapshots csccccscsserssecccesssassccsesssectecsacessscescenesessenesenscarscasoceseateacsesse 327 Savin eva Wipe Snapshot o meee e sie e aE E EE Ea 328 Recallinsa Wipe Snapshot anena e ee ce e eee eee 329 Deleting ENNA TS E ON O aaeoa E verceenteeerce sae ee racee 330 s d M g 13 dey9 304 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings You carry out wipe setting operations principally using the Wipe menu for each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks This section describes the basic procedures for wipe settings taking the M E 1 gt Wipe menu as an example For details of independent key transition wipe settings see Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions
254. key transition with a common transition taking a simultaneous change of the background and key as an example Video used in the transition Background A Background B Key to insert Transitions 35 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suonoun4 0006 SAC_ JaldeuD Effect of a common transition In the case shown in the above illustration carrying out a common transition produces the following change in the image Transition type wipe Same wipe is applied to background and key Effect of a common transition Effect of use with an independent key transition The key is inserted with an independent key transition as the background changes with a common transition providing the following result Transition type Independent key Different wipe patterns are applied to wipe transition type the background and key transitions wipe Effect of a background transition and independent key transition Combining other transitions with independent key transitions When you set a common transition and a key independent transition for the same key you can apply two different effects such as a wipe and mix dissolve see page 39 to the key simultaneously When carrying out such a combination of transitions simultaneously on a key as auto transitions see page 42 the result depends on the timing of pressing the respective AUTO TRANS buttons 36 Transitions Simultaneous execution
255. l Panel 187 jauUeg JONUOD pue snua z saldeup jaueg OJU0D pue snua z Je deuD 188 Keyframe Control Block In the keyframe control block you can carry out effect editing and execution Effect execution direction selection buttons EFF LOOP button STOP NEXT KF button EDIT ENBL button Duration setting buttons AUTO INS button KF LOOP button PAUSE button Effect execution section B Edit point specification Editing buttons buttons EDIT ENBL edit enable button Press this button turning it on to enable effect editing operations with the keyframe control block When macro editing is carried out this button lights red Edit point specification buttons GO TO TC Go to timecode Press this button turning it on to enter a numeric value from the numeric keypad control block and move the edit point to the specified timecode position Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel GO TO KF Go to keyframe Press this button turning it on to enter a numeric value from the numeric keypad control block and move the edit point to the specified keyframe PREV KF previous keyframe When this button is pressed the edit point moves to the keyframe immediately before the current time the position where the effect is currently stopped NEXT KF next keyframe When this bu
256. l mode Create the first keyframe for each channel as follows Channel 1 create the image full size Channel 2 either create the image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen Create the last keyframe for each channel as follows Channel 1 either create the image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen Channel 2 create the image full size In the lt Transition Mode gt group of the Key Frame gt DME User PGM menu select Dual Notes on picture in picture two channel mode Create a minimum of three keyframes Create the first keyframe for each channel as follows Channel 1 create the image full size Channel 2 since the priority is low it will not be visible on the screen so no particular restrictions apply In the Global Effect gt Ch1 to Ch4 gt Combiner menu when setting the priority of channel and channel 2 set the channel 1 priority higher In the intermediate part of the transition create the two images so that both are visible within the screen In the Global Effect gt Ch1 to Ch4 gt Combiner menu when setting the priority of channel and channel 2 set the channel 2 priority higher It is recommended to make the priority settings at a keyframe point at which the two images are not overlapping Creating User Programmable DME Patterns e During the course of a transition there is a dead zon
257. ld down this button and press the UNDO button to return the register to the state before the data was saved TC timecode Press this button turning it on to switch transition rate entry to the timecode entry mode STORE Press this button to switch to the mode for saving a snapshot effect or shotbox in a register RCALL recall Press this button to switch to the mode for recalling a snapshot effect or shotbox from a register Numeric keypad In addition to the buttons for numeric input this includes buttons for adding attributes to snapshots Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 0 to 9 Used to input numeric digits period Enters the decimal point When the TRANS RATE button is lit enters 00 When the EFF button SNAPSHOT button or SHOTBOX button is lit this is used to find an empty register EFF DISS effect dissolve Invert the sign negative or positive When the SNAPSHOT button is lit applies the effect dissolve attribute to a snapshot CLR AUTO TRANS clear auto transition Clear an input value returning to the previous state When the SNAPSHOT button is lit applies the auto transition attribute to a snapshot TRIM GPI ENBL enable After entering a difference value to be added to an existing setting press this button to confirm the change ENTER Confirm an entered value Display This shows the selected region name and entered numeric values
258. lication MULTI e Pairing e Modulation e Spring e Spiral The following sections show examples of modifying the main pattern Specifying the wipe direction Direction You can specify the wipe direction normal reverse To specify the wipe direction in a menu Use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF4 Edge Direction The Edge Direction menu appears 2 In the lt Direction gt group specify the wipe direction Normal regular direction Normal Reverse alternate between regular and reverse for each transition Reverse reverse direction to normal Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings To specify the wipe direction with a button in the transition control block In the transition control block of each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks press the following direction selection buttons NORM Normal NORM REYV Normal reverse REV Reverse Splitting the wipe pattern Use the following procedure 1 2 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF4 Edge Direction The Edge Direction menu appears Press Split turning it on Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Split No Number of splits 1 to 4 integer 2 Spacing Spacing between adjacent 0 00 to 100 00 patterns Modifying the wipe pattern edge Use the following procedure 1 2 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF4 Edge Direction The Edge Dir
259. list of files select the file you want to play back and open the file File list sharing You can connect multiple DCU serial ports to a single disk recorder You can share the recalled list of files between serial ports connected to the same disk recorder For settings relating to file list sharing see Serial Port Settings Serial Port Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 External Devices 123 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 124 Regions and Registers The term region refers to some sort of functional block of the system When saving or recalling snapshot registers and effect registers or creating or editing effects you first select the region to which the operation applies You can also select multiple regions simultaneously Classification of the regions The regions are classified as follows e MASTER region e The following 31 regions Switcher M E1 to M E3 PGM PST USER1 to USER8 DME DME 1 to DMEFE4 inclusive of Global External devices P BUS Router Device 1 to Device 12 GPI Only the regions assigned to the region selection buttons of the numeric keypad control block can be used simultaneously For details of the region assignment to the region selection buttons see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Regions applicable to keyframe operations Thirty regions that is the above regions less the Router
260. ll key source selection buttons Key type selection buttons ON AIR indicators Delegation buttons Displays DME channel Knobs selection buttons over AUTO RIDE TRACE DELEG O SHOW KEY button AUTO DELEG button Key modifier buttons Output destination specification buttons TRACE button OVERRIDE button MORE button Delegation buttons MEE delegation Press one of the M E 1 Key delegation Press one of the KEY 1 to M E 3 and P P buttons to select to KEY4 buttons to delegate the key the bank an M E bank or the PGM control block to the corresponding PST bank to which the key control keyer block is delegated Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 179 jauUeg JONUOD pue snua z saldeup Jeueg OUD pue snua z Je deuD 180 TRANS By pressing this button you can check the DME channel used for DME wipes on the M E or PGM PST bank Also by pressing this button then pressing one of the DME channel selection buttons you can preset the DME channel to be used when a DME wipe is selected as the transition type for the next transition When presetting the DME channel for an independent key transition hold down this button then press one of the KEY 1 to KEY4 buttons turning the two buttons on beforehand Key t
261. llowing buttons may light MIX In a background transition the new video fades in as the current video fades out During the transition the overall signal level is maintained at 100 In a key transition the key fades in for insertion or out for removal NAM non additive mix The current and new video signals are compared and the signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output The current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of the transition as the new video increases progressively to 100 then the current video is progressively reduced from 100 to zero in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100 WIPE The current video is replaced by the new video using the wipe pattern selected in the Wipe menu DME This applies a wipe like transition using the DME effect selected in the DME Wipe menu Key transition selection buttons To insert or delete key 1 on the next transition hold down the KEY 1 button and select the type of transition using the transition type selection buttons If the key is currently not inserted the transition will insert it and if the key is currently inserted the transition will delete it You can use the KEY2 button in a similar way Transition execution section Fader lever Move this vertically to carry out a transition When the split fader function is enabled by pressing the projection on the left side of the grip you
262. llowing parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Video Gain Overall gain of the video signal 200 00 to 200 00 2 Y Gain Y signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 4 Hue Delay Hue delay 180 00 to 180 00 5 Black Level Y signal black level 7 30 to 109 58 To return the settings to the default values press Unity in the lt Video Process gt group Frame Memory Operations 353 oway ewes 7 Jajdeyo oway ewes 7 Jaydeyo When a pair setting is active it is coupled to the video process on off setting but the above parameter settings are only valid for frame memory source bus 1 When setting video process for frame memory source bus 2 disable the pair setting To set video process for frame memory source bus 1 only with the pair setting return the frame memory source bus 2 settings to their default values Setting a mask Masks can be set separately for frame memory source buses 1 and 2 To apply a mask to the signal selected on frame memory source bus 1 for example use the following procedure in the Edit gt Freeze menu 1 Press Box Mask turning it on 2 Use the knobs to adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Top position 100 00 to 100 00 2 Left Left position 100 00 to 100 00 3 Right Right position 100 00 to 100 00 4 Bottom Bottom position 100
263. lly generation and make various settings These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally e Tally Type Specify the tally type The tally types which can be specified are as follows When Group Tally is Gp1 to 4 R1 R2 R3 R4 G1 G2 G3 G4 When Group Tally is Gp5 to 8 R5 R6 R7 R8 G5 G6 G7 G8 e Destination Specify the address and level e Tally Enable Specify the timing at which a tally is enabled Enable Always enabled Disable Always disabled Tally Input No Follow the tally input status Copy Tally Copy Copy the tally information pertaining to a particular source to a different source These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally Parallel port settings Parallel Tally Make the parallel port settings for output of tally information pertaining to sources and destinations For each of the tally output terminal numbers specify the tally type and source address or destination level and address Serial tally settings Serial Tally Make the serial tally settings including tally type and source address for each serial tally port Simple Connection to MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel Setup To connect the MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel to a CCP 8000 Center Control Panel using an S BUS data link requires a BKPF R70A Routing Switcher Controller Board or similar primary station and various settings for connection However using a simple connection the need for an
264. lowing parameters e When Wipe is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 e When Pattern is s elected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 3 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24 a The patterns are the same as for a standard wipe See the appendix Wipe Pattern List Volume 2 If you selected Pattern you can also carry out the pattern selection by pressing the Mix Ptn Select button in the Matte Adjust menu to display the Mix Ptn Select menu Select any pattern appearing in the Mix Ptn Select menu standard wipe patterns to 24 by pressing the appropriate button and you can then adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 313 sadim gsejdeyo s d M g saydeyo 314 5 If you selected Pattern in step 4 if required the following modifiers can be added After selecting a wipe mix skip to step 6 e When turning Position on and setting the pattern position Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 2 2 Position V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 2 a See pag
265. lue of 100 00 generates the maximum downward speed of waves and a value of 100 00 the maximum upward speed Vertical modulation This modulates the pattern applying waviness in the vertical direction to edges The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves A value of 100 00 generates the maximum leftward speed of waves and a value of 100 00 the maximum rightward speed Fringe This modulates the pattern applying waviness in the radial direction to edges Wipes 65 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 66 The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves A value of 100 00 generates the maximum counterclockwise speed of waves and a value of 100 00 the maximum clockwise speed Spring As the transition progresses the edge of the pattern is subjected to barrel or pincushion distortion E E Spring off Spring on A negative parameter value produces pincushion distortion and a positive value produces barrel distortion Spiral This deforms the pattern spirally Spiral off Spiral on e The parameter Magnitude determines the size and direction of the spiral A value of 100 00 represents the maximum movement in the counterclockwise direction and a value of 100 00 represents the maximum movement in the clockwise direction e The parameter Wave Speed determines th
266. mation Operation Modes 00 eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaees 90 Graphics DiS playsseliccecsiiecsevscteved sey a r enera ennaa E E EREE SEESE 95 Three Dimensional Parameter Display sseseesseseesesseeersererrereerersee 97 DME Special Effects josie ssp acses svsshevecesrsstlvien ivseoseesiyesseutes ses 97 Interpolation en ae a 111 Key Density Adjustment 0 0 0 0 ceecescecereeeneceeeeeeeeceseeceneeenaeeeneeeee 112 Key Source Selection ceeseeseceseeseceseeseceeceseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeas 112 Global Effects nenea ra E EEE EEE ees 112 External DeVice essssscssssessssessssessrsesessesessesessesscsessesssesessesssserssees 118 Shared Functions for External Device Control ceeeseeereeees 118 Control of P BUS Devices 0 cee eeeseeseeseceeseceeeeceseeeneeceeeeeneceeeeen 119 Control of GPI Devices 0 0 eeeeeeesseesceeseeeeneceeeceaeeeneecereeeneeeeeees 120 VTR Disk Recorder Control 00 0 eeeccceeceeseceeeeeneceneecereeeneeeeneeess 121 Regions and Registers ccccccscscsscsssceccsssssscecsssscsccsssesessesssesseeeseeee 124 IRESIONS i oarre e e E E E E E 124 Registers sannan re reine E i aE o EEEn aeS 125 KCYfPAMES ss cncsessoisecessedscsnscavecaswasoesessanassessansas denctue soavsunssescnasceoseasonestaanaee 127 Effects eit she succu lov cesethecoriatee cs e e a a e a a Ea 127 Saving and Recalling Effects eee ceseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaee 128 Effect Attributes esnin ea e reies oieee 128 Effect Editihg 24
267. mode 8H mode in which the key fill key source position is lowered by eight scan lines When Fine Key is on the edge width is forced to the range 0 00 to 4 00 Note that in the following situations the key drop mode is forcibly set to ON e When the edge type is border outline or emboss Edge fill Masks e When the edge type is normal with soft edge being on e When Fine Key is on When a border drop border or shadow modifier is selected you can select a signal to fill these edge effects The edge fill may be either the signal from the dedicated color matte generator or the signal currently selected on the utility 1 bus In the case of an outline there is no edge fill signal selection because the key fill signal fills the outline and the rest of the image remains as the background For the emboss effect in place of the edge fill signal the emboss fill matte 1 and emboss fill matte 2 signals are used A mask is used to inhibit the effect of a key over a part of the image This allows parts of the background which would otherwise be keyed to be protected or to correct the key if it is not of the desired shape For details of masking operations see Masks pages 279 and 295 Key mask and background mask There are two types of mask a key mask and a background mask Key mask This masks out a part of the key which will result in the background appearing Background mask This masks out a part of the b
268. n 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 Mix Color Carry out a color mix Adjust color 1 and color 2 and select a mix pattern see the next section In the lt Key Source gt group specify the key source selection mode Self The key fill bus signal is automatically selected as the key source When the key type is selected as chroma key select Self Key Setting Operations Using Menus 271 shey yp saydeyo shay vp da deyo Auto Select The signal allocated being paired with the key fill bus signal to across point button is automatically selected as the key source The setting of key fill and key source pairs is carried out in the Setup menu See Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Split You can select a key source signal independently of the key source automatically selected in Auto Select mode When Split was selected in step 5 hold down the SPLIT button in the key control block then in the cross point control block key 1 row select the key source signal When Split is selected the key memory function see page 54 is disabled Carrying out a color mix for key fill When Matte is selected for key fill you can combine color and color 2 For the combination you can use not only a key wipe generator pattern but also the dedicated pattern for key edge color mix Use the following procedure 1 In the lt Key Fill gt group of the Type menu
269. n adjust the edge softness Soft border You can adjust the border width and the softness of the inner and outer edges of the border When a border or soft border is selected the signal filling the border is called edge fill For the edge fill you can use a matte generated by the dedicated color matte generator or the signal selected on the utility 2 bus A matte can include color 1 and color 2 and a combination of the two colors a color mix Positioner Rotation You can move the wipe pattern to any position Positioner off Positioner on e The parameter H Position controls the horizontal position of the pattern A negative value moves the pattern to the left and a positive value moves the pattern to the right e The parameter V Position controls the vertical position of the pattern A negative value moves the pattern down and a positive value moves the pattern up You can rotate the pattern There are three rotation modes as follows Angle This carries out a wipe with the pattern in a fixed angle E Angle off Angle on The parameter Angle determines the angle of pattern rotation A value of 100 00 of the parameter Angle corresponds to one whole turn counterclockwise a value of 100 00 corresponds to one whole turn clockwise With a value of 0 00 there is no rotation Wipes 61 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo
270. n assignment for the 7321 7 149 210 numeric keypad control block Program button assignment setting 7321 8 149 211 Xpt Assign Source name and destination name export 7322 5 150 216 Prefs Utility Button assignment setting 7324 150 218 Device Interface Additional actions for GPI input 7325 1 223 DCU serial port setting 7325 4 150 226 Operation Setup relating to effects 7326 2 5 6 150 228 e Automatic turning off of EDIT ENBL e Automatic insertion of the first keyframe Keyframe duration default value Setting whether to replay the first keyframe after rewinding GPI P BUS DDR VTR Button operation mode setting 7326 4 151 230 e for during auto transition e for during keyframe execution Trackball joystick and double click sensitivity 7326 5 151 232 adjustment Maintenance Touch panel calibration 7327 151 233 DCU Additional actions for GPI input 7352 267 Serial port setting 7355 155 273 Router interface and Serial tally setting 7367 156 288 tally a FM1 2 Frame Freeze FM1 2 Field Freeze FM1 2 Freeze Off Functions relating to files Classification Functions supported Menu No See page Vol 1 Vol 2 Menu operations Changes in File menu operations 7111 to 7171 158 294 operations between files Individual frame memory file operations File import and Image data import and export for frame memory 7161 159 304 export Dir
271. n position returns to the center When the USER button is selected the pattern size also returns to 50 00 SHIFT CLR WORK BUFR These are not used in positioner operation mode When the three dimensional transform operation mode is enabled LOCAL Enable operations in the DME local coordinate space GLB global Enable operations in the DME global coordinate space The LOCAL and GLB buttons can be selected at the same time SRC source Enable operations in the DME source coordinate space TRGT target Enable operations in the DME target coordinate space The SRC and TRGT buttons cannot be selected at the same time AXIS LOC location When this button is lit the trackball moves the rotational axis of the image in the x and y directions and the Z ring moves the axis in the z direction ASP PERS aspect perspective When the SRC button is lit pressing this button enables the trackball to control the x and y directions independently and the Z ring controls the x and y directions together to vary the aspect ratio When the SHIFT button is held down and this button is pressed the trackball controls the skew of the image in the x and y directions When the TRGT button is lit pressing this button enables the trackball to control the perspective of the image in the x and y directions The Z ring controls the distance to the viewpoint LOC location SIZE When this button is lit the Z ri
272. n setup pressing this button plays the tape LIMIT SET Use this button to set a pattern limit when the PTN LIMIT button is off Move the fader lever to the position of a particular pattern size and stop it there then press this button to set the pattern limit range When the VTR operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button stops the tape Key status display For each of keys to 4 the corresponding ON indicator lights when the key is inserted It also shows the priority 1 to 4 of each key PRIOR priority SET button While this button is held down you can set the key priority The setting mode when this button is pressed depends on whether or not the KEY PRIOR button is lit as follows e When the KEY PRIOR button is off the current key priority is set e When the KEY PRIOR button is lit the key priority after the next transition is set Press the KEY PRIOR button as required to switch between these two modes In either mode hold down the PRIOR SET button and press the button KEY 1 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 175 jaueg JOUOD pue snua z seldeup Jeueg OuJUOD pue snua z Je deuD 176 to KEY4 corresponding to the key you want to bring to the front KF keyframe button When the VTR operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button cues the tape automatically to the start point The following controls are used as the i
273. nance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 5 Filter Filter coefficient 1to9 The chroma key composite image now appears in the monitor Key signal adjustments for color cancel When the color cancel function is set on you can adjust the key signal for color cancel Use the following procedure 1 2 In the lt Color Cancel gt group of the Chroma Adjust menu set Color Cancel on In the lt Color Cancel gt group set Cancel Key on The cancel key is now on and you can now adjust the key signal for color cancel Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Color cancel key reference level 0 00 to 100 00 2 Gain Color cancel key gain 100 00 to 100 00 Make the following settings as required in the lt Color Cancel gt group e When setting Key Position on and adjusting the color cancel key edge position Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Phase Move left and right edges of the Left edge position color cancel key simultaneously value shown 2 Left Move left edge of the color cancel 3 00 to 3 00 key 3 Right Move right edge of the color 3 00 to 3 00 cancel key Key Setting Operations Using Menus When setting Window on and adjusting the detection range of the color cancel key Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Crop Crop value 100
274. nd keyframe effect numbers are stored in registers There are 99 registers for each control panel m Register 1 M E 1 Snapshot 1 M E 2 Effect 5 DMES3 Effect 1 Register 2 M E 1 Snapshot 1 RTR Snapshot 15 GPI Effect 1 Register 3 M E 3 Effect 1 P P Effect 90 User1 Effect 1 Register 99 Auto Run On Auto Run off Auto Run Off Shotbox registers P P Effect 2 DME1 Snapshot 1 Auto Run On The figure above shows schematically the settings in the 99 shotbox registers Each register may contain any combination of the regions to which the register applies with the snapshots or effects to be recalled The Auto Run function is an attribute which can be set for each register When this is set to On an effect recalled by a shotbox operation is automatically run e When register 1 is executed this recalls M E 1 snapshot 1 M E 2 effect 5 and DME3 effect 1 For register 1 auto run is on and therefore the M E 2 and DMES3 effects are run as soon as they have been recalled e When register 3 is executed M E 3 effect 1 P P effect 90 and User1 effect 1 are recalled For register 3 auto run is off and therefore to run the recalled effects press the RUN button in the keyframe control block Shotbox settings and execution Carry out shotbox register settings from the Shotbox menu or using the numeric keypad control block Y
275. ndependent key transition control block O Key delegation buttons These buttons delegate this independent key transition control block to a desired keyer Press one of the KEY 1 to KEY4 buttons DSK1 to DSK4 in the PGM PST bank turning it on You can press more than one button to select two or more keyers Independent key transition type selection buttons Press one of the following buttons turning it on to select the independent key transition type MIX Faded in or out WIPE Inserted or deleted with a wipe DME DME wipe Inserted or deleted with a DME wipe Independent key transition execution section KEY1 ON to KEY4 ON DSK1 ON to DSK4 ON in the PGM PST bank buttons Press the corresponding one of these buttons to cut key 1 to key 4 in or out instantaneously When the key corresponding to the button appears in the final program output the button lights red and otherwise lights amber AUTO TRANS transition buttons These correspond to keys 1 to 4 from left to right press one to carry out an auto transition The transition rate for an independent key transition can be set in the numeric keypad control Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel block in the Flexi Pad control block or in a menu Key source name display key snapshot buttons These display the source name selected on the corresponding keyer In key snapshot mode press these buttons corresponding to r
276. nel Custom mode This uses the settings saved in non volatile memory or ROM within the device In this mode there are Setup and Initial Status settings which can be set separately e Setup mode Select the setup state to be used after powering on from the following User Start up using the user data previously saved with Setup Define Factory Start up with the factory default settings e Initial status mode Select the state of each device after powering on excluding the settings to which setup applies User Start up using the user data previously saved with Initial Status Define For the control panel this applies to the key bus delegation buttons only Factory Start up with the factory default settings For details of saving and recalling setup data see Saving and Recalling Setup Data page 148 System reset and memory initialization Initialize e Reset Reset to state after powering on e All Clear Clear the memory and carry out initialization The Network Config System Config Format and Start Up setup values are set by reference to data stored in non volatile memory and the system automatically starts up It is not necessary to reset the Date Time settings For more details see Saving and Recalling Setup Data page 148 Installation Install This installs the software and firmware in all devices including the DCU connected to the Data LAN Standard Install mode Installs th
277. next keyframe O EFF LOOP effect loop button When the effect reaches the last keyframe with this button on it returns to the first keyframe and repeats Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel AUTO INS auto insert button When editing a macro press this button turning it on to enable the auto insert function so that every control panel operation you carry out is added to the macro as an event Numeric Keypad Control Block The numeric keypad control block is used for region selection for saving and recalling snapshots effects and shotboxes for entering numeric values for trackball operation and keyframe operation and for transition rate entry Mode selection buttons Display ooog l EFF piss OLR AUTO Lirans J B Region selection buttons Numeric keypad Function selection buttons Mode selection buttons EFF effect Press to save or recall an effect SNAPSHOT Press to save or recall a snapshot SHOTBOx Press to save or recall a shotbox MCRO macro Press to save recall or edit a macro TRANS RATE transition rate Press to set the transition rate Hold down this button and press one of the key delegation buttons KEY 1 to KEY4 in the transition control block to
278. ng controls the image size The trackball moves the image in the x and y directions LOC location XYZ When this button is lit the trackball moves the image in the x and y directions and the Z ring moves the image in the z direction SHIFT While holding down this button pressing the ASP PERS button or ROT button switches to the shifted version of the corresponding function CLR WORK BUFR clear work buffer Press this button once to clear only the three dimensional transform parameters of the information held in the work buffer Press twice in rapid succession to clear all of the parameters and return to the default state ROT rotation When this button is lit the trackball rotates the image about the x and y axes and the Z ring rotates the image about the z axis Pressing this while holding down the SHIFT button enables rotation of the image in the Spin mode The trackball and Z ring operate in the same manner X Y Z These restrict which axes the trackball and Z ring can control You can select more than one When one of these buttons is selected you can enter the parameter value for the corresponding axis using the numeric keypad control block CTR center Pressing this button changes the values of the three dimensional parameters currently controlled by the trackball and Z ring to the closest detent values Pressing twice in rapid succession returns the parameter values to their defaults
279. ngs are in the Transition menu for each key See Blink Function page 285 Key Default With a simple operation you can return the key adjustment values to their defaults The adjustment values which can be returned to their default values are as follows Adjustment values for the particular key type Clip Gain Density Filter etc In the case of chroma keying all adjustment values return to their default values Key position Key inversion Clean mode For details see Returning the key adjustment values to their defaults page 298 Key Modify Clear A simple button operation returns the key settings to the initial status settings For details of the initial status see Selecting the State After Powering On Start Up Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Keys 55 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 56 Wipes A wipe is a transition from the current video stream to a new video stream using a wipe pattern Changing the background by means of a wipe is referred to as a background wipe and inserting or deleting a key with a wipe is termed a key wipe There are two types of wipe those that can be selected in a common transition and those that can be selected in an independent key transition For details of independent key transitions see page 35 Types of Wipe Pattern Wipes The patterns that can be used for a wipe are divided into
280. ngs made in the Setup menu For details see Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu under Setup Relating to Switcher Processor in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Table of available attributes The attributes that can be used depend on the region as follows Yes Can be used No Cannot be used Attribute Region M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 and USER 1 to USER 8 DME 1 to DME 8 PGM PST Cross point hold Yes Yes Yes Key disable Yes No No Snapshots 141 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 142 Yes Can be used No Cannot be used Attribute Region M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 and PGM PST USER 1 to USER 8 DME 1 to DME 8 Effect dissolve Yes Yes Yes Auto transition Yes No No Yes Yes No GPI outputs gt a Applicable only as temporary attributes but not applicable by a menu operation b Applicable only by a menu operation Attribute display You can view the attributes of a snapshot in the Snapshot menu Temporary attributes For more details see Snapshot Operations in the Menus in Chapter 14 Volume 2 When recalling a snapshot you can temporarily apply attributes distinct from the attributes set for each register These are called temporary attributes You can set temporary attributes when recalling a snapshot For details of snapshot operations see Chapter 14 Snapshots Volume
281. ning it on The button lights amber and on the currently selected keyer the key fill and key source are assigned to reentry signals PROC V and PROC K You cannot select the PROC V and PROC K signals using the cross point selection buttons of the M E or PGM PST bank Using a frame memory feed When you press the FM FEED button in the key control block it lights momentarily amber then the key fill and key source signals processed in the currently selected keyer are assigned to frame memory sources 1 and 2 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 297 skey vp saydeyp shay vp sa deyo If a DME is selected on the currently selected keyer then the key fill and key source signals to which a DME effect is applied are assigned to frame memory sources and 2 Carrying out a frame memory feed causes the PROC KEY button to light amber Using the show key function While the SHOW KEY button is held down the key processed key source signal appears on the specified output Show key mode Even when the SHOW KEY button is released for a preset time the show key mode is maintained You can specify the output to which the show key function is applied and set the time for which the show key mode is maintained after releasing the button in a Setup menu For details see Settings Relating to Keys Wipes and Frame Memory Key Wipe FM Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Using the auto delegation function To
282. ning the pattern Frame Memory Operations 359 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 2 2 Position V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 2 Aioway ewes 7 Jajdeyo Aowsy ewes 7 Jaydeyo 360 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 61 To select the pattern display the Pattern Select menu by pressing Pattern Select button in the Pattern Adjust menu You can change the pattern selected in step 2 here After selecting one of the patterns standard wipe patterns to 24 displayed in the Pattern Select menu you can adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 When you selected a pattern key or external key if required press Key Invert in the Edit gt Composite menu to invert the key Image Output There are two functions related to image output the reposition function for moving the output image and the lock function for fixing the output image For an overview of the image output see page 75 Moving the output image reposition function Use the following procedure 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF3 Reposition Lock and HF1 Reposition The Reposition menu appears In this menu you can also enable the
283. nonlinear effects off Wave Produces a wave like effect in the image There are two modes H amp V and Size You can set the size and frequency of the waves the wave form the amount of wave movement and the range In H amp V mode you can also set the wave angle TUNN f A S E 5 a AL ke la ce Mosaic Glass Makes the image rougher and finer at a specified interval Digital Multi Effects DME 101 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suonoun4 0006 SAC_ JaldeuD 102 There are two modes H amp V and Size You can set the size and frequency of waves in the image the wave form the amount of wave movement and the range In H amp V mode you can also set the wave angle Sas fa ses Pm ee eles a a Ke E EES ESE Flag Applies an effect like a flag waving in the wind There are two modes H amp V and Size You can set the size and frequency of waves in the image the wave form the amount of wave movement and the range In H amp V mode you can also set the wave angle Twist Twists the image You can twist the image in the horizontal or vertical direction You can set the size and frequency of waves in the image the wave form the amount of wave movement and other parameters Ripple Applies an effect like ripples moving across the image There are four modes Radial Angular Both and Shape The direction of modulation differs depending on the mode You can set the size and frequ
284. ns assigned to functions Button name Function POS Toggle Position on or off X Y Fix the operating direction and enable setting of the wipe position from the numeric keypad CTR Return the pattern position to the center of the screen 2 Press the MAIN button or SUB button turning it on oo Press the POS button turning Position on 4 Move the trackball or joystick to set the wipe position By pressing the X button turning it on you can restrict movement to the horizontal direction and by pressing the Y button turning it on you can restrict movement to the vertical direction Also when either of these buttons is lit you can enter a coordinate of the wipe position from the numeric keypad Rotating the wipe pattern Rotation You can apply rotation independently to the main pattern and sub pattern Use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears 2 In the lt Rotation gt group select the rotation type Angle Incline the pattern through a fixed angle Speed Rotate at a fixed rate Magnitude Rotate through a particular angle during the course of the transition For an overview of the rotation see page 61 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 3 According to the selection in step 2 set the following parameters e When Angle is selected Knob 1 Angle Parameter Adjustment Angle of pattern
285. ntally Pattern replication Multi The same pattern can be repeated horizontally and vertically or both up to 63 times You can also change the orientation of alternate copies or change the position k k x p KKK k k x Multi off Multi on The parameter H Multi determines the number of pattern replications horizontally and the parameter V Multi determines the number of pattern replications vertically The parameter Shift determines the manner of replication At a value of 100 00 the pattern of the adjacent odd numbered column on the left lines up with the central coordinate horizontally At a value of 100 00 the pattern of the adjacent odd numbered column on the right lines up with the central coordinate horizontally For an independent key transition wipe you can use the Invert Type parameter to select from the following four types of replication pattern Wipes 63 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Jaldeyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyD 64 Pairing Wipes 1 2 3 4 m 4 a 7 ay a hA a a a m 4 a 7 x 1 All replications in the same orientation 2 Even numbered columns and rows inverted 3 Even numbered columns and rows inverted and even numbered rows staggered 4 Even numbered rows staggered This slits the pattern into multiple strips making it like a venetian blind i Pairing off
286. ntrol Panel Menu Control Block Top menu selection buttons B Menu display o 6 i g a 2 0 o o User preference buttons Knobs Top menu selection buttons These select the menu appearing in the menu display Menu display This shows the menu currently in use Knobs These adjust the parameter values appearing in the menu User preference buttons These recall the functions or menus assigned to them in the Setup menu In the default setup nothing is assigned to the PREFS 1 to PREFS 7 buttons PREFS 8 button When this button is on control of an editor from the Remote 1 port on the rear panel of the switcher is possible However even when it is off control of the Edit PVW bus is always possible Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 197 jaueg 04u00 pue snuey z seldeup Jaueg OUD pue snua z 4e deuD 198 Memory Card USB Adaptor Block Memory card slot DEVICE connectors Memory card slot This slot accepts a PCMCIA Type II compliant memory card You can use it in software installation and for saving and reading in data such as snapshot keyframe effect and setup data DEVICE connectors There are three USB connectors You can connect a device such as a mouse keyboard pen tablet and so on
287. o FM1 and FM2 To the right of the target FM selection buttons see page 349 the FM output status appears Frame Memory Operations 351 Aioweay ewes 7 Jajdeyo oway ewes 7 Ja deyo 352 4 If in step 2 you set Pair to be off press the target FM selection button FM1 or FM2 see page 349 to select the FM operations apply to When Pair is on whichever of FM1 and FM2 you press the pair is selected When off it is necessary to select which the operations apply to Capturing an Image Freeze Freezing an image and writing it to memory To freeze the signal selected as input material and write it to memory use the following procedure 1 2 In the Frame Memory menu select VF2 Edit and HF1 Freeze The Freeze menu appears Select the target frame memory For the procedure see Selecting outputs FM and target frame memory page 351 To enable V K mode press V K Mode turning it on Press Freeze Enable turning it on A freeze is now possible If necessary make the video process settings see page 353 or mask settings see page 354 for application to the selected signal In the state in which you want to freeze press one of the following in the lt Freeze gt group to write the freeze image to temporary memory Frame Freeze one frame Field Freeze one field Off Release the freeze and delete the recorded freeze image After carrying out the freeze to r
288. o FM8 this fixes the image at the current output When this lock is enabled even if the output is recalled in a snapshot or keyframe the images output to FM1 to FM8 are preserved Image data management File management The following operations are possible on files created to hold images Delete Specify a file to be deleted It is also possible to delete all files simultaneously in a single operation Rename file Change the name of the specified file Image data transfer Files can be transferred between such devices as a hard disk and memory card In the File menu files can be saved and recalled It is possible to import images such as BMP files or convert frame memory files into a different format and save them in an external device For details see Chapter 17 Files Volume 2 Notes on transferring multiple still images together e Transferring all of the still image files within frame memory together fails if the capacity of the memory card is too small to hold all of the images In this case replace with a larger capacity memory card or delete still images until saving is possible The relation between memory card capacity and number of images that can be saved is as follows Frame Memory Memory card capacity Number of images that can be saved SD system HD system 16MB 13 2 32MB 27 5 64MB 55 11 128MB 112 23 Note that when transferring to the hard disk there is ample capaci
289. o as the foreground and the composite image is called a chroma key image Foreground Background Chroma key image Normal mix and additive mix In creating a chroma key image either a normal mix or an additive mix can be used To select which use the Type gt Chroma Adjust menu for the keyer See Chroma Key Composition page 265 Keys suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 48 Keys Normal mix The foreground is cut out with the key signal and then combined with the background which has also been cut out with the key signal Additive mix The background which has been cut out with the key signal is combined with the unshaped foreground This is effective for a natural looking composite when the scene includes glass or other translucent objects Plane function In an additive mix the foreground is not shaped by the key signal and variations in the blue background appear in the composite image To prevent this it is possible to set a particular luminance level for the background and any parts below this level are cut forcibly Methods of adjusting the composite obtained from chroma keying include automatic adjustment with the auto chroma key function and manual adjustment carrying out the necessary processing separately The optimum results will be obtained by first carrying out adjustments with the auto chroma key function then making any fine adjustments as re
290. o carry out a fade to black on a number of programs simultaneously You can also make a Setup menu setting such that a fade to black does not apply to particular programs For details of the setting see Settings Relating to Video Switching Transition Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Transitions 45 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 46 Keys A key is an effect in which a part of the background image is replaced by an image or superimposed text The signal determining how the background is cut out is termed key source and the signal that replaces the cut out part is termed key fill The system component responsible for processing a key is referred to as a keyer Each M E bank and the PGM PST bank has four keyers and all of these keyers provide the same functions Key Types The key type indicates the manner in which the key source signal is used to cut out the background In each bank you can use the following key types You can select the key type using the key type selection buttons in the key control block or by a setting in the Type menu for the keyer See Key Type Setting page 263 e Luminance key e Linear key Color vector key Chroma key Wipe pattern key Key wipe pattern key Luminance key The background is cut out according to the luminance Y of the key source signal and at the same time the key fill signal is cut out and then added to
291. of the transition 2 According to the selection in step 1 set the following parameters e When Angle is selected Knob 1 Parameter Angle Adjustment Angle of pattern rotation Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 61 e When Speed is selected Knob F Parameter Speed Adjustment Rotation rate of pattern Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 62 Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions s d Mm gsajdeyo 325 s d M g 4adeyo e When Magnitude is selected Knob _ Parameter 1 Angle Adjustment Angle of pattern rotation at start of transition Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 2 2 Magnitude Angle of rotation through course of transition 200 00 to 200 00 2 a See page 62 Setting the wipe pattern aspect ratio Aspect ratio Use the following procedure 1 Press Aspect in the Key Wipe Adjust menu turning it on 2 Set the following parameter Knob _ Parameter 1 Aspect Adjustment Aspect ratio Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 63 Replicating the wipe pattern Multi Use the following procedure 1 Press Multi in the Key Wipe Adjust menu turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 horizont
292. of edge 0 00 to 100 00 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24 a The patterns are the same as for a standard wipe See the appendix Wipe Pattern List Volume 2 You can also carry out the pattern selection by pressing the Mix Ptn Select button to display the Mix Ptn Select menu Select any pattern appearing in the Mix Ptn Select menu standard wipe patterns 1 to 24 and you can then adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 3 To adjust color 1 set Color1 on and to adjust color 2 set Color2 on then adjust the parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 4 If required set the pattern modifiers When turning Position on and setting the pattern position Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 2 Position V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 a See page 61 e When turning Multi on and using replications of the same pattern Knob _ Parameter 1 H Multi Adjustment Number of repetitions of pattern horizontally Setting values 1 to 63 Color Background Setting Operations 369 spunoibyoeg 10 09 8 saj deyo spunosbyoe
293. old down this button and press the selection button for the DME channel you want to assign to the monitor output you can then monitor the output signal on the DME monitor output While this button is held down the DME channel selection buttons light as follows allowing you to check the monitor assignment Lit amber DME channel that can currently be monitored Lit green DME channel currently assigned to the monitor output FM FEED frame memory feed When you press this button it lights momentarily amber then for the currently selected keyer the key processed signals are selected for frame memory sources and 2 If a DME is selected on the currently selected keyer the key fill and key source signals to which a DME effect is applied are assigned to frame memory sources and 2 otherwise the key fill and key source are assigned Carrying out a frame memory feed causes the PROC KEY button to light amber PROC KEY processed key When this button is on the key fill source signal subjected to key processing or signal subjected to a DME effect on the currently selected keyer can be selected as a reentry signal PROC V or PROC K for the M E or PGM PST bank on the auxiliary bus or the like OVERRIDE button To select a DME channel already allocated to another keyer or transition to the currently selected keyer or transition hold down this button and press the DME channel selection button Names and Functions
294. olume 2 TRANS PGM PST Misc gt Transition page 239 RATE Basic Menu Operations 213 jeueg OUD pue snua z Je deuD 214 Menus accessed by pressing a button twice Button locations Buttons Menus See Downstream key control block DSK1 The menu recalled depends on the keyer page 262 DSK2 assigned in the Setup menu DSK3 DSK4 WIPE PGM PST DSK1 to page 322 DSK4 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust gt Pattern Select DME PGM PST DSK1 to page 339 DSK4 gt Transition gt DME Wipe Adjust gt 1ch Pattern Select K SS Snapshot gt Key Snapshot gt Xx Chapter 14 STORE Volume 2 Buttons in M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 FM1 to 8 Frame Memory gt Recall gt Recall page 354 PGM PST or AUX bank to Thumbnail which the signal indicated in Buttons column is assigned Color Color Bkgd gt Color Bkgd1 page 368 Bkgd1 Color Color Bkgd gt Color Bkgd2 Bkgd2 AUX delegation buttons FMS1 Frame Memory gt Edit gt Freeze page 352 FMS2 a The menu recalled depends on which of keyers 1 to 4 the independent key transition control block is delegated to b The menu recalled depends on which of the M E delegation buttons and key delegation buttons are selected in the key control block Basic Menu Operations c The menu recalled depends on which of the M E 1 to M E 3 banks and PGM PST bank the numeric control block is delegated to d For simple type modules only e Recalling is possible only wh
295. on turning it off Lock Toggling the TRANS PVW button on and off switches between the transition preview mode and the normal mode Hold The preview mode obtains only while the TRANS PVW button is held down One Time Each time a transition ends it reverts to the normal mode For details of the mode setting see Operation Settings Operation Menu and Settings Relating to Video Switching Transition Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Notes e During a transition whether executed with the AUTO TRANS button or the fader lever it is not possible to press the TRANS PVW button e In bus fixed mode see page 43 transition previews are not available e When using the simple type transition control block see page 255 transition previews are not available Transition Preview 247 suonisued Ja deuD suomisuel g sa deyp Independent Key Transitions Key source name display key JOI snapshot buttons Key delegation buttons Independent key transition type selection buttons Independent key transition execution section Independent key transition control block standard type To set independent transitions for the keyers on the M E or PGM PST bank use the independent key transition control block For an overview of the independent key transitions see page 35
296. opy swap source on the left and the copy swap destination on the right 2 In the lt Data Select gt group select any of the following Wipe The operation applies to wipes in the transition control block Key Wipe The operation applies to wipes in the independent key transition control block Basic Copy and Swap Operations 3 Using any of the following methods select the data to be copied or swapped e Press directly on the list appearing in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Left No Select data for copy swap 4 to 4 4 source 1to 16 b 2 Right No Select data for copy swap to 4 4 destination 1 to 16 a Transition control block wipe data b Independent key transition control block wipe data For details of the data affected see Copy and Swap page 79 4 To copy press Copy and to swap press Swap This carries out the copy or swap To undo a copy or swap Press Undo to return to the state before the copy or swap was carried out Copy by Button Operation You can carry out the following copy operations by a simple button operation e M E copy e Keyer copy e Wipe copy e DME wipe copy For an overview of the copy function see Copy and Swap page 79 Basic button operation The basic button operation is to hold down the copy sou
297. otherwise functionally identical This manual refers to these generically as the DVS 9000 system and describes principally the operation of the system using the CCP 8000 series of center control panels The User s Guide for the DVS 9000 system comprises two volumes Contents of Volume 1 Overview of functions of the DVS 9000 system and basic switcher operations including transitions keys and wipes Contents of Volume 2 DME effects snapshots keyframes and various operations such as setup which affect the overall system Devices and system nomenclature In this manual when discussing the principal components of the DVS 9000 system in place of the formal product names abbreviated names characterizing the functions and features are sometimes used When distinctions between system configurations must be drawn the terms in the second table on this page are used Principal components and naming The formal product names of the principal components of the DVS 9000 system and the terms used in this manual are as follows Formal product name Term used in this manual DVS 9000 9000SF Production Switcher Switcher or switcher processor Processor BKDS 9470 DME Board Set DME or DME board set CCP 8000 series Center Control Panel Control panel or center control panel DCU 8000 Device Control Unit DCU System nomenclature The following terms are used for systems depending on the combination of installed option
298. ou can carry out shotbox execution using the numeric keypad control block the Flexi Pad control block or the utility shotbox control block For details of operation see Chapter 15 Shotbox Volume 2 Shotbox Setup Overview of Setup Various settings are required in order to operate the switcher control panel DME external devices and so on connected together in a single system This is referred to as setup and you can carry out the setup operations from the Engineering Setup menu For details of the operations see Chapter 16 Engineering Setup Volume 2 The settings in the Engineering Setup menu are grouped under the following headings e System setup System Settings relating to the whole system see the following section System Setup e Panel setup Panel Settings particular to the control panel see page 149 e Switcher setup Switcher Settings particular to the switcher processor see page 151 e DME setup DME Settings particular to the DME processor see page 154 e DCU setup DCU DCU input and output settings see page 155 Router tally setup Router Tally Router interface and tally settings see page 155 System Setup The system setup settings apply to the whole system Here the whole system refers to all devices connected on the Control LAN The DCU is connected through the control panel but is also included in the whole system You can m
299. oup of the Edge Direction menu select one of the following Auto Trans Rate Use the transition rate set in the transition rate control block Independ Trans Rate Independent transition rate 2 If you selected Independ Trans Rate in step 1 adjust the following parameter Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Rate Independent transition rate 0 to 999 frames Executing a Transition Executing an Auto Transition ON ON ON ON 1234123412341234 eken kevi PST COLOR MX NORM Key revs WIPE rer SUPER MIX DME Fader lever ALL PRIOR SET NORM IREV rev AUTO TRANS a TRANS PVW AUTO TRANS button CUT button Transition control block standard type To execute a transition on the M E or PGM PST bank by a button operation use the following procedure in the transition control block For an overview of the auto transition see page 42 To carry out an instantaneous cut transition Press the CUT button To carry out a gradual transition Press the AUTO TRANS button This executes the transition at the preset transition rate see page 236 While the transition is executing the AUTO TRANS button lights amber When it complete
300. page 146 Note that the setup data in RAM can also be saved to the control panel hard disk or memory card Panel Setup In panel setup you carry out settings particular to the control panel You can make the following settings For details of the operations see Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Panel settings Config e MIE Assign Set the logical configuration of the M E and P P banks M E Operation For each of the M E and P P banks make operations possible not possible or disabled Enable Disable Inhibit DSK Fader Assign Carry out fader function assignment and key delegation for the key delegation buttons in each of the maximum of four downstream key control blocks External Bus Link Make link settings relating internal switcher buses to routing switcher destinations Key Trans Link Select whether or not to link transitions between keyers and if so which keyer to link to You can set the links between keyers for each M E bank separately Reference Module When a trackball module and a joystick module are both connected as device control blocks select which is used as the reference 10 Key Region Assign Assign any regions to the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block Program Button Make settings for using the buttons in a standard type transition control block for controlling a VTR Cross point button settings Xpt Assign e Multi Xpt
301. page 173 in the transition control block of the M E or PGM PST bank For details of operations Basic Operating Procedure page 224 In the M E banks and PGM PST bank you can change one of the images the background and keys 1 to 4 downstream keys 1 to 4 in the PGM PST bank and also vary combinations of these simultaneously The following are examples of transition Changing the background A background transition switches from the video currently selected on the background A bus the current video to the video selected on the background B bus the new video S y WARNER Background A Background B In the default selection of flip flop mode see page 43 the background always switches in the direction from the A bus to the B bus When the transition completes the cross point selections on the A and B buses are interchanged Transitions Inserting and deleting a key You can insert one or more of the four keys downstream keys on the PGM PST bank If you select a key which is already inserted the transition will delete the key A simultaneous combination of deleting and inserting keys is also possible Transition Key 2 Deleting key 1 and inserting key 2 Transitions 33 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoyoun4 0006 SAC_ JaldeuD Simultaneously changing the background and keys You can change any of the four keys downstream keys on t
302. pattern edge Soft edge Use the following procedure 1 Press Soft in the Keyl Wipe Adjust menu turning it on 2 Set the following parameter Knob 1 Parameter Soft Adjustment Edge softness Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 Setting the wipe position Positioner There are two methods of setting the wipe position using the device control block or in a menu Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions 323 s d M gsejdeyo s d M g saydeyo 324 To set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick You can also set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick in the device control block Use the following procedure 1 In the device control block press the M E1 M E2 M E3 or P P button turning it on The buttons in the device control block are assigned to the wipe position setting as follows Table 1 Buttons and assigned settings Button name Setting K1 CB1 Wipe position for independent key 1 transition K2 CB2 Wipe position for independent key 2 transition K3 FM1 Wipe position for independent key 3 transition K4 FM2 Wipe position for independent key 4 transition Table 2 Buttons assigned to functions Button name Function POS Toggle Position on or off X Y Fix the operating direction and enable setting of the wipe position from the numeric keypad CTR Return the pattern position to the center of the screen
303. perating control block Visual indications on cross point buttons The currently selected button in a row i e the last button pressed lights amber or red Amber low tally The signal selected on the bus does not form part of the program output from the switcher Red high tally The signal selected on the bus forms part of the program output from the switcher XPT cross point HOLD buttons Turning one of these buttons on enables you to recall a keyframe or snapshot while keeping the current cross point selection unchanged When the XPT HOLD button in the key 1 or key 2 row is on then the operation is as follows depending on the setting in the Setup menu When the panel setup is Normal The operation is as follows depending on the setting in switcher setup Key Disable The snapshot or keyframe is recalled without changing the current key settings Xpt Hold The snapshot or keyframe is recalled without changing the current cross point selection When the panel setup is Protect The cross point settings cannot be changed by pressing panel buttons Key bus selection buttons KEY3 button Press this button turning it on to assign the key 1 cross point buttons to the key 3 fill bus KEY4 button Press this button turning it on to assign the key 2 cross point buttons to the key 4 fill bus UTIL utility button While this button is held down the cross point buttons
304. ple mode key type clean mode including the plane setting for chroma keying key position key inversion and adjustment values for the particular key type Clip Gain Density Filter etc This includes color vector key wipe pattern key key wipe pattern key and chroma key However in the case of a chroma key it excludes color cancel Y balance foreground CCR window and shadow Full mode All settings except transition the same parameters as simple mode Fine Key key modifiers main and sub mask settings chroma key detailed settings and so on Key Snapshots Key settings other than the key on off status and the key priority can all be instantaneously saved in a dedicated register for recall when required A key snapshot comprises three values a cross point button number key memory full mode and independent key transition and can be called in any combination There are four key snapshot registers for each keyer For details of key snapshot operations see Key Snapshots page 299 Blink Keys The blink function provides the following effects Key blink The key is inserted and deleted at the specified frequency You can also set the frequency and the proportion of the cycle for which the key is inserted Edge blink Key fill and key edge fill are interchanged at the specified frequency You can specify both the frequency and the proportion of the cycle for which the interchange occurs The blink setti
305. preference button 197 User programmable DME Notes on keyframe cre ation 343 patterns 342 transition mode 342 USER regions 124 UTIL button 171 Utility 143 Utility shotbox control block 199 V V K mode 74 VF buttons 216 Video processing 24 286 signal adjustment 49 switching 153 Video process 83 memory 84 settings 379 VTR control 121 W Wave 101 Window adjustment 49 269 WIPE 174 176 208 Wipe 41 56 copy 80 Index 385 xepu x pul Ni 386 enhanced 56 mosaic 56 position 315 323 random diamond dust 56 rotary 56 standard 56 swap 80 Wipe direction 310 323 selection buttons 175 201 208 Wipe modifiers 309 Wipe pattern aspect ratio 317 326 edge modification 311 key 50 modifiers 59 modulation 319 replication 317 326 rotation 316 selection 304 types 56 variation 59 Wipe pattern modifier combi nations 320 Wipe settings 153 304 for independent key transi tions 322 Wipe snapshot 67 327 deleting 330 recalling 329 saving 328 Wire frames 95 X XPT HOLD buttons 171 195 status display 202 Y Y balance 49 adjustment 269 Z Zabton 52 278 294 Z ring 186 Index The material contained in this manual consists of infor mation that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equip ment described in this manual Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any pur po
306. quired The following manual adjustments are possible Key active When this function is off only the foreground is output and you can make adjustments of color cancel see the next paragraph Color cancel If the foreground image includes shades of the background color set this function to ON to remove the color from the foreground image Chroma key window You can adjust the range over which the key signal is determined as matching the specified hue When this adjustment is off the default ranges are used Chroma keying generates a key signal based on a particular color reference color in the foreground typically a plain blue background and the window refers to the range of colors which are regarded as matching this specified reference color to create the key signal As seen on a vectorscope that is in the hue saturation color space the range for this matching corresponds to a truncated sector This range is specified by two parameters the Angle parameter which determines the range of the hue parameter and the Crop parameter which determines the degree of truncation see the following figure gt Reference color specified by Hue setting Range of colors remaining Range of colors creating the key signal as foreground to be replaced by background signal a The Crop and Angle values do not change even if you use the auto chroma key function Window adjustment Y balance In norm
307. r screen The x and y axes are defined parallel to the plane of the monitor screen and the z axis is defined perpendicular to Digital Multi Effects DME 85 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD the plane of the monitor screen The coordinates do not move even if the image moves Z Source coordinate space Target coordinate space Source coordinate space and target coordinate space For example as shown below the image moves in a different direction when you move it along the x axis of the source coordinate space and along the x axis of the target coordinate space Source coordinate space Target coordinate space Movement along the x axes of the source coordinate space and target coordinate space Local coordinate space and global coordinate space The coordinates of an individual DME channel are called its local coordinate space The coordinates common to all channels are called the global coordinate space By switching from local to global coordinate space you can add new movement to the movement of images in individual channels and also apply transformation effects to multiple channels that have been combined by Global effects page 113 86 Digital Multi Effects DME Rotation around y axis in i local coordinate space Se ri i i I O Rotation around y axis n global coordinate space
308. r settings depend on the key type and whether the separate edge function is active To activate the separate edge function press Separate Edge setting it on in the Edge menu for the key e Separate edge off Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Border width 0to 38 0 to 100 4 Density Border density 0 to 100 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 276 is on the setting value range is 0 to 4 b When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type e Separate edge on The border width settings can be made independently for left right top and bottom sides The separate edge function is only available when luminance key linear key or chroma key is selected as the key type Knob __ Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Left Left edge width 0to 8 3 Right Right edge width 0to8 4 Bottom Bottom edge width 0to8 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 276 is on the setting value range is 0 to 4 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 291 shey p 13 dey9 shay vp sa deyo 292 To adjust the edge fill color When BDR is selected the MORE button lights amber Pressing the MORE button to turn it green then allows you to adjust the edge fill color parameters with the knobs Knob __ Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 to 100 2 Saturat
309. r the output signals from each of the Output to 48 ports The setting is the number of scan lines from the reference blanking position of field 1 for the particular format which should be masked Through Mode Enable or disable through mode Through mode can be enabled for AUX1 to 48 outputs M E and PGM PST program outputs and clean output Safe Title Enable or disable safe title and carry out settings for box 1 and 2 and cross Ref Output Phase Set the reference output mode and phase adjustment Settings relating to video switching Transition Transition Preview Specify the operation mode for transition preview for each of the M E and P P banks Key Transition Specify the operation mode for independent key transitions Bus Toggle Switch the bus toggle for each of the M E and P P banks on or off Split Fader When the bus toggle is off the split fader settings are enabled For each of the M E and P P banks select enable or disable Fade To Black Enable or disable fade to black for each final program output Preset Color Mix Set the stroke mode for a preset color mix the key status for a transition including a key and the mode in which the transition type after a transition ends returns to the previous setting Transition Curve Set the relationship when carrying out a transition between the fader lever position and the advancement state of the transition Key wipe and frame memory settings Key Wipe FM Key Memory
310. ram signal depending on the on air status Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jeu 04u00 pue snuey z seldeup jeueg OJU0D pue snua z JeldeuD 194 Auxiliary Bus Control Block KEY button 2ND button AUX delegation buttons RTR button Selected source name displays DEST button Level selection buttons LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL LEVEL 3 4 z Ee OULU bL oo0ogoo0o0g Hk O O fe oe OMe OMe Fuss Fas EDIT Pw TP DEST SHIFT dee air Ale Oo ocoog i oggoe OOO logoga in Te ie Cross point buttons 1st SHIFT button Source name displays 2 XPT HOLD buttons Selected bus display AVX delegation buttons FMS 1 frame memory source 1 and Press one of these buttons turning it on to FMS 2 buses select the bus to which to assign the cross DME 1V to DME 4V buses point buttons in the auxiliary bus control DME 1K to DME 4K buses block EDIT PVW preview bus The buses that can be selected are as M E 1 UTILITY 1 and M E 1 UTILITY follows 2 buses e AUX buses 1 to 48 e M E 2 UTILITY 1 and M E 2 UTILITY MONITOR 1 to MONITOR 8 2 buses Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel M E 3 UTILITY 1 and M E 3 UTILITY 2 buses P P UTILITY 1 and P P
311. rce button then press the destination button You can undo the last operation using Undo in the menu see page 373 M E copy button operation In the Flexi Pad control block of each M E bank use the SNAPSHOT button Basic Copy and Swap Operations 373 dems pue Adop 6 Jaydeyo dems pue Adoy 6 Jajdeyo 374 To copy from M E 1 to M E 2 In the M E 1 Flexi Pad control block hold down the SNAPSHOT button then press the SNAPSHOT button in the M E 2 Flexi Pad control block Keyer copy button operation To specify the copy source use the key delegation buttons in the key control block and to specify the copy destination use the key delegation buttons in the independent key transition control block To copy from M E 1 key 1 to M E 2 key 2 In the key control block M E delegation buttons press M E1 turning it on then hold down the KEY 1 button and in the M E 2 independent key transition control block press the KEY2 button Wipe copy button operation Use the WIPE button in the Flexi Pad control block of each M E bank To copy the M E 1 wipe to the M E 2 wipe In the M E 1 Flexi Pad control block hold down the WIPE button then press the WIPE button in the M E 2 Flexi Pad control block DME wipe copy button operation Use the DME button in the Flexi Pad control block of each M E bank To copy the M E 1 DME wipe to the M E 2 DME wipe In the M E 1 Flexi Pad control block hold down the DME
312. re the Key Frame menu Menu Operations Selecting an item Use the following procedure 1 Press the VF button 1 to 7 for the desired group of items The HF button 1 to 7 indications change to show the items within the selected group 2 Press the HF button for the desired item The indications in the status area and function button area change and you can now make various changes to the selected item Selecting a function Press the appropriate function button within the function button area Shape and color of the button Pressing the button turns it on and it lights showing the state Lit pale blue The function is enabled and the parameters can currently be adjusted with the knobs Lit orange The function is enabled Lit purple Execution button Pressing the button immediately executes the function Example Auto Start button in the Chroma Adjust menu Chroma Adjust Pressing a button of this type displays a further menu allowing more detailed settings Example Chroma Adjust button in the Type menu Setting parameters This marking on a function button indicates that there are parameters which can be adjusted with the knobs Pressing this function button assigns parameters to the knobs You can set the parameter values by any of the following methods e Turn the knob 1 to 5 corresponding to the parameter to adjust the value e Press the knob parameter buttons 1 to 5
313. reeze to return to the state immediately before the freeze press Undo in the lt Freeze gt group Frame Memory Operations 357 Aioway ewes 7 Jajdeyo oway ewes 7 Ja deyo 358 All freeze images written to temporary memory are lost when the system is powered off Saving a processed image To save a processed image as a file in the Edit gt Composite menu use the following procedure 1 Press Store The keyboard window appears The default file name imaget where is a three digit number is input In the keyboard window enter the file name maximum 8 characters In the keyboard window press the Enter button This saves the freeze image as a file in memory Selecting the way in which images are combined To select the way in which the background image and input signal are combined see page 75 use the following procedure 1 In the lt Type gt group of the Edit gt Composite menu select one of the following methods of combination e Pattern Key pattern key e Ext Key external key This can only be selected when the pair mode is enabled The signal selected on the frame memory source 2 bus is used as the key signal e Mix mix e NAM non additive mix If none of the above is selected image combination is not carried out Depending on the selection in step 1 set the following parameters e When Pattern Key is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 S
314. region Regions applicable to snapshot operations Sixteen regions that is the above regions less the four types of external devices USER regions You can optionally assign the following regions to the regions USER1 to USERS8 e Color backgrounds 1 and 2 e AUXI to AUX48 e Monitor 1 to 8 e Frame Memory to 8 For details of the USERI to USERS region assignment see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Reference region When multiple regions are selected only one region appears in the displays for menu and numeric keypad operations This is called the reference region Regions and Registers The reference region is determined according to the following precedence M E1 gt M E2 gt M E3 gt P P gt USER1 gt USER2 gt USER3 gt USER4 gt USERS gt USER6 gt USER7 gt USER8 gt DME1 gt DME2 gt DME3 gt DME4 gt P BUS Master region The regions saved in a master snapshot register or master timeline register and the register numbers saved in such regions can be recalled at a time as the master region The master region can be saved or recalled using the numeric keypad control block Registers A register is an area of memory in a device which holds a snapshot keyframe and so on Keyframe effect registers Dedicated effect registers There are 99 dedicated registers for keyframe effects in each region numbered 1 to 99 Shared user programmable DME regis
315. ress this button turning it on to enable adjusting the parameters allocated to the knobs in the menu using the trackball and Z ring In the case of the DME menu the operation applies to the selected DME channel Device Control Block Joystick All functions of the joystick type device trackball and Z ring operations are carried control block are equivalent to the functions out with the joystick of the trackball type except that the MENU button Region selection buttons Joystick Operating buttons Joystick Moving the joystick sideways controls the tape transport disk operation at a speed determined by the operating buttons Move to the right for the normal direction and to the left for the reverse direction By moving this you can carry out operations in the x y and z axes When the effect run control mode is enabled By moving the joystick sideways you can run the keyframe effect independent of the STOP NEXT KF EFF LOOP and similar settings in the keyframe control block Move to the right to run the effect in the normal direction and to the left for the reverse direction When the VTR disk recorder operation mode is enabled Names and Functions of Parts of the Contro
316. rization 100 Source coordinate space 85 name displays 195 Space button 220 Speed 62 Sphere 108 Spin 92 Spiral 66 320 Split 60 104 311 fader 257 slide 104 Spring 66 319 Standard wipe patterns 56 Start up state 146 Status area 216 STOP NEXT KF button 190 Sub subsidiary mask 53 54 using 282 295 SUPER MIX 174 208 Super mix 40 settings 233 Swap 79 372 Swirl 108 Switcher setup 151 System configuration 145 features 22 reset 147 setup 145 T Tally interface setup 155 Target coordinate space 85 TC button 218 Temporary attributes 128 142 Three dimensional coordinate space 85 parameter display 97 parameters 87 transformations 85 Time offset execution 37 Timecode input mode 236 Top menu selection buttons 197 TRACE button 182 Trail 110 TRANS PVW button 175 209 Transformation operation modes 90 Transition auto 42 execution 42 235 indicator 206 manual 43 next 32 operating procedure 224 preview 44 247 Transition control block compact type 207 simple type 200 standard type 173 Transition execution section 174 201 208 with the fader lever 243 Transition indicator 174 208 function 235 Transition rate 236 display 174 208 setting by a menu opera tion 239 setting in the Flexi Pad control block 237 setting in the numeric key pad control block 238 Transition type 39 selecting by a menu opera tion 232 selection buttons 174 201 208 Trim button 219 Twist 102 U UNDO button 178 202 User
317. rn Yes Yes Yes Yes No replication Pairing Yes Yes No No No Q Modulation Yes Yes Yes No No z ne H V oy Modulation No 9 Yes No No No a Fringe Spring No 9 Yes No No No p Spiral No Yes No No No a Not patterns 1 to 16 19 and 20 b Not patterns 300 to 303 c Not patterns 100 to 103 150 151 516 518 604 and 606 d Not patterns 1 to 8 17 and 18 e Not patterns 220 to 223 f Not patterns 19 and 20 g But patterns 21 23 and 24 are possible h But patterns 21 and 23 are possible Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 321 s d M g saydeyo 322 Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions You carry out independent key transition wipe setting operations using the Wipe Adjust menu for each keyer For an overview of independent key transitions see page 35 This section describes the independent key transition wipe settings taking the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust menu as an example Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings Accessing the independent key transition wipe settings menu As an example to access the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust menu carry out either of the following operations e In the menu control block select the top menu selection button M E 1 and select VF1 Keyl and HF6 Transition to display the Transition menu for key 1 then press Wipe Adjust e In the independent key transition control block of the M E
318. rol block select the background video with the background A row of cross point buttons Select the way in which the transition will affect the image using the next transition selection buttons in the transition control block For an overview see Selecting the Next Transition page 32 To change the background Press the BKGD button turning it on To insert or delete a key Press one of the KEY 1 to KEY4 buttons or DSK1 to DSK4 buttons in the PGM PST bank turning it on To enable the key priority setting which determines the key overlay order after the transition Press the KEY PRIOR button turning it on You can press more than one button at the same time To change the keys and background presets in Setup menus simultaneously Press the ALL button To allocate a particular next transition button to the ALL button function see Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 224 Basic Operating Procedure 3 For the transition to change the key priority set the priority for after the transition For details of the key priority see Selecting the key priority page 34 For details of the key priority setting operation see Key Priority Setting page 227 Select the new video used for the transition e In the background B row of cross point buttons select the new background video e When inserting a key select the key signal and make any required settings
319. ry out the transition in the transition execution section For a gradual transition such as a mix or wipe Press the TAKE button or operate the fader lever See Setting the Transition Rate page 236 and Pattern Limit page 239 as required Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority You can check the output status of keys 1 and 2 and the key priority setting in the key status display in the transition control block The key status display includes two ON indicators corresponding to keys and 2 Display of the key output status When the key is inserted in the output from the M E or PGM PST bank the indication ON lights and when it is not inserted the indication goes off Key priority display The key lying in front on the program monitor has an indication OVER lit To set the key priority use the Misc gt Key Priority menu for the M E or PGM PST bank For details see Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation page 229 Split Fader What does split fader mean The term split fader refers to the function of carrying out a transition with the fader lever split into left and right halves so that the background A and background B buses can be manipulated separately To use the split fader the following conditions must be met e The fader lever is in bus fixed mode See Settings Relating to Video Switching Transition Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 e The
320. s The KEY 1 and KEY2 buttons go off and the system changes to the background transition mode To insert or delete key 1 Hold down the KEY 1 button and press one of the MIX NAM WIPE and DME buttons To insert or delete key 2 Hold down the KEY2 button and press one of the MIX NAM WIPE and DME buttons To insert or delete key 1 and key 2 simultaneously Hold down the KEY 1 and KEY2 buttons and press one of the MIX NAM WIPE and DME buttons To use a super mix or preset color mix Select Super Mix or Preset Color Mix in the Misc gt Transition menu for the M E or PGM PST bank To set the key priority use the Misc gt Key Priority menu for the M E or PGM PST bank For details see Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation page 229 Select the new background for after the transition e Select the background video with the background B row of cross point buttons e To insert a key select the key signal and make various settings as required For details of key settings see Chapter 4 Keys page 261 Depending on the transition type selected in step 2 make the required settings For details of the settings see the following sections Super mix Super Mix Settings page 233 Preset color mix Color Matte Settings page 234 Wipe Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings page 304 DME Wipe Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings page 332 5 Car
321. s and the signal format 20 Introduction System configuration and features Term for system A system in which the center control panel has 4M E system four M E banks A system in which the center control panel has 3M E system three M E banks A system in which the center control panel has 2M E system two M E banks Related manuals The following manuals are supplied with the individual products of the DVS 9000 Production Switcher system DVS 9000 9000SF C Switcher Processor Pack e DVS 9000 9000SF C Operation Manual DVS 9000 9000SF C Installation Manual BKDS 9470 DME Board Set e BKDS 9470 Operation Manual BKDS 9470 Installation Manual CCP 8000 Center Control Panel Pack e CCP 8000 Operation Manual e CCP 8000 Installation Manual DCU 8000 Device Control Unit Pack e DCU 8000 Operation Manual e DCU 8000 Installation Manual Introduction 21 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD Features of the DVS 9000 Production Switcher System The DVS 9000 Production Switcher system boasts extensible high performance and multifunctionality The following are some of the principal features of this system System configuration flexibility SDTV support This system supports the SDTV signal formats 480i 59 94 and 5761 50 The format selection can be switched by a simple control panel operation Extensible system configuration By suitable combination of options
322. s an example the functionality is the same however on the PGM PST bank Normally when a background transition is carried out on an M E bank the signals selected on the A and B rows of cross point buttons are interchanged at the end of the transition That is to say except during a transition the background output is always from the background A bus This is called flip flop mode The alternative is known as bus fixed mode in which there is no bus interchange In this mode when the fader lever is at the top of its travel the output from the A bus is always 100 and when the fader lever is at the bottom of its travel the output from the B bus is 100 Flip flop mode a PORO MOOO0O a BOCE gt Bus fixed mode Fader s EOROO E lever Buttons lit Boone Flip flop mode and bus fixed mode For details of fader lever operation in bus fixed mode see page 245 Transitions 43 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 44 Transition preview With the preview output of the M E banks and PGM PST bank you can check the effect of a transition in advance To carry out a transition preview press the TRANS PVW button in the transition control block See Transition Preview page 247 In multi program mode DSK mode page 152 or bus fixed mode page 43 it is not possible to carry out a transition prev
323. s the button goes off To complete a partially executed transition instantaneously Press the CUT button The AUTO TRANS button goes off Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever Manual Transition To execute a manual transition with the transition control block fader lever use the following procedure For an overview of the manual transition see page 43 Executing a Transition 243 suonsuel g 13 deyo suomisuel g sa deyo 244 To carry out the transition completely Move the lever over the full range of its travel To pause a partly executed transition Stop moving the fader lever To resume a paused transition Resume moving the fader lever Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions Using the AUTO TRANS button the CUT button and the fader lever use the following procedures Moving the fader lever during an auto transition During an auto transition started by pressing the AUTO TRANS button operating the fader lever immediately enables the fader lever and the AUTO TRANS button goes off Thereafter the fader lever controls the progress of the transition Executing an auto transition after partly moving the fader lever e Press the CUT button to instantaneously complete the transition e Press the AUTO TRANS button to complete the rest of the transition at the preset transition rate If the transition rate is set to 100 frames and the fader lever has moved through 4 of the
324. sajdeyo 320 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears Press Spring turning it on Set the following parameters Knob 1 Gain Parameter Adjustment Degree of barrel distortion Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 66 Applying a spiral effect to the wipe pattern Spiral You can set the spiral function independently for the main and sub patterns Use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears Press Spiral turning it on 3 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Magnitude Size and direction of the spiral 100 00 to 100 00 2 Wave Speed Speed of the lateral waves 100 00 to 100 00 a See page 66 Possible combinations of wipe patterns and modifiers Yes Can be used No Cannot be used Modifiers Type of wipe Standard Enhanced Rotary Mosaic Random diamond dust Direction Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Split Yes Yes No Yes No Edge Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Positioner Yes Yes P Yes No No Rotation Yes Yes Yes No No Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings Modifiers Type of wipe Standard Enhanced Rotary Mosaic Random diamond dust Aspect ratio yes 4 Yes No No No Patte
325. sary to make any settings for DME2 e For the AUX bus operation from the Remote1 to Remote4 ports of the switcher the setting Enable Disable Manual in the Setup menu takes precedence Only when the setting is Manual the settings made in the Port Enable menu apply For details see Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu under Setup Relating to Switcher Processor in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Switching the safe title function on or off Use the following procedure 1 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button Misc and select VF2 Safe Title The Misc gt Safe Title menu appears Misc Menu Operations 2 Using any of the following methods select the signal to which the settings apply e Directly press the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob 1 Parameter Output Adjustment Signal to which the settings apply Setting values 1 to 48 It is not possible to change the setting for the output for which the safe title is set off in the Setup menu See Making safe title settings in Chapter 16 Volume 2 3 Press Safe Title to set it on or off Misc Menu Operations 377 934 NU W OSIN OL Ja deYyO 944 NU WN OSIN OL 4e deyD 378 AUX Menu Operations AUX Bus Settings Making video process settings for an AUX bus
326. se other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation Sony Corporation B amp P Company DVS 9000 9000SF Printed in Japan System WW http www sony net 2003 02 13 3 704 666 02 1 Printed on recycled paper 2002
327. sie tet sce athe E eee ST 57 Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers eeseeeeseseserserereesseeeereseee 59 M ep O S eee denon matye gree eae Se 67 DIVIBPWipeSZrccescesestesessecteccsessereteccceserecsece cccsersestecescessvacocesastecccereesecns cesses 68 Types oL DME Wipe Patter niae nen cess cere tece eee sees 68 DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers ce eeeeeeeeeee 70 Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects 0 71 DME Wipe Snapshots ee eceeeeceseeeeeeeeceeceeeaecsseeseensensaeenees 71 Frame Memory a eisessccsssesccvocsssssessceonscosssdessedessescsbonstcvevedsavsnsspentesesessonssoan 73 OVETVIEW erra See et ese a a eect oS eA leek ces 73 Frame Memory Functions ceecescecencecseceeeceeeeceseceeeecsseeeneeesees 74 Color Backgrounds s sesseseososeesseoossesossesoesesoeseosesoesseoessesossesoesesoesessssose 78 Copy and SWAP sesesssscesscassscscessas sensesesvasoeesissvessenciessessancossdensoasecssensoscasess 79 VideO PLOCESS eseressereesereesersessreessreessseessssessssesssssssecsesecseseesssesseseeees 83 Video Process Adjustment of a Primary Input Signal 83 Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus eee 83 Video Process Memory 0 00 ceeesecesceseessceseeesceeeeseeeseeeeecaeesaecseenaes 84 Digital Multi Effects DME cscccsssssessssscssessssssessscssssssssssssesseseeses 85 Three Dimensional Transformations eecceeeeceseceeeeceeeeeneeeeees 85 Transfor
328. sists of the following principal parts The status area display is the same for all except the Pattern Adjust Pattern Select File menus Frame Memory Operations Auto store status indication Available frame capacity Enable status display Reposition Lock status display Pair button Target FM selection buttons Page Frame Memory 2111 gt Recall gt Recall Thums S 00 00 00 00 Reposition Lock image001 image001 image002 image002 image004 image004 image005 image005 A i List B lt Select gt group Frame Memory menu Q FT w ne D N n 4 w 3 oO D 3 fe lt Auto store status indication This appears when the auto store function has been enabled in setup Available frame capacity This shows the remaining number of frames that can be stored When there is no remaining space the number 1 in pair mode and 0 in single mode is shown in red Target FM selection buttons These select which of the selected outputs the operation applies to When manipulating a saved image the file name appears Frame Memory Operations 349 oway ewes z Jaydeyo To the right of the button is shown the current frame memory output signal input signal and processing background signal status lt Out gt output signal status Blk when black signal is output Thr when input image is output Frz when a freeze is output Fil when still image file is output
329. sition See Setting the Transition Rate page 236 Basic Operating Procedure 225 suonisuel Ja deup suomisuel g sa deyp 226 When you have selected a wipe or DME wipe as the transition type you can also set the transition range See Pattern Limit page 239 For an instantaneous transition Press the CUT button For details see Executing a Transition page 235 Basic Operating Procedure Key Priority Setting You can select the key priority that is the order in which the keys are laid over each other in the current video and after the transition There are two ways of setting the priority either using the PRIOR SET button in the transition control block or using the Misc menu to access the Key Priority menu for the M E or PGM PST bank Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block The positions of the buttons used for the operation are as follows ON ON ON ON 1234123412341234 Next transition selection buttons KEY PRIOR button PRIOR SET button TRANS PVW Transition control block standard type Changing the currently inserted key priority Use the following procedure 1 If the next transition selection button KEY PRIOR is on press another next transition selection button to turn the KEY PRIOR
330. sition keys and wipe page 232 transitions page settings for the M E 1 bank 262 keys page 304 wipes M E 2 M E 2 Transition keys and wipe settings for the M E 2 bank M E 3 M E 3 Transition keys and wipe settings for the M E 3 bank P P PGM PST Transition downstream key and wipe settings for the PGM PST bank FRAME Frame Memory Frame memory settings page 348 MEM COLOR Color Bkgd Color background settings page 368 AUX MON Aux Mon Aux bus settings page 378 Q COPY Copy Swap Copy and swap settings page 372 D SWAP 3 MISC Misc Safe title settings page 376 9 DME DME DME special effect settings Chapter 11 Volume 2 s GLB EFF Global Effect Global effect settings Chapter 11 Volume 2 5 DEV Device Settings for external device Chapter 12 Volume 2 a operation 9 MCRO Macro Macro register settings Chapter 18 Volume 2 3 KEY Key Frame Keyframe settings Chapter 13 Volume 2 Y FRAME o EFF Effect Keyframe effect register settings Chapter 13 Volume 2 SNAP Snapshot Snapshot register settings Chapter 14 Volume 2 SHOT SHOTBOX Shotbox Shotbox register settings Chapter 15 Volume 2 FILE File File settings Chapter 17 Volume 2 ENG Engineering Setup Setup functions Chapter 16 Volume 2 SETUP Basic Menu Operations 211 jaueg OJUOD pue snua z Je deuD Menus accessed by pressing a button twice For certain buttons other than the top menu buttons together with the menus they selection buttons press
331. sition preview mode is maintained while this button is pressed Switching is made between the transition preview mode and normal mode every time this button is pressed Key status display For each of keys 1 to 4 the corresponding ON indicator lights when the key is inserted It also shows the priority 1 to 4 of each key PRIOR priority SET button While this button is held down you can set the key priority The setting mode when this button is pressed depends on whether or not the KEY PRIOR button is lit as follows e When the KEY PRIOR button is off the current key priority is set e When the KEY PRIOR button is lit the key priority after the next transition is set Press the KEY PRIOR button as required to switch between these two modes In either mode hold down the PRIOR SET button and press the button KEY 1 to KEY4 corresponding to the key you want to bring to the front Independent key transition execution section KEY1 TRANS transition to KEY4 TRANS DSK1 TRANS to DSK4 TRANS in the PGM PST block buttons Press the corresponding one of these buttons to cut key 1 to key 4 in or out automatically at the set transition rate When the key corresponding to the button appears in the final program output the button lights red and otherwise lights amber Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 209 jaueg 04u00 pue snua z seldeup Jaueg OuJU0D pue snua z Je deuD
332. sition rate see Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate page 250 For details of operation together with a common transition see Combining other transitions with independent key transitions page 36 To cut the key in or out instantaneously Press the KEY ON button on the keyer In an independent key transition the pattern limit function is not available Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a Menu Operation You can also select the required independent key transition type by a menu operation Use the following procedure 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first the desired one from VF1 Keyl to VF4 Key4 then HF6 Transition The Transition menu for the selected appears Select the required transition type in the lt Transition Type gt group If in the Setup menus you set insertion deletion as independent modes make the settings for insertion in the lt On Transition Type gt group and the settings for deletion in the lt Off Transition Type gt group Independent Key Transitions 249 suonisuel g Ja deuD suomisuel g sajdeyo Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate There are two ways of setting the transition rate using the Flexi Pad control block or numeric keypad control block to enter a numeric value or using the Key menu to access the Transition menu for the M E or PGM PST bank When the setup selection is for separate transition rates
333. ss point button row 1st row 2nd row Delegation operation Turn on the appropriate buttons in accordance with the signal assignment made in the Setup menu Signal Assignment and Selection Assigning signals to buttons Each of the 32 cross point buttons and reentry buttons has a corresponding button number to which you assign a signal Signal Selection In addition to the signals input to the PRIMARY INPUTS 1 to 80 connectors on the rear panel of the switcher you can also select signals generated within the switcher Each button has assigned to it a video signal and a key signal forming a pair You can set these video and key combinations in a Setup menu For details of Setup menu operations see Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Cross point button control block button numbers Shift button fed teed eth ed PL eI ate ei Lc IL x eeeeee
334. t Setting values 1 H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 2 V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same time The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest numbered channel When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings this changes the settings on the other channels by the same amount To return the DME wipe pattern position to the center of the screen In the lt Position gt group press Center Displaying and moving the position of the DME wipe pattern position select Use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF5 Modify The Modify menu appears In the lt Position Select gt group the one of the Top Left Top Right Bottom Left and Bottom Right buttons that is on indicates the current display position of the DME wipe pattern In the lt Position gt group press Position turning it on Depending on whether the DME wipe pattern is in one channel mode or two channel mode proceed as follows In one channel mode press 1st Ch turning it on In two channel mode from the lt Ch Select gt group select the corresponding channel You can select more than one channel at the same time To move the position of the DME wipe pattern press the button where you want to move to turning it on The DME wipe pattern displayed on the screen moves to the position of the specified
335. t Setting values 1 Width Border width 0 00 to 100 00 3 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 4 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 5 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 e When soft border is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Border width 0 00 to 100 00 2 Inner Soft Border inner softness 0 00 to 100 00 3 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 4 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 5 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same time The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest numbered channel When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings this changes the settings on the other channels by the same amount Setting the DME wipe position Positioner Use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF5 Modify The Modify menu appears 2 Depending on whether the DME wipe pattern is in one channel mode or two channel mode proceed as follows For a pattern in one channel mode press 1st Ch turning it on For a pattern in two channel mode from the lt Ch Select gt group select the corresponding channel You can select more than one channel at the same time Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 335 sedim AWG 9g Jeldeyo s d M JWG 9g Jeideyo 336 In the lt Position gt group press Position turning it on Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustmen
336. t cairr is a EEEE LEE 247 Independent Key Transitions ssesessesossesossesoeoossesossesossesossessosoesosose 248 Basic Independent Key Transition Operations seesesseeesseeesesee 248 Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a Menu Operation 249 Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate eee 250 HAG CHOI ETE E T E E 253 Fadeto BlacK Operation e e e E E E A ees 253 Setting the Fade to Black Transition Rate ssseseseeseeseserserseereeee 253 SIMpPleuMransitioMscccccssccssecscesesasecocessssccessesssscesocss seacesessesceassesseassacseeseess 255 Basic Operations for Simple Transitions 0 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeee 255 Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority 0 0 0 0 257 SplitiBade ret a e a E e E E ou stones ES EE 257 Independent Key Transitions With a Simple Transition Module 258 suomisuel g sajdeyo Basic Operating Procedure The positions of the principal buttons used for basic transition operation are as follows ON ON ON ON 1234123412341234 KeY4 L frev I fs Next transition selection buttons NORM REV from Transition type selection buttons TRANS Transition execution section Transition control block for standard transitions For basic transition operations use the following procedure 1 2 In the cross point cont
337. t execution with the key inserted With the key inserted it is deleted with the two transitions acting with a time offset Whichever button is pressed first when the common transition completes even if the independent key transition is still not completed the two end simultaneously Example When the independent key transition AUTO TRANS button is pressed later De rhe PL e The key is deleted Common i es key even if the wipe start transition mix start independent key transition has not completed Time offset execution with the key inserted Time offset execution with the key not inserted With the key not inserted it is inserted with the transition whose AUTO TRANS button is pressed first Since the key is then in the inserted state with the transition whose AUTO TRANS button is pressed later the key is deleted When the key is completely deleted both transitions complete Example 1 When the independent key transition AUTO TRANS button is pressed later Fs Hak The transition EOT Te key completes with the wipe start transition mix key deleted start Example 2 When the common transition AUTO TRANS button is pressed later Hek The transition nee ake completes with the key transition transition wipe key deleted mix start start Time offset execution with the key not inserted Transition Types Mix Selecting the transition type determines the way
338. t image and saves it in temporary memory For a freeze an image can be captured either as video frame a frame freeze or a video field field freeze When the system is powered off any freeze images written to temporary memory are lost Frame Memory Saving an image store You can save an image in temporary memory which has been placed with the freeze function as a file in memory You can save a single image in a single file and apply a name of up to eight characters to the file When the system is powered off the file saved in memory is erased but you can restore it in the Frame Memory menu See Restoring Files page 364 Recalling an image You can recall an image file saved in memory and allocate to any of the FM1 to FM8 outputs Processing an image You can combine the background image a still image file allocated to any of FM1 to FM8 a freeze image written to temporary memory or a black signal and the input signal The following types of processing are available Pattern key Using the signal from a dedicated pattern generator you can cut out the background image and insert the signal selected on the frame memory source bus or a color matte signal You can adjust the size and position of the pattern and add modifiers External key When processing an image in FM1 3 5 7 you can use the signal selected on the frame memory source bus 2 to cut out the background image and fill with the sign
339. t the corresponding point in the transition e If End is less than Start as the transition proceeds it changes from the sub pattern to the main pattern Dust mix You can apply the effect of a diamond dust wipe to a selected pattern You can also apply the diamond dust wipe effect to the pattern resulting from a pattern mix See Pattern Mix page 307 When the pattern mix function is off turning dust mix on results in the main pattern and the diamond dust pattern being mixed This state is the same as a pattern mix when the diamond dust pattern is selected for the sub pattern 58 Wipes Main and sub modifier link function When carrying out a pattern mix it is possible to link the modifier settings for the main pattern and sub pattern There are two modes for this function FULL LINK fully linked mode In this mode all modifier settings are the same for the main pattern and sub pattern Changing the modifier settings for one pattern automatically changes the settings for the other SEMI LINK semi linked mode Only the parameter settings of the modifiers are linked The modifier on off settings are not linked When the parameter values for the modifiers of the main pattern and sub pattern are different then after this link mode is selected changing the value of a parameter for one pattern changes the value of the parameter for the other pattern to maintain the same difference between the two When carrying out a w
340. t the desired pattern The parameters change according to the selected pattern and you can adjust the pattern e When a polygon wipe is selected pattern number 49 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No Number of points 3 to 64 2 Star Rate Angularity of star 100 00 to 100 00 a A value of 100 00 completely removes the star rays leaving a circle at 100 00 the rays are at their sharpest e When a mosaic wipe is selected pattern numbers 200 to 203 206 to 213 224 to 247 250 to 257 260 to 269 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Tile No Number of tiles horizontally 2 to 36 2 V Tile No Number of tiles vertically 2 to 18 e When a karaoke wipe is selected pattern numbers 220 to 223 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Start Position of start tile 100 00 to 100 00 2 Row No Number of rows of tiles 1 to 36 3 Phase Delay for next row 100 00 to 100 00 a At 100 00 tiles appear from the top or left edge of the screen at 100 00 from the bottom or right edge of the screen b At 100 00 all rows appear simultaneously at 100 00 until one row of tiles is completely displayed the next row does not start to appear Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 305 s d M gJsejdeyo s d M g Jaydeyo e When a random wipe is selected pattern number 273 Knob P
341. t the fade to black transition rate Fade to Black Knob 1 Parameter Transition Rate Adjustment Transition rate Setting values 0 to 999 frame count Simple Transition The simple transitions refer to the transitions carried out using the simple type transition control block or simple type independent key transition control block Key transition selection buttons Key status display Transition type selection buttons 100 Transition execution section Transition control block simple right hand type Basic Operations for Simple Transitions Carrying out a transition using a simple type transition control block Use the following procedure Simple Transition 255 suonsuel Ja deuD suomisuel g sajdeyo 256 1 2 Simple Transition With the background A row of cross point buttons in the cross point control block select the background video Using one of the following methods select the way in which the transition will affect the image Use a combination of the transition type selection buttons MIX NAM WIPE and DME and the next transition selection buttons KEY 1 and KEY2 For an overview of the mix NAM wipe and DME wipe transition types see Transition Types page 39 To change the background only Press one of the MIX NAM WIPE and DME button
342. tates 171 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jaueg 04u00 pue snua z seldeup jeueg OuJU0D pue snua z Je deuD 172 ME bank display This indicates the notional mix effect bank name to which the particular M E or PGM PST bank is assigned as a four character identifier Macro buttons PRE MCRO pre macro button Use this button to set a macro attachment in pre macro mode A macro attachment for macro only mode can also be set by using this button in combination with a macro only set button POST MCRO post macro button Use this button to set a macro attachment in post macro mode A macro attachment for macro only mode can also be set by using this button in combination with a macro only set button MCRO ATTCH ENBL macro attachment enable button When this button is on the macro attachments set for the buttons of the M E bank are enabled and it is possible to execute macros using the buttons of the M E bank Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Transition Control Block Standard Type In the transition control block you can modify the output of the M E bank or PGM PST bank and perform transitions Both common transition and independent key transition operations are possible PRIOR SET button Next transition selection buttons Key status display ON ON ON ON 1234123412341234 SUPER MIX Mot
343. tern numbers 1901 to 1999 one channel mode 2901 to 2999 two channel mode DME Wipes 69 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 70 For details of creating keyframe effects see Creating User Programmable DME Patterns page 342 e To use the split page turn and page roll effects requires the MKS 8830M Nonlinear Effect Board to be installed in the DVS 9000 system e Note that for an independent key transition only the slide split squeeze door frame in out and user programmable DME patterns are available Signals forming part of the background for a DME wipe In two channel mode or flip tumble and so on in addition to the signals on the A and B buses a background signal may be visible This background is normally supplied by the UTIL2 bus signal DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers DME Wipes You can modify the selected DME wipe pattern in the same way as an ordinary wipe pattern as follows For the setting operations see Setting DME Wipe Modifiers page 333 Direction You can set the DME wipe direction to normal reverse or alternating normal reverse page 59 except for a key transition which is always in normal reverse mode Border You can apply a border or soft border see page 60 except for DME wipes in the independent key transition control block with which this modifier cannot be used In the case of a user programmable DME pattern in which a
344. ters In addition to the 99 DME registers for each region i e each channel there are also shared registers for each processor as shown in the following table These are used for user programmable DME Register number Register allocation 101 to 199 Shared register for one channel effects 201 to 299 Shared register for two channel effects When operating with these shared registers be sure to select the appropriate regions depending on the number of channels When recalling registers in the 200 range select two consecutive channels for the regions as for example DME1 and DME2 Work register This is a temporary register used when editing keyframes Regions and Registers 125 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 126 When you recall an effect it is read from the effect register into the work register and when you save the contents of the work register are written to the effect register Master timeline registers There are 99 master timeline registers numbered 1 to 99 for each control panel They store keyframe effect regions and the register numbers saved in the regions Snapshot registers These are registers for snapshots and there are 99 numbered 1 to 99 for each region Master snapshot registers There are 99 master snapshot registers numbered to 99 for each control panel They store snapshot regions and the register numbers saved in the regions
345. th the key delegation buttons using a DME wipe CUT Instantaneously insert or delete the key selected with the key delegation buttons SHIFT When setting is made in the Setup menu to allow a different transition type for inserting or deleting a key it is possible to set the transition after the next transition while this button is held down Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 205 jauUeg JOUOD pue snua z seldeup jaueg OJU0D pue snua z Je deuD 206 Independent key transition execution section DSK1 downstream key 1 ON to DSK4 ON buttons Press these to instantaneously cut the downstream keys 1 2 3 and 4 in or when the downstream keys are already inserted cut them out When the key corresponding to the button appears in the final program output the button lights red and otherwise lights amber TAKE buttons These correspond to downstream keys 1 2 3 and 4 from left to right press to execute an auto transition The transition starts immediately and the button lights amber When the transition completes the button goes off Fader lever Move this to carry out a manual downstream key transition Transition indicator This comprises 30 LEDs which show the progress of the downstream key transition Key snapshot setting buttons K SS Key snapshot This enables key snapshot mode K SS STORE key snapshot store To save a key snapshot hold down this button and press the k
346. the background signal Linear key This is a type of luminance key but there is a reduced variability in gain allowing more precise adjustment Color vector key Keys The key signal is created from a combination of the luminance and chrominance components of the key source signal When perfect keying is not possible with a luminance key this allows a key signal to be created even if the luminance level is low provided that the colors have high saturation Clean mode In a luminance key linear key or color vector key you can enable the clean mode When the clean mode is on the key source does not affect the key fill which is added unchanged to the background This improves the keyed image quality but means that the part of the key fill signal which is not to be inserted must be completely black or it will color the background You set the clean mode with the Type menu of the respective keyer See Setting the key type in a menu page 263 Note that in the following situations the clean mode goes off and cannot be turned on e When the key type is a pattern key e When key inversion is on e When the key fill is a matte When the key edge is an outline When the key edge is normal with soft edge being on When fine key is on When the key positioner is on Chroma key A key signal based on a particular color is used to cut out the background and the key fill is then inserted The inserted signal is also referred t
347. the edge fill of a border drop border or shadow you can create a combination of color 1 and color 2 using a wipe pattern generated by the dedicated pattern generator Use the following procedure 1 In the lt Edge Fill gt group of the Edge menu select Matte then press Matte Adjust The edge fill Matte Adjust menu appears 2 In the lt Edge Matte gt group select Mix Color turning it on 3 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Softness Softness of pattern edge 0 00 to 100 00 3 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 244 a The patterns are the same as standard wipes For details see the appendix Wipe Pattern List Volume 2 To select the pattern display the Mix Pattern Select menu by pressing Mix Pattern in the edge fill Matte Adjust menu After selecting one of the patterns standard wipe patterns 1 to 24 displayed in the Mix Pattern Select menu you can adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Softness Softness of pattern edge 0 00 to 100 00 4 Adjust color and color 2 To adjust color press Color 1 and to adjust color 2 press Color 2 turning it on respectively and adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 S
348. the macro attachment settings When a macro attachment is disabled pressing the button does not cause execution of the assigned macro You can enable and disable macro attachments for the PGM PST bank and M E banks individually Clearing the macro attachments You can clear all of the macro attachments in a single operation Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 0s0000 164 Control Panel Example Configuration 1 With Standard Transition Modules ccscccceeeeees 164 Control Panel Example Configuration 2 With Simple Transition Modules ceseceeseceereceerees 166 Control Panel Example Configuration 3 With Compact Transition Modules eeeeecceeseeeerees 168 Eross PomtiGontrolBlocks se ren E teeters aeons E 169 Transition Control Block Standard Type eee ee ceeeeeeeeeeee 173 Flexi Pad Control Block Standard Type cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 177 Keys Control lOc kee e sree ca eaten A E EA 179 Device Control Block Track Oae a E E 183 Device Control Block Joystick E e R E A EAA 187 Keyframe Control Block ea EE E EEES 188 Numeric Keypad Control Block aee eE E EE 191 JENERO Blacks Oaktree a eee nee 193 INSEE AiR COO L A LOC Keenan o O ne O OO 194 Me C OO Oe e oe eee ae 197 Memory Card USB Adaptor Block 0 eee eeseseesecteceeeeeeeseees 198 Utility Shotbox Control BOCK eee eee eseesee ese ceeecsecnseeseeneees 199
349. ting it For example with the key not inserted if you select the transition type and carry out a transition this will be the setting when inserting a key Carry out the transition in the independent key transition execution section To insert or delete the key gradually with a mix or wipe transition Press the TAKE button To set the independent key transition rate using a simple type transition control block use the key 3 and key 4 Transition menus For details see Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate page 250 To cut the key in or out instantaneously Press the KEY 3 ON button or KEY 4 ON button In an independent key transition the pattern limit function is not available Chapter 4 Keys Key Setting Operations Using Menu cccsssssscsssssscsssscsssesseees 262 Ie Yes Ettin SAMICHUS e a E E scone ste eects eee ee 262 KG yeliy Pers CLun ewe emer ee sree esti Cee E ee 263 Chroma Key Compositions te eee 265 Chroma Key Adjustments eee tee eee ee 266 Selecting Key Fill and Key Source eee ceseeseceeceseceeeeeeee 271 Kev Edse Modifications secs ses etree eee E 273 IMT aS grat ertcengs tame tcarters me ssantan A e e aL 279 AN oy Daine DING I B AEO 2 IRONY coooa 283 Specifying the Key Output Destination cece eeeeeteeee 284 SINK BUM TOM oa ee tac b2cs EE E E AER EI EES 285 Video ProceSSiN T oea aea E REE e EE EER E E IPEER 286 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block
350. tings of each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks To carry out DME wipe snapshots requires the BKDS 9470 DME Board Set The rest of this section describes the snapshots that apply to a particular region or regions Snapshot Attributes An individual snapshot may also have attached special conditions relating to switcher or DME operation when the snapshot is recalled These conditions are called attributes of the snapshot and can be added when the snapshot is saved or recalled Types of attribute There are five snapshot attributes as follows Cross point hold When the snapshot is recalled the cross point button selection remains unchanged This can be set independently for each bus Key disable When the snapshot is recalled the key settings remain unchanged This can be set independently for each keyer Effect dissolve The transition from the state before the snapshot recall to the snapshot settings is carried out smoothly by a dissolve The dissolve duration can be set in the Snapshot menu Auto transition An auto transition starts the instant the snapshot is recalled The auto transition setting is valid only for M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 and PGM PST If both effect dissolve and auto transition are selected as attributes the auto transition takes precedence GPI output A GPI output is sent to the allocated GPI port the instant the snapshot is recalled The trigger type depends on the switcher GPI output setti
351. tion When you recall an effect the currently recalled effect is automatically saved in a register This is called the auto save function You can disable this function in a Setup menu Effect Attributes An individual effect may also have attached special conditions relating to switcher or DME operation when the effect is recalled These conditions are called attributes of the effect and can be added when the keyframe effect is saved or recalled Type of attribute The attribute that can be attached to an effect is as follows Effect dissolve The transition from the state before the effect recall to the state at the effect start point is carried out smoothly by a dissolve The dissolve duration can be set in the Effect menu Temporary attributes When a keyframe is recalled independently of the attributes held in the register you can also enable or disable temporary attributes These temporary attributes are set when the keyframe effect is recalled Effect Editing For editing operations such as to insert delete or modify a keyframe it is necessary to stop the effect at the corresponding point on the time axis This is termed an edit point Keyframes You can edit either on a keyframe within the effect or at any point between keyframes Insert Insert the current image as a keyframe Inserting a keyframe in an existing effect may change the duration of the effect see page 131 Modify Modify a keyfram
352. to select the signal on that bus Reentry buttons These allow you to select the video created on another bank as background A or B or one of the keys 1 to 4 For example to use the video created on the M E 1 bank as background B on the M E 2 bank press the reentry button M E 1 in the background B row of buttons on the M E 2 bank Cross point button numbers This description applies to the example of a 32 button system From the left the first 31 buttons are numbered 1 2 30 31 When the 32nd button is set to be a SHIFT button these buttons can also be switched to select signals numbered from 32 to 62 While the SHIFT button is held down these switch to numbers 32 to 62 or alternatively every time the button is pressed switching is made between numbers to 31 and 32 to 62 Similarly the reentry buttons can be switched between two sets of numbers 121 to 123 and 125 to 127 Both the assignment of the 32nd button to a SHIFT button and the selection of the button operation mode can be done in a Setup menu Assigning signals to button You can assign a signal to each button using the Setup menu This assignment is common to the cross point buttons in the M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 and PGM PST banks and the auxiliary bus control block According to the settings made in the menu the video and key signals are assigned to the cross point buttons in pairs You can also make separate signal assignments for each o
353. to the background without cutting out with key source When chroma key is selected Select Chroma Adjust to access the Chroma Adjust menu see page 266 and make the required settings When a wipe pattern key is selected In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu see page 304 select the pattern and set any modifiers then return to the M E 1 gt Key1 menu When a key wipe pattern key is selected In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust menu see page 322 carry out pattern selection and modifier setting then return to the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu For a wipe pattern selected for a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key the Edge and Direction modifier settings are not available Set the parameters Key Setting Operations Using Menus 263 skey vp saydeyp shay vp da deyo 264 e When a luminance key or linear key is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Reference level for generating the 109 58 to 7 30 key signal Gain Key sensitivity 100 00 to 100 00 Density Key density 0 00 to 100 00 Filter Filter coefficient 1to9 a Setting this value to 1 produces the through state in which no filter is applied The larger the value the more strongly the filter applies e When a chroma key is selected Knob 3 Parameter Density Adjustment Key density Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 When a color vector key is selected
354. tput The current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of the transition as the new video increases progressively to 100 then the current video is progressively reduced from 100 to zero in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100 SUPER MIX The current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of the transition as the new video is mixed while increasing progressively to 100 The current video is then progressively reduced from 100 to Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel zero in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100 PST preset COLOR MIX In the first transition the current video is replaced by the color matte in a mix dissolve then in the second transition the color matte is replaced by the new video also in a mix dissolve WIPE The current video is replaced by the new video using the wipe pattern selected in the Wipe menu DME A wipe type of transition is carried out using the DME effect selected in the DME Wipe menu Transition execution section Transition indicator This comprises 30 LEDs which show the progress of the transition Fader lever Move this to carry out a manual transition Transition rate display This shows the transition rate the time from the beginning of a transition to its completion set for an auto transition in frames You can set the transition rate using the numeric keypad control block
355. tton is pressed the edit point moves to the keyframe immediately after the current time Editing buttons ALL Press this button turning it on to select all keyframes in the effect FROM TO Press this button turning it on to enter numeric values from the numeric keypad control block and select a specified range of keyframes INS insert When this button is pressed a new keyframe is inserted after the current keyframe Pressing this button while holding down the SHIFT button inserts a new keyframe before the current keyframe MOD modify When this button is pressed the selected keyframe is modified with the values of the current keyframe When the edit point is between two keyframes the immediately preceding keyframe is modified You can also select multiple keyframes and modify them in a single operation At this time pressing this button while holding down the SHIFT button modifies all selected keyframes with the changed values taken as relative values DEL delete When this button is pressed the selected keyframe is deleted When the edit point is between two keyframes the immediately preceding keyframe is deleted You can also select multiple keyframes and delete them in a single operation COPY When this button is pressed the selected keyframe is copied You can also select multiple keyframes and copy them in a single operation PASTE When this button is pressed the deleted or copied keyfr
356. turns on a preselected set of the BKGD KEY 1 to KEY4 and KEY PRIOR buttons Make this setting in a Setup menu Transition type selection buttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to determine the type of the next transition When multi program mode is selected in the Setup menu see Settings for Switcher Configuration Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 two or more of the following buttons may light MIX In a background transition the new video fades in as the current video fades out During the transition the overall signal level is maintained at 100 In a key transition the key fades in for insertion or out for removal NAM non additive mix The current and new video signals are compared and the signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output The current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of the Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel transition as the new video increases progressively to 100 then the current video is progressively reduced from 100 to zero in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100 SUPER MIX The current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of the transition as the new video is mixed while increasing progressively to 100 The current video is then progressively reduced from 100 to zero in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100 PST preset COLOR
357. ty so that problems such as this do not occur e If you cancel the operation during a data transfer between frame memory and hard disk or memory card then an image which was not completely transferred will not be reproducible Avoid canceling such operations e When loading a still image file from hard disk or memory card if Freeze Enable in the Freeze menu is on the loaded still image file may sometimes be overwritten by the frame memory input image To avoid this when loading a file ensure that Freeze Enable is turned off Notes on saving or recalling a frame memory still image for or by a snapshot keyframe e Storing a frame memory still image for a snapshot or keyframe is simply storing a still image as it is on one of the eight frame memory outputs Similarly reproducing a frame memory still image by means of a snapshot or keyframe is simply reproducing a still image as it is on one of the eight frame memory outputs As concerns as a snapshot or keyframe settings in the Freeze menu Composite menu or other menus relating to frame memory have no effect e To reproduce a frame memory still image by recalling a snapshot or keyframe you must have the same still image that was present in the frame memory when you saved the snapshot or keyframe Therefore when saving a snapshot or keyframe using frame memory you must also save the still image to a storage media such as the hard disk Frame Memory 77 suonoun4 0006 SAC_
358. u Operations 221 jaueg JOUOD pue snua z seldeup Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Basic Menu Operations 222 Chapter 3 Transitions Basic Operating Procedure scccssssscescsssceccsssssccscsssccscsssesseseees 224 INC YPPLiOrity SCttinGcrrcscsesscssseccseccecosessesscsncesscasccacessssensscsseeseatscesscsesscesss 227 Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block 227 Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation eee 229 Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority 230 Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation 00 232 Super Mix SettiMnas2ccccccscscccescsassscsesssecsocssseseacescccssesccesecescasseccsesssarsneseese 233 Color Matt Settings cccsessessccosecesessseseroscncscsesessuacszesearcacscsseactecssecsusteesss 234 Executing a Transition rcccsesseccsecseesesesesccesesccsasscccsesssccecescarscascceseateaseeste 235 Mransitionmndic atO PUNCO ete eer nee cet es 235 Sioe LU TTSTTITOT REIS sec ccscpcsncscnescooqdsasboseosqons daossborcisSnoseoAeSeBAeR 236 Patterns etree E E ones 239 BXCCULMS ANPAULO MiranSitlOMes sees aeeroen E ences sess eee aces 243 Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever Manual Transition 243 Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions eeeeeeeees 244 INON SyNCsS tales tee eee ee ee ee ee ee ne eee eee 244 Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode cece eeeeeeeeeee 245 Transition Previle Wae
359. ually starting that is the delay until the first keyframe You can make this setting in the keyframe control block See Time Settings in Chapter 13 Volume 2 Note that changing the delay does not alter the duration of the effect Paths The term path refers to the specification of how interpolation is carried out from one keyframe to the next For details of the path setting procedure see Path Settings in Chapter 13 Volume 2 Switcher path settings Carry out path settings in the Key Frame menu For each menu the following settings are available M E 1 to M E 3 and P P menus Item Paths that can be set M E1 to M E3 P P All For each M E and PGM PST path settings for the following items are made simultaneously Key1 to Key4 Overall path settings for items relating to keys Key 1 All to Key 4 All 1 to 4 are made simultaneously Source Key source path for keys 1 to 4 Fill Key fill path for keys 1 to 4 Proc Proc path for keys 1 to 4 Trans Transition path for keys 1 to 4 Bkgd Util Overall path settings for items relating to Bkgd Util All oe a utility buses are made Bkgd A Path for background A Bkgd B Path for background B Util 1 Path for utility 1 Util 2 Path for utility 2 Wipe DME Wipe Overall path settings for items relating to wipes Wipe Wipe DME and DME wipes are made simultaneously Wipe All Wipe Path for wipes DME Wipe Path for DME wip
360. use the main mask and subsidiary mask independently or at the same time For an overview of the masks see page 53 Key Setting Operations Using Menus 279 skey p saydey shay vp da deyo 280 Using the main mask For example to use the main mask for key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF3 Main Mask The Main Mask menu appears 2 In the lt Mask Type gt group select the mask type Key Mask Masks a part of a key Bkgd Mask Masks a part of a background 3 In the lt Mask Source gt group select the mask source Box signal from the dedicated box generator Pattern signal from the dedicated pattern generator 4 Set the mask source parameters When a box is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Top position 100 00 to 100 00 2 Left Left position 100 00 to 100 00 3 Right Right position 100 00 to 100 00 4 Bottom Bottom position 100 00 to 100 00 5 Soft Box softness 0 00 to 100 00 e When a pattern is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 244 a The pattern is the same as a standard wipe See the appendix Wipe Pattern List Volume 2 To select the pattern display the Mask Ptn Select menu by pressing the Mask Ptn Select button in the M
361. uses Making video process settings for an AUX bus page 378 e Overview of video process Video Process page 83 This section describes an example on the background A bus of the M E 1 bank For the background B bus or utility bus 1 or 2 make the adjustment with a similar procedure Making video process settings for each bus Use the following procedure 1 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button M E1 and select VF7 Misc and HF2 Video Process 2 In the lt Bkgd A gt group press Video Process turning it on 3 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Video Gain Video signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 2 Y Gain Luminance signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 4 Hue Delay Hue delay 180 00 to 180 00 5 Black Level Black level 7 30 to 109 58 To return the parameter settings to the defaults Press Unity in the lt Bkgd A gt group Video Process Settings 379 934 NU W OSIN OL 4a deYyO 944 NU WN OSIN OL 4a deyD 380 Video Process Settings Index A Additive mix 47 Alarm 151 Angle 61 Aspect ratio 63 317 326 Attributes 141 Auto chroma key adjustments 266 transition 42 141 243 AUTO button 193 AUTO DELEG button 182 AUTO INS button 190 AUTO TRANS button 174 176 208 Auto manual transition combi nation 244 AUX bus settings 15
362. ute the function These buttons are in groups by function In the screen example shown on the previous page the Key Bus and Matte function buttons constitute the lt Key Fill gt group Parameter group button This displays parameter group names for which the knobs can make adjustments the current parameter setting page number and the total number of the parameter setting pages Example Color Vector 1 2 When there are more than five parameters within the same parameter group press this button to display the sixth and subsequent parameters which can then be controlled by the knobs Knob parameter buttons These show the parameters currently controlled by the knobs and their values Pressing one of these buttons displays the numeric keypad window see page 218 and you can then enter a new value for the corresponding parameter with the numeric keypad Previous page button This shows the page number of the previously displayed menu screen Press it to go back to that page When the indication Parent appears this displays the parent directory O Keyframe status This shows the keyframe status of the reference region Pressing this button switches the menu screen as follows When a menu other than the Key Frame menu is currently shown The menu screen switches to the Key Frame menu When the Key Frame menu is currently shown The menu screen switches to the menu that was on the screen immediately befo
363. ution modes depending on the number of DME channels available one channel mode and two channel mode The pattern numbers that can be used in these modes are as follows Execution mode One channel mode Preset pattern numbers available 1Xxx User programmable DME pattern numbers available 1901 to 1999 Two channel mode 2XXX 2901 to 2999 DME wipe pattern groups The patterns used in DME wipes fall into the following groups For each group excluding user programmable DMEs for schematic patterns and numbers see the appendix DME Wipe Pattern List Volume 2 The black part of the pattern represents the old video and the white part the new video with the wipe taking place in the direction of the arrow 68 DME Wipes Slide The new video slides in over the old video Pattern numbers 1001 to 1008 one channel mode 2601 to 2608 two channel mode Split The old video splits and the new video appears in the gap Pattern numbers 1011 to 1013 one channel mode Squeeze The new video appears squeezed over the old video and progressively expands to cover it Pattern numbers 1021 to 1031 one channel mode 2621 to 2628 two channel mode Door The new video moves like a door closing and progressively covers the old video Pattern numbers 1041 to 1044 one channel mode Flip tumble The old video rotates about an axis and is replaced by the new video During the transit
364. utton is set to be a SHIFT button in a 32 button system the cross point buttons switch to the shifted allocation while the SHIFT button is enabled XPT HOLD cross point hold buttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to enable cross point hold KEY button While this button is held down you can use the cross point row of buttons to select key signals 2ND button After selecting a bus with an AUX delegation button hold down this button and select another AUX delegation thus allocating a different bus in the 2nd row from the Ist row Source name displays These show the names of the source signals which can be selected by the cross point buttons While the SHIFT button is enabled the shifted signal name is displayed If a different bus is allocated to the 2nd row while the 2ND button is held down the 2nd row signal name is displayed While the KEY button is held down the source name of the key signal assigned to the cross point buttons appears SHIFT button While this button is enabled the shifted signal names appear in the source name display Pressing this buttons toggles the source name display between the shifted signal names and unshifted signal names 195 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jauUeg 04u00 pue snua z seldeup jeueg OuJUOD pue snua z Je deuD 196 RTR button Level selection buttons Names and Functions of Parts of the Co
365. wipe patterns see Types of DME Wipe Pattern page 68 and the appendix DME Wipe Pattern List Volume 2 The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen 3 Press the button to select the desired pattern Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers You can set the pattern position for an independent key transition DME wipe For an overview of this function see Positioner page 61 Setting the DME wipe position Positioner Use the following procedure 1 In the lt Position gt group of the Key DME Wipe Adjust menu press Position turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 2 V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 To return the DME wipe pattern position to the center of the screen In the lt Position gt group press Center 340 DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions DME Wipe Snapshots To carry out DME wipe snapshot operations use the Flexi Pad control block You can save recall and delete DME wipe snapshots using the procedures similar to the procedures for wipe snapshot operations In DME wipe snapshot operations use the DME button instead of the WIPE button used in wipe snapshot operations In a simple type Flexi Pad control block it is not possible to delete a DME wipe snapshot For details of the operating procedures see
366. witch Brightness Adjust the switch brightness Touch Beep Select whether or not to sound a beep when a menu operation is carried out Touch Panel Calibration Calibrate the touch panel Switcher Setup In switcher setup make settings particular to the switcher processor Setup 151 suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoloun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD You can make the following settings Settings relating to overall switcher configuration Config e System Phase Adjust the switcher internal reference phase e Switch Timing Specify the timing of video switching e M E Config Set the program configuration for the M E and P P outputs Standard mode Fix the maximum of four outputs Out to 4 and program output configuration as follows Outl Program output Out2 Preview output Out3 Clean output Out4 Key preview output Program output Clean output key 1 key 2 key 3 key 4 Multi program mode Increase the number of M E or P P programs and assign any of the following to the maximum of six outputs Out to 6 Program outputs to 4 preview output key preview outputs and 2 clean output Further you can select the program background from Clean or Utility2 and change the combination of signals from which it is configured Again you can set the key preview configuration to video mode or key mode In key mode select whether to link operation to the on off state of the key or have it always on
367. xes 16 9 mode Digital Multi Effects DME Detents Limits of three dimensional parameters The following table shows the limits of three dimensional transformation parameters The three dimensional parameters of an image change when you use the trackball or Z ring to execute a transformation You can also execute a transformation by entering parameter values from the numeric keypad control block Operation mode Limits of three dimensional transformation parameters Location XYZ 333 3333 to 333 3333 Rotation Spin 999 9999 to 999 9999 Axis Location 333 3333 to 333 3333 Location Size 0 0000 to 999 9999 Aspect 0 0000 to 2 0000 Perspective x y 333 3333 to 333 3333 Perspective z 0 0000 to 999 9999 Skew 3 3333 to 3 3333 The system defines points called detents at regular intervals on the three dimensional space Pressing the CTR button in the device control block sets the current three dimensional parameter values to the closest detent points For details see Three Dimensional Transformation Operations in Chapter 11 Volume 2 The following table shows the interval between successive detents for each transformation operation mode see page 90 Operation mode Detent interval Location XYZ 1 00 Rotation Spin 0 25 Axis Location 1 00 Location Size 0 25 Aspect 1 00 4 Perspective x y 1 00 Perspective z 1 00 Skew 0 10
368. y e When wipe is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 to 100 2 Soft Edge softness 0 to 100 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 295 skey yp saydeyo shay vp Ja deyo e When utility 1 bus is selected Knob __ Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Reference level for 109 to 7 creating mask signal 2 Gain Gain 100 shown as 00 to 100 Applying a DME Effect to a Key Assigning a DME to a key Use the following procedure 1 2 In the key control block press the delegation buttons M E1 and KEY 1 Using the DME channel selection buttons select the DME channel DME1 to DME4 for applying the effect The lit colors of the DME1 to DME4 buttons indicate the DME assignment Lit green Shows the DME assigned to the currently selected key Lit amber Shows the DME assigned to a key other than the currently selected key Off DME is not assigned To select a DME being used by another keyer Press Override turning it on then select the DME channel The later selection is valid and the button lights green Using two or three DME channels on one keyer Use the following procedure 1 Select the DME for the first channel see the previous item Assigning a DME to a key then select the successive channel for the second channel For the third channel select the channel after that
369. y for further use as material for editing The memory capacity for freeze images is a maximum of 222 frames For details of operations see Frame Memory Operations page 348 Use of frame memory There are eight frame memory channels FM1 to FM8 and each channel independently allows a freeze image to be saved or recalled By allocating FM1 to FM8 to cross point buttons you can use the still image output from each channel as input material The still image refers to a freeze image written to temporary memory or a file saved stored in memory Correspondence between input and output There are two buses for capturing frame memory material the frame memory source bus and the frame memory source 2 bus These input buses are used by allocation to one of the pairs of output FM1 amp 2 FM3 amp 4 FM5 amp 6 and FM7 amp 8 You can freeze a frame in each channel separately or freeze in the two channels simultaneously The source buses allocated to FM1 to FM8 are as follows Input Frame memory source bus 1 Frame memory source bus 2 Output FM1 FM2 FM3 FM4 FM5 FM6 FM7 FM8 Pair mode By enabling the pair mode you can link FM1 and FM2 FM3 and FM4 FM5 and FM6 and FM7 and FM8 For example when a freeze or image processing is carried out on FM1 the same operation is carried out on FM2 The same applies to the other pairs When a pair of images are captured in pair mode the image frozen in FM1
370. y transition control block press the delegation button KEY 1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 in the PGM PST bank for the key for which you want to set the transition rate The numeric keypad control block changes to the mode for inputting the independent key transition rate and its display now shows the corresponding region name and the current transition rate set for the region With the numeric keypad enter the transition rate e Enter a value of up to three digits e To clear the entry value press the CLR button For details of frame input mode and timecode input mode see page 236 Press the ENTER button This confirms the entry and the selected region name and the set transition rate appear in the numeric keypad control block display To enter a difference from the current value After pressing the button enter the difference and press the TRIM button To change the sign or press the button Setting the independent key transition rate by a menu operation Use the following procedure 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first the desired one from VF1 Keyl to VF4 Key4 then HF6 Transition The Transition menu for the selected key appears Select any transition type in the lt Transition Type gt group If in the Setup menus you set insertion deletion as independent modes make the settings for insertion in the lt On Transition Type gt group and the settings for del
371. yframe effects Classification Functions supported Menu No See page Vol 1 Vol 2 Keyframe creation Keyframe loop 129 128 and execution Attributes effect dissolve 6221 128 150 Master timeline Master timeline creation and saving 6211 to 6217 139 145 Menu operations Simultaneous operations in multiple regions 6221 to 6227 170 a Not supported by DME Functions relating to snapshots Classification Functions supported Menu No See page Vol 1 Vol 2 Master snapshot Master snapshot creation and saving 6311 to 6317 140 174 Menu operations Simultaneous operations in multiple regions 6321 to 6357 170 Functions relating to utility shotbox Classification Functions supported Menu No See page Vol 1 Vol 2 Utility Utility function execution 143 178 Shotbox Shotbox register creation from the numeric 181 keypad control block Menu operations Simultaneous shotbox register creation in 6411 1 183 multiple regions Functions relating to setup Classification Functions supported Menu No See page Vol 1 Vol 2 System Master panel for tally control 7312 1 197 Key bus delegation button setting initial status 7314 200 setting Control panels Link settings relating internal switcher buses to 7321 3 149 207 Config routing switcher destinations Reference module selection for the device 7321 149 210 control block Region selection butto
372. you can check the position and size of the image If there is a shadow see page 116 a frame is shown for the shadow as well Coordinate axes This is a three dimensional display of coordinates in local or global coordinate space You can check the origin of the axes and the directions of the x y and Z axes Channel ID This displays the channel number so that you can check which channel you are using a useful feature when you are working with multiple channels Channel IDs are displayed differently in local and global coordinate space e In local coordinate space the channel number is displayed along with F or B to indicate whether you are looking at the front F or back B of the current wire frame For example 1F means the front of the wire frame on channel in local coordinate space Digital Multi Effects DME suonoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deyo suoljoun4 0006 SAC_ Ja deuD 96 e In global coordinate space the channel number is displayed along with G to indicate global For example G2 means channel 2 in global coordinate space Local coordinate space axes Wire frame Channel ID Wire frame local coordinate space axes and channel ID Grid This is a grid pattern representing the whole of the monitor screen The grid makes it easy to set the position of an image in two dimensional coordinates 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 mrar 3
373. ype selection buttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to select the desired key type Depending on the selected key type various parameters are displayed and you can set the values with the knobs LUM luminance key The background is cut out according to the luminance Y of the key source signal and at the same time the key fill signal is cut out and then added to the background signal LIN linear key This is a type of luminance key with a reduced variation in gain and a higher adjustment precision CRK chroma key A particular hue usually blue in the key source signal is used to determine the hole to be cut in the background and filled with the key fill signal CVK color vector key The background is cut out with a key source created by adding the luminance and chrominance components of the key signal If the saturation is high this allows perfect keying even if the luminance level is low and the signal is not suitable for luminance keying PTN wipe pattern key A hole is cut in the background by a wipe pattern Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel selected in the transition and this is filled with the key fill signal Key fill key source selection buttons AUTO SEL selection Use the signal selected on the key fill bus and the paired key source signal The setting of key fill and key source pairs is carried out in a Setup menu SPLIT To use the signal selected on the k

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

BIO CONTROL G - Orea Diffusion  PRIMO L PRIMO XL  Mode d`emploi Balance compacte  Polk Audio Speaker SC60 User's Manual  Belkin Home Charger  Fire Engine Toddler BedTM  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file